WO1995031069A1 - Television schedule information transmission and utilization system and process - Google Patents

Television schedule information transmission and utilization system and process Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO1995031069A1
WO1995031069A1 PCT/US1995/005169 US9505169W WO9531069A1 WO 1995031069 A1 WO1995031069 A1 WO 1995031069A1 US 9505169 W US9505169 W US 9505169W WO 9531069 A1 WO9531069 A1 WO 9531069A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
data processing
schedule information
data
television schedule
region
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US1995/005169
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
John H. Roop
Alan R. Ebright
Jeffrey J. Kochy
David P. Warden
Konstantine Sokolik
Giambattista A. Alegiani
Original Assignee
Starsight Telecast, Inc.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from US08/243,598 external-priority patent/US5619274A/en
Application filed by Starsight Telecast, Inc. filed Critical Starsight Telecast, Inc.
Priority to KR1019960706307A priority Critical patent/KR100485279B1/en
Priority to AU26355/95A priority patent/AU694521B2/en
Priority to EP95921225A priority patent/EP0761061A4/en
Priority to JP7529004A priority patent/JPH10503628A/en
Priority to CA002189454A priority patent/CA2189454C/en
Publication of WO1995031069A1 publication Critical patent/WO1995031069A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/20Servers specifically adapted for the distribution of content, e.g. VOD servers; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/25Management operations performed by the server for facilitating the content distribution or administrating data related to end-users or client devices, e.g. end-user or client device authentication, learning user preferences for recommending movies
    • H04N21/262Content or additional data distribution scheduling, e.g. sending additional data at off-peak times, updating software modules, calculating the carousel transmission frequency, delaying a video stream transmission, generating play-lists
    • H04N21/26291Content or additional data distribution scheduling, e.g. sending additional data at off-peak times, updating software modules, calculating the carousel transmission frequency, delaying a video stream transmission, generating play-lists for providing content or additional data updates, e.g. updating software modules, stored at the client
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B27/00Editing; Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Monitoring; Measuring tape travel
    • G11B27/10Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Measuring tape travel
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B27/00Editing; Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Monitoring; Measuring tape travel
    • G11B27/10Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Measuring tape travel
    • G11B27/102Programmed access in sequence to addressed parts of tracks of operating record carriers
    • G11B27/107Programmed access in sequence to addressed parts of tracks of operating record carriers of operating tapes
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B27/00Editing; Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Monitoring; Measuring tape travel
    • G11B27/10Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Measuring tape travel
    • G11B27/11Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Measuring tape travel by using information not detectable on the record carrier
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B27/00Editing; Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Monitoring; Measuring tape travel
    • G11B27/10Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Measuring tape travel
    • G11B27/19Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Measuring tape travel by using information detectable on the record carrier
    • G11B27/28Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Measuring tape travel by using information detectable on the record carrier by using information signals recorded by the same method as the main recording
    • G11B27/30Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Measuring tape travel by using information detectable on the record carrier by using information signals recorded by the same method as the main recording on the same track as the main recording
    • G11B27/3027Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Measuring tape travel by using information detectable on the record carrier by using information signals recorded by the same method as the main recording on the same track as the main recording used signal is digitally coded
    • G11B27/3036Time code signal
    • G11B27/3054Vertical Interval Time code [VITC]
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B27/00Editing; Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Monitoring; Measuring tape travel
    • G11B27/10Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Measuring tape travel
    • G11B27/34Indicating arrangements 
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/43Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
    • H04N21/433Content storage operation, e.g. storage operation in response to a pause request, caching operations
    • H04N21/4334Recording operations
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/43Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
    • H04N21/434Disassembling of a multiplex stream, e.g. demultiplexing audio and video streams, extraction of additional data from a video stream; Remultiplexing of multiplex streams; Extraction or processing of SI; Disassembling of packetised elementary stream
    • H04N21/4345Extraction or processing of SI, e.g. extracting service information from an MPEG stream
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/43Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
    • H04N21/435Processing of additional data, e.g. decrypting of additional data, reconstructing software from modules extracted from the transport stream
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/45Management operations performed by the client for facilitating the reception of or the interaction with the content or administrating data related to the end-user or to the client device itself, e.g. learning user preferences for recommending movies, resolving scheduling conflicts
    • H04N21/462Content or additional data management, e.g. creating a master electronic program guide from data received from the Internet and a Head-end, controlling the complexity of a video stream by scaling the resolution or bit-rate based on the client capabilities
    • H04N21/4622Retrieving content or additional data from different sources, e.g. from a broadcast channel and the Internet
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/47End-user applications
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/47End-user applications
    • H04N21/472End-user interface for requesting content, additional data or services; End-user interface for interacting with content, e.g. for content reservation or setting reminders, for requesting event notification, for manipulating displayed content
    • H04N21/47214End-user interface for requesting content, additional data or services; End-user interface for interacting with content, e.g. for content reservation or setting reminders, for requesting event notification, for manipulating displayed content for content reservation or setting reminders; for requesting event notification, e.g. of sport results or stock market
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/60Network structure or processes for video distribution between server and client or between remote clients; Control signalling between clients, server and network components; Transmission of management data between server and client, e.g. sending from server to client commands for recording incoming content stream; Communication details between server and client 
    • H04N21/63Control signaling related to video distribution between client, server and network components; Network processes for video distribution between server and clients or between remote clients, e.g. transmitting basic layer and enhancement layers over different transmission paths, setting up a peer-to-peer communication via Internet between remote STB's; Communication protocols; Addressing
    • H04N21/633Control signals issued by server directed to the network components or client
    • H04N21/6332Control signals issued by server directed to the network components or client directed to client
    • H04N21/6334Control signals issued by server directed to the network components or client directed to client for authorisation, e.g. by transmitting a key
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/60Network structure or processes for video distribution between server and client or between remote clients; Control signalling between clients, server and network components; Transmission of management data between server and client, e.g. sending from server to client commands for recording incoming content stream; Communication details between server and client 
    • H04N21/65Transmission of management data between client and server
    • H04N21/654Transmission by server directed to the client
    • H04N21/6543Transmission by server directed to the client for forcing some client operations, e.g. recording
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/80Generation or processing of content or additional data by content creator independently of the distribution process; Content per se
    • H04N21/83Generation or processing of protective or descriptive data associated with content; Content structuring
    • H04N21/84Generation or processing of descriptive data, e.g. content descriptors
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N5/00Details of television systems
    • H04N5/76Television signal recording
    • H04N5/78Television signal recording using magnetic recording
    • H04N5/782Television signal recording using magnetic recording on tape
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N7/00Television systems
    • H04N7/025Systems for the transmission of digital non-picture data, e.g. of text during the active part of a television frame
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N7/00Television systems
    • H04N7/08Systems for the simultaneous or sequential transmission of more than one television signal, e.g. additional information signals, the signals occupying wholly or partially the same frequency band, e.g. by time division
    • H04N7/087Systems for the simultaneous or sequential transmission of more than one television signal, e.g. additional information signals, the signals occupying wholly or partially the same frequency band, e.g. by time division with signal insertion during the vertical blanking interval only
    • H04N7/088Systems for the simultaneous or sequential transmission of more than one television signal, e.g. additional information signals, the signals occupying wholly or partially the same frequency band, e.g. by time division with signal insertion during the vertical blanking interval only the inserted signal being digital
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N7/00Television systems
    • H04N7/08Systems for the simultaneous or sequential transmission of more than one television signal, e.g. additional information signals, the signals occupying wholly or partially the same frequency band, e.g. by time division
    • H04N7/087Systems for the simultaneous or sequential transmission of more than one television signal, e.g. additional information signals, the signals occupying wholly or partially the same frequency band, e.g. by time division with signal insertion during the vertical blanking interval only
    • H04N7/088Systems for the simultaneous or sequential transmission of more than one television signal, e.g. additional information signals, the signals occupying wholly or partially the same frequency band, e.g. by time division with signal insertion during the vertical blanking interval only the inserted signal being digital
    • H04N7/0884Systems for the simultaneous or sequential transmission of more than one television signal, e.g. additional information signals, the signals occupying wholly or partially the same frequency band, e.g. by time division with signal insertion during the vertical blanking interval only the inserted signal being digital for the transmission of additional display-information, e.g. menu for programme or channel selection
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N7/00Television systems
    • H04N7/08Systems for the simultaneous or sequential transmission of more than one television signal, e.g. additional information signals, the signals occupying wholly or partially the same frequency band, e.g. by time division
    • H04N7/087Systems for the simultaneous or sequential transmission of more than one television signal, e.g. additional information signals, the signals occupying wholly or partially the same frequency band, e.g. by time division with signal insertion during the vertical blanking interval only
    • H04N7/088Systems for the simultaneous or sequential transmission of more than one television signal, e.g. additional information signals, the signals occupying wholly or partially the same frequency band, e.g. by time division with signal insertion during the vertical blanking interval only the inserted signal being digital
    • H04N7/0887Systems for the simultaneous or sequential transmission of more than one television signal, e.g. additional information signals, the signals occupying wholly or partially the same frequency band, e.g. by time division with signal insertion during the vertical blanking interval only the inserted signal being digital for the transmission of programme or channel identifying signals
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N7/00Television systems
    • H04N7/08Systems for the simultaneous or sequential transmission of more than one television signal, e.g. additional information signals, the signals occupying wholly or partially the same frequency band, e.g. by time division
    • H04N7/087Systems for the simultaneous or sequential transmission of more than one television signal, e.g. additional information signals, the signals occupying wholly or partially the same frequency band, e.g. by time division with signal insertion during the vertical blanking interval only
    • H04N7/088Systems for the simultaneous or sequential transmission of more than one television signal, e.g. additional information signals, the signals occupying wholly or partially the same frequency band, e.g. by time division with signal insertion during the vertical blanking interval only the inserted signal being digital
    • H04N7/0888Subscription systems therefor
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N7/00Television systems
    • H04N7/10Adaptations for transmission by electrical cable
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N7/00Television systems
    • H04N7/16Analogue secrecy systems; Analogue subscription systems
    • H04N7/162Authorising the user terminal, e.g. by paying; Registering the use of a subscription channel, e.g. billing
    • H04N7/165Centralised control of user terminal ; Registering at central

Definitions

  • the present invention relates generally to a system and method for broadcasting, receiving and using television schedule information. More particularly, it relates to such a system and method in which the television schedule information is broadcast in, e.g., the vertical blanking interval (VBI) of a television broadcast, a schedule of television programs for a user's broadcast area or cable system is compiled from the broadcast, and the schedule is displayed on the user ' s television set for interactive use.
  • VBI vertical blanking interval
  • the term "broadcast” is used in a broad sense to include such transmission modes as cable and telephonic transmission.
  • the solution proposed by Hallenbeck is to subdivide the schedule information into prioritized categories, store the highest priority category, and as much of the lower priority categories as possible in the amount of memory available.
  • a significant problem with this approach is that less information may be provided about programs in the schedule when there are more programs in the schedule and the need for more information is greatest. Further development in light of the memory and processor limitations of consumer electronics is therefore required.
  • schedule information is transmitted as part of a program broadcast signal and a prior art subscriber unit acquires the schedule information from the program broadcast signal, a potential problem arises when previously broadcast programs have been recorded on a VCR and are played back.
  • the prior art subscriber unit lacks any ability to distinguish a video signal generated from a recorded program from a video signal received in real time from a broadcast. As a result, the subscriber unit may overwrite more recent program schedule information acquired from a real time broadcast with older program schedule information coming from a video tape.
  • Proposals to transmit television schedule information with television broadcast signals often use a low bandwidth transmission mode, such as one or more lines in the vertical blanking interval (VBI) of the television broadcast signals.
  • VBI vertical blanking interval
  • the use of such low bandwidth transmission modes means that the format and management of the transmissions must be carefully planned in order to avoid practical problems. For example, when a schedule update is to be transmitted, unless special provisions are made for such updates, worst case transmission delay until the update is received and entered in a user's subscriber unit could amount to five hours, the time for transmission of a complete schedule for a week in an NTSC television broadcast signal using one line of the VBI for the schedule information. In the case of last minute schedule changes, such a delay would be unacceptable.
  • Data encryption is essential for a subscription-based broadcast television schedule system. Without data encryption, the schedule information could be acquired and used by pirate user equipment without payment of the subscription fee. However, decryption of encoded data is a processor intensive. A conventional approach of encrypting the entire schedule information transmission requires a faster and more expensive microprocessor than would otherwise be suitable for the subscriber units.
  • an object of this invention to provide an interactive television program schedule system and method that can be implemented with low cost microprocessors and memory in subscriber data processing systems. It is another object of the invention to provide an interactive television program schedule system and method in which television program schedule data is transmitted and stored in a manner that allows a low cost microprocessor suitable for use in a mass produced consumer product to carry out subset searching of the television program schedule data.
  • a television schedule information transmission and utilization system in accordance with this invention has a central data processing system.
  • a means is connected to the central data processing system for providing schedule information data for a predetermined territory to the central data processing system.
  • the central data processing system includes means for formatting the schedule information data for the predetermined territory into a predetermined schedule information transmission format.
  • a means is coupled to the central data processing system for transmitting the schedule information data for the predetermined territory in the predetermined schedule information transmission formats.
  • a plurality of regional data processing systems each located in a region of the predetermined territory, include means for receiving the schedule information data for the predetermined territory, means for selecting the schedule information data for the region in which each of the plurality of regional data processing systems is located and means for transmitting the schedule information data for the region.
  • a plurality of subscriber data processing systems are in each of the regions. Each of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems include means for receiving at least a portion of the schedule information data for the region, means for storing the schedule information data received by the subscriber data processing system, means for assembling portions of the schedule information data received by the subscriber data processing system for display to a user of the subscriber data processing system and a display connected to the means for assembling portions of the schedule information data to display the portions of the schedule information data.
  • a television schedule information transmission system in another aspect of the invention, includes a central data processing system for a predetermined territory having means for transmitting television schedule data for the predetermined territory and subscriber data processing systems in the predetermined territory.
  • the system is improved with a plurality of regional data processing systems, each located in a region of the predetermined territory.
  • the plurality of regional data processing systems each include means for receiving the schedule information data for the predetermined territory, means for selecting the schedule information data for the region in which each of said plurality of regional data processing systems is located and means for transmitting the schedule information data for the region to a plurality of the subscriber data processing systems in each of the regions.
  • the means for transmitting the schedule information data for the region in each of said plurality of regional data processing systems has an ability to transmit the schedule information data for the region in different places of a television broadcast signal.
  • Each of the subscriber data processing systems includes a means for locating the schedule information data in the television broadcast signal.
  • a method in a television schedule information transmission system includes transmitting schedule information data for a predetermined territory to a plurality of regional data processing systems each located in a region of the territory.
  • the schedule information data for each region is selected with its regional data processing system
  • the schedule information data for each region is transmitted with its regional data processing system to a plurality of subscriber data processing systems in each region. Portions of the schedule information data received by each subscriber data processing system are assembled for display to a user of each subscriber data processing system. The portions of the schedule information data are displayed to the user.
  • the method further desirably includes having at least some of the plurality of regional data processing systems transmit the schedule information data in different places of a television broadcast signal.
  • Each of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems locates the schedule information data in the television broadcast signal.
  • a television schedule information transmission system includes a central data processing system for a predetermined territory having means for transmitting television schedule data for the predetermined territory and a plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the predetermined territory.
  • the system is improved by providing means in the central data processing system for transmitting the television schedule data as commands.
  • the commands include instructions for the plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the system and television schedule information in elemental form used by the commands in the plurality of subscriber data processing systems to assemble and display a television schedule.
  • a method in a television schedule information transmission system includes transmitting commands from a central data processing system to a plurality of subscriber data processing systems.
  • the commands include instructions for the plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the system and television schedule information used by the commands in the plurality of subscriber data processing systems to assemble and display a television schedule.
  • the television schedule is assembled from the television schedule information in each of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems.
  • the television schedule is displayed to a user of each of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems.
  • a television schedule information transmission system includes a central data processing system for a predetermined territory having means for transmitting television schedule data for the predetermined territory and a plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the predetermined territory.
  • the system is improved with means in the central data processing system for transmitting a predetermined character string comprising a portion of the schedule information to the plurality of subscriber data processing systems.
  • a means in each of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems determines whether the predetermined character string has been acquired by that subscriber data processing system.
  • a means in each of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems stores the predetermined character string in that subscriber data processing system if it has not already been acquired.
  • a method in a television schedule information transmission system includes transmitting a predetermined character string comprising a portion of the schedule information to a plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the system. Whether the predetermined character string has been acquired by a particular subscriber data processing system is determined.
  • a television schedule information transmission system includes a direct broadcast satellite.
  • a central data processing system has means for transmitting television schedule data for the direct broadcast satellite to the direct broadcast satellite.
  • Subscriber data processing systems have means for receiving the television schedule data for the direct broadcast satellite from the direct broadcast satellite.
  • the system is improved with a plurality of regional data processing systems, each located in a region of a predetermined territory.
  • the plurality of regional data processing systems each include means for receiving the schedule information data for the predetermined territory.
  • Means selects the schedule information data for the region in which each of the plurality of regional data processing systems is located.
  • Means transmits the schedule information data for the region to a plurality of the subscriber data processing systems in each of the regions.
  • a method in a television schedule transmission system includes transmitting television schedule data for a direct broadcast satellite to the direct broadcast satellite.
  • the television schedule data for the direct broadcast satellite is received from the direct broadcast satellite at a subscriber data processing system.
  • Schedule information data for a predetermined territory is received in a regional data processing system located in a region of the predetermined territory.
  • the schedule information data for the region in which the regional data processing system is located is selected in the regional data processor.
  • the schedule information data for the region is transmitted to the subscriber data processing system.
  • a television schedule information transmission system includes a central data processing system having means for transmitting television schedule data.
  • a subscriber data processing system has means for receiving at least some of the television schedule data transmitted by the central data processing system.
  • the system is improved by providing a subscriber data processing system including a memory for efficiently storing database items comprising the television schedule information.
  • Each of the database items has a handle as an index into a handle table identifying memory locations corresponding to the handle. This allows physical movement of database items from one memory location to another for garbage collection. This allows holes in the database memory which arise as data ages and is discarded to be recovered and concatenated into large useful memory blocks. This trades "free" microcontroller cycles for memory, which is expensive.
  • a method in a television schedule information transmission system includes transmitting television schedule data. At least some of the television schedule data is received at a subscriber data processing system as database items comprising the television schedule information. Each of the database items has a handle. The handle is used as an index into a handle table identifying memory locations corresponding to the handle.
  • a television schedule information transmission system includes a central data processing system for a predetermined territory having means for transmitting television schedule data for the predetermined territory including updates of television schedule data previously transmitted.
  • a method in a television schedule information transmission system includes establishing a relative priority for transmission of the television schedule information between updates of originally transmitted television schedule information and originally transmitted schedule information.
  • the television schedule information is transmitted in accordance with the relative priority. At least some of the transmitted television schedule information is received at a subscriber data processing system.
  • a television schedule information transmission system includes a central data processing system for a predetermined territory having means for transmitting television schedule data for the predetermined territory and a plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the predetermined territory.
  • Each of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems includes a receiver for television schedule data.
  • a memory for storing television schedule data is coupled to the receiver.
  • the system is improved by including means in the central data processing system for identifying the transmitted television schedule data by time relative to other transmitted television schedule data. Means in the subscriber data processing system determines if television schedule data received by the subscriber data processing system has a time identification later than a time identification of television schedule data stored in the memory.
  • a method in a television schedule transmission system includes transmitting television schedule data with an identification of the transmitted television schedule data by time relative to other transmitted television schedule data.
  • the transmitted television -schedule data is received with a subscriber data processing system.
  • the television schedule data is stored in a memory of the subscriber data processing system.
  • Television schedule data is subsequently supplied including an identification by time relative to other television schedule data.
  • the identification by time of the subsequently supplied television schedule data is compared with the identification by time of the television schedule data stored in the memory.
  • the stored television schedule data is replaced with the subsequently supplied television schedule data if the identification by time of the subsequently supplied television schedule data is later than the identification by time of the stored television schedule data.
  • the stored television schedule data is maintained in the memory if the identification by time of the stored television schedule data is later than the identification by time of the subsequently supplied television schedule data.
  • a television schedule information transmission system includes a central data processing system for a predetermined territory having means for transmitting television schedule data for the predetermined territory and a plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the predetermined territory.
  • Each of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems includes a receiver for television schedule data.
  • a memory for storing television schedule data is coupled to the receiver.
  • the system is improved by including means in the central data processing system for encrypting a selected portion of the television schedule data required by the subscriber data processing system to assemble a television schedule for display. Means in the subscriber data processing system decrypts the selected portion of the television schedule data.
  • a method in a television schedule transmission system includes selectively encrypting a portion of television schedule data necessary to assemble a television schedule for display.
  • the television schedule data including d e encrypted portion is transmitted.
  • the television schedule data is received in a subscriber data processing system.
  • the encrypted portion of the television schedule data is decrypted.
  • the television schedule data, including the now decrypted portion is used to assemble a television schedule for display.
  • a television schedule information transmission system includes a central data processing system for a predetermined territory having means for transmitting television schedule data for the predetermined territory and a plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the predetermined territory.
  • Each of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems includes a receiver for television schedule data.
  • a memory for storing television schedule data is coupled to the receiver.
  • the system is improved by including a real time clock in the central data processing system for establishing a single system time for the transmission system.
  • the means for transmitting television schedule data includes means for transmitting the single system time.
  • the receiver includes means for receiving the single system time.
  • the memory has a stored value for calculating local real time from the single system time.
  • a method in a television schedule transmission system includes establishing a single system time related to real time.
  • the single system time is transmitted to a subscriber data processing system.
  • Television schedule data expressed in the single system time is transmitted to the subscriber data processing system.
  • a value is provided to the subscriber data processing system for calculating local real time from the single system time. Local times are calculated for a television schedule from the schedule data expressed in the single system time using the value.
  • a television schedule information transmission system includes a central data processing system for a predetermined territory having means for transmitting television schedule data for the predetermined territory and a plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the predetermined territory.
  • Each of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems includes a receiver for television schedule data.
  • a memory for storing television schedule data is coupled to the receiver.
  • the system is improved by having the means for transmitting television schedule data configured to transmit the television schedule data as a show list for each day in the television schedule.
  • the subscriber data processing system is configured to maintain show lists for a rolling window comprising a plurality of days extending from present time into future time.
  • a method in a television schedule information transmission system includes transmitting television schedule data as a show list for each day in the television schedule. Show lists are maintained for a rolling window comprising a plurality of days extending from present time into future time.
  • a television schedule information transmission system includes a central data processing system for a predetermined territory having means for transmitting television schedule data for the predetermined territory and a plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the predetermined territory.
  • Each of said plurality of subscriber data processing systems includes a receiver for television schedule data.
  • a memory for storing television schedule data is coupled to the receiver.
  • the system is improved by having the subscriber data processing systems configured to store the television schedule data in compressed form in the memory.
  • a read only memory in the data processing system stores fixed text for the system. The fixed text is stored in said read only memory in compressed form.
  • a method in a television schedule information transmission system includes storing television schedule data in compressed form in a memory of the system. Fixed text for the system is stored in a read only memory, also in compressed form.
  • Figures 1-5 are block diagrams of television schedule information transmission and utilization systems in accordance with the invention.
  • Figures 6-25 are schematic representations of message formats used in the systems of Figures 1-5.
  • Figures 26-60 are schematic representations of data structures, flow charts and display formats used in the systems of Figures 1-5.
  • the systems 50A-50D transmit TV schedule data and associated network control messages as packets via the Video Blanking Interval (VBI) lines *in the TV signal from various television program providers 51, such as PBS, MTV or Showtime.
  • VBI Video Blanking Interval
  • This data is acquired by StarSight Subscriber Units 52 and used to construct an internal database.
  • This internal database can be accessed by the Subscriber Unit 52 to display a TV schedule for the channels that are received by the user's TV. Since access to the network systems 50A-50D is via a subscription service, certain messages are encrypted by a security computer 53 to prevent access by nonsubscribers.
  • Packets contain error detection information and system overhead bytes for finding the head of a packet.
  • the information embedded in a Packet is termed a Message.
  • Messages consist of one or more Commands. There are various types of Commands, each type distinguished by a unique code number. Commands contain the different types of information necessary to construct and maintain a TV schedule database, time markers, and user authorization information.
  • the systems 50A-50D are data networks that deliver specially formatted data to subscribers 52 located throughout the USA. This data is used to build an "on screen program guide" that enables the system subscribers to interactively view television program listings on their TV screen.
  • the information for this network is derived from a database that is built by a computer program running on a UNIX computer 54. To build this database a data provider (DP) 56 is required to supply the computer 54 with program listing files called Show list files.
  • Television program schedule data is generated by a vendor company at 56 and providedto the StarSight computer center 54 in a simple interchange format. Information is encoded that specifies what television programs are on at what time and on what channel. This data is received and processed for all channels for the entire country for 10 days. Any changes to the TV schedule are transmitted as soon as they are available on an as needed basis. The following description describes the specific information and fields that are contained in the files.
  • the Show list files are transferred electronically to the file system in computer 54 through a router connected to the DP's Ethernet and a digital leased line 58, using the standard TCP/IP program, FTP, or other file transfer protocol standard mutually agreed upon.
  • the files may require compression, due to the bulk of data being transferred, using a mutually agreed upon data compression algorithm compatible with the UNIX file system in computer 54.
  • the operating speed of the leased line 58 will be sufficient to transfer all data files in a reasonable length of time.
  • the files are transferred to the computer 54 on a daily basis 7 days a week, with the file transfer completed by 0800 hours PST.
  • the daily file transfer will be into the home directory corresponding to the login name used to perform the file transfer.
  • the "Main" file download to the computer 54 will always be for the date 12 days into the future. Thus if today is the 10th, today's data download would be for start times beginning at 0000 hours GMT on the 22nd.
  • An Update file contains records of all changes that have been made since the last Update file was produced, which modify any of the data for any date which is still "active".
  • An “active" date is defined as the dates beginning with today's date, and spanning the 11 days following (that is, all dates from today to the date covered by today's "Main” file, but not including that date.
  • Last minute schedule changes require "Flash Updates", which provide a "Flash Update” file within 5 minutes after entry of any change. Such files “trickle" across the leased line 58 to the computer 54 throughout the day.
  • the TV schedule information is processed by the computer 54 and inserted into a master database. During this process, redundant information is removed. For example, if the I Love Lucy show is playing more than one time during the 10 days of schedule information, the character string for the title of that show is only stored once in the master database. For each channel and day, information is stored that specifies what shows are on at what time for the entire day. Each show may, but not necessarily, contain a show title and a show description.
  • the purpose of the master database is to store all of the TV schedule data in a relational database with standardized methods to access the data.
  • the data is organized in a way that makes retrieval of the data efficient.
  • Television viewers receive a set of television video signals at the viewing location.
  • Cable television providers assign broadcast and satellite program channels to specific channels. Every cable company has a unique assignment of channels. Every geographic location has a set of broadcast channels that may be received in that locality.
  • a subscriber unit must have a listing of the program channels and the channel assignments in order to provide a subscriber with the TV schedule data relevant to that subscriber.
  • Each unique set of channel assignments are assigned to a Reception Group. Associated with each Reception Group is a region name, reception group type (cable, broadcast, satellite), set of zip codes where this set of program channels may be received, a list of program channels received, and the channel assignment for those program channels.
  • region name Associated with each Reception Group is a region name, reception group type (cable, broadcast, satellite), set of zip codes where this set of program channels may be received, a list of program channels received, and the channel assignment for those program channels.
  • Line Up information comes from many sources, such as commercial companies that collect the information, subscribers, cable companies and analysis of broadcast channel transmission coverage.
  • Line Up information obtained from a single source is not considered correct.
  • Various processes are used to align data from the multiple sources to obtain one database with superior quality.
  • a master database is created to which all other Line Up data is compared. Changes are made to the master database when a correction is verified.
  • the primary key to associating one Line Up to another is by verifying that the zip code of the Line Ups are the same. Once the zip code information is verified, the channel assignments are compared and verified by phone calls to the cable company or subscribers in the area.
  • a computer program processes the data to emit a data stream suitable for transmission over the PBS data network.
  • the data is compressed and organized optimally for the Station Nodes and subscribers 52. The specific format of the output data stream is described below.
  • the output data stream is grouped and ordered by the data type. Due to the methods employed in the subscriber unit, it is optimal to sequence the data in a particular order. This allows the subscriber unit to collect an entire TV schedule in one pass of the data.
  • the data blocks and their order is as follows:
  • Security keys are required to restrict access to the data to only those subscribers authorized to receive the data. Portions of the data stream are encrypted using the industry standard Data Encryption Standard security key algorithm. These keys may be changed at any time. To keep all of the desired subscriber units authorized and to change the keys, a series of messages are transmitted that contain the current and future security keys. A subscriber unit's initial set of decryption keys are sent in the network message that authorizes the unit to begin collecting data. The keys in this authorization message are encrypted with a key that is unique to the individual subscriber unit.
  • the master database contains a set of attributes for each category that indicates if that TV program falls into a particular genre. Each unique combination of genre attributes are assigned a unique theme identification. Each show is assigned a theme identification based on a set of genre attributes. A table is transmitted that assigns a text description to each theme identification in the theme data block.
  • Daylight Savings Time Change Data is transmitted that specifies the time when daylight savings begins and ends.
  • a message is repeatedly transmitted on the data network that specifies the exact time that daylight savings time begins and the time that it ends. The subscriber units 52 pick this message and adjust the local time to compensate for the effect of daylight savings.
  • Reception Group data contains the necessary channel line up data for all of the unique Reception Groups. This data includes Regiod ID (unique number associated with the reception group), region type (broadcast, cable, satellite), Channel ID (unique number associated with the particular channel), and tune channel • number (channel to which the TV must be tuned to receive the channel). Any particular subscriber unit 52 is assigned to a Reception Group during the authorization process. The subscriber unit will only process the data for the
  • Each channel reference in any reception group must have an associated channel data command.
  • the channel data command contains information about that channel.
  • the native channel number (tune channel for that channel if it were a broadcast channel), station call letters, network affiliation (ABC, NBC, CBS), and an abbreviation for the channel name.
  • the later abbreviation is used to display a 1 to 4 character icon for that channel on the subscriber unit. Data for any particular channel is only transmitted once per data cycle.
  • a show list contains a list of the TV programs and their duration for a particular channel and day.
  • the command contains a Channel ID, start time for the first program, and a list of subsequent programs and their duration.
  • Each show contains a Show ID and an optional Description ID.
  • the Show ID and Description ID are each a unique number associated with the text of that show title or description, respectively.
  • Each show also contains a flag that indicates if it is a pay per view program.
  • Show Title Data Every unique show title reference in a show list has an associated Show Title command.
  • the Show Title command contains the Show ID, Theme ID, and show title text.
  • Each unique Show Title is included only once in the data stream, and may be used many times by the subscriber unit 52.
  • the text in the show title is compressed using Huffman compression techniques.
  • Show Description command contains the Show Description ID, MPAA rating, critics rating, and show description text.
  • Show Description ID contains the Show Description ID, MPAA rating, critics rating, and show description text.
  • Each unique Show Description is included only once in the data stream, and may be used many times by the subscriber unit 52.
  • the text in the show description is compressed using Huffman compression techniques.
  • Each PBS station node receives blocks of data that will be retransmitted by that station node. Only data that is required by the subscriber units in the area serviced by the station node is sent to that station node. For example, the station node in San Francisco only receives data for the cable systems and TV stations received by subscribers in the San Francisco area. None of the Los Angeles data is received by the San Francisco station node.
  • the goal of the security software for the StarSight system is provide conditional access to the StarSight data stream. Portions of the data are encrypted. Access to the schedule data is conditional in the sense that a subscriber unit 52 must know the decryption key. Only units that are authorized may receive the decryption key.
  • the conditional access system involves three levels of encryption. At the top, each unit has an RSA public/private key pair. Next, batches of up to 256 units share a DES key, which is called the batch key. At the bottom, program guides are encrypted with a DES key shared by all authorized units, which is called the program key. The program keys, changed periodically, are distributed under the batch keys, and the batch keys are distributed under the RSA keys, giving a three- level hierarchy.
  • the batch key is distributed in an authorization message, which is encrypted with the unit's RSA public key.
  • the authorization message also gives the unit a batch number, and a unit number within the batch, a "service type" field, as well as the current and next program keys.
  • the authorization message would typically be the first interaction between StarSight and a unit in the field, although it can be sent at any time to reassign batches.
  • Program keys are distributed in a key distribution message, which is encrypted with a batch key.
  • the key distribution message also indicates, according to a unit number in the batch, whether a unit is still authorized.
  • Two of the security system functions are to process the authorization and key distribution messages.
  • a third function is to decrypt encrypted text with one of the program keys.
  • the text is encrypted in cipher block chaining (CBC) mode.
  • CBC cipher block chaining
  • the subscriber unit 52 is a microprocessor based system designed to receive, process and display the TV program schedule data.
  • the subscriber unit 52 hardware includes a microprocessor, read only memory, random access memory, security co ⁇ processor, IR blaster co-processor, on screen display co-processor, and power management circuitry. These components are combined with software that implements the Electronic Program Guide system.
  • the microprocessor has many tasks to perform as will be described. Each task must be serviced in real time, but may not necessarily be completed each time slice. A "round robin" executive is used to perform this function.
  • a main loop sequentially calls each of the individual tasks. When a task is called, it will perform its defined function, based on its current state. The tasks are required to complete the entire task or a subtask in a pre-defined time period. This way, all of the tasks have an opportunity to execute their defined task within a time period. After the last task has executed its function, the first task is executed again.
  • Memory is divided into equal sized allocation blocks.
  • the set of memory blocks is referred to as the pool.
  • a handle table is created that makes references to the memory blocks in the pool.
  • An application software subroutine may allocate memory by creating and storing an entry in the handle table, which references one or more allocation units in the memory pool.
  • Memory may be de ⁇ allocated by releasing the memory references in the handle table.
  • the memory pool After many memory blocks are de-allocated, the memory pool will be fragmented. There will be many blocks of memory of varying size that are not contiguous.
  • One of the background tasks is to de-fragment the memory pool. A procedure is run that moves the allocated memory blocks to the lowest possible memory location. When a block of memory is moved, the references to that memory are changed in the handle table. This way the application program still has a reference to the memory block. Each allocation unit is moved so that any de ⁇ allocated blocks that are between allocated blocks are collapsed. The net result is that all of the de-allocated memory is at the highest possible memory location and all of the blocks are contiguous.
  • VBI data is decoded from the video stream and processed by an 8032 microprocessor.
  • a buffer is used to store the data and assemble packets.
  • a comparator is used to detect a special sync character sequence. As soon as these characters are detected, the buffer is reset and the packet header is assembled. If the correct cyclic redundancy check (CRC) of the packet header is detected, the remaining portion of the packet is assembled. After the complete packet is assembled, an additional CRC is computed to verify that the complete packet was received without an error. Once this is verified, the packet is broken up and individual network messages are passed to the command processor.
  • CRC cyclic redundancy check
  • the command processor determines if the encryption bit is set in the command header, and if so, the data is passed to the security module.
  • the security module then decrypts the data and returns it to the command processor.
  • the command processor functions as a dispatcher to send the command to the correct processing module, based on the command function.
  • the database processor is responsible for storing and retrieving all TV schedule and channel data. It receives data from the command processor and stores that data into the database. A set of function calls is used to retrieve data for the application program. The organization of the database is described below.
  • the security processor has two major functions: key management and data decryption.
  • key management When messages are received from the command processor that contain the correct serial number or batch number, the security processor receives the message and decrypts the message.
  • the data In the case of an authorization message, the data is decrypted using the RSA private key.
  • the batch number, batch key and other control information is decoded and stored for fumre use.
  • key management message the data is decrypted using the batch key, and the information is stored for future use. Program keys are distributed encrypted under the batch key.
  • the user interface takes remote control commands as its primary input.
  • a user requests various functions by pressing a button on a remote control.
  • the user interface receives these commands and responds with the requested display screen.
  • display commands are generated asynchronously when a recording begins or when the unit attempts to collect data.
  • the application has over 20 different and distinct display screens. Each display screen has associated with it a particular state. The data and format of the screen is dependent on the previous screen, the time of day, the contents of the database, and what remote control button was pressed. A state table is used to define the screen flow.
  • the entrance function is called when a state is first entered, to collect all necessary data and format the screen.
  • the exit function is called to release memory and data for the screen.
  • the update function is called once per minute to update the screen time and to re-draw the screen if any shows have ended or any recordings have started or completed.
  • the table contains a reference to another software function for every key on the remote control. These functions will be executed when the associated remote control button is pressed.
  • the user interface also manages an array of pop-up windows that may appear and disappear on the screen either synchronously or in response to key presses.
  • popup categories that define the screen priority for each, i.e., which one covers which when several popups are on the screen at once. These popups may be cursors, show descriptions, error messages, help messages, or requests for more information. Each popup category has its own entrance, exit, update, and key-handling routines similar to those of the main screen states.
  • the user interface is responsible for locking and unlocking the database while the user is interacting with the program guides, maintaining the selection and ordering of the program channels, controlling the tuner from the guide screens, performing the theme searches in the database, and controlling a demon that automatically collects schedule data at a pre-determined time from the data provider channel.
  • the purpose of the record manager is to maintain a list of recording requests and to then start a recording at the correct time on the correct channel.
  • the user interface defines three types of recordings, once, weekly and daily. The user may record the shows he/she is currently watching or select a particular title from one of the guide screens. The user will move the cursor to a particular title on one of the guides (grid, channel or theme), press the "record” button, and select if the program is to be recorded once, weekly or daily.
  • the recording queue contains entries for each of these types of recordings. In the case of the daily recordings, up to five individual entries are made in the working record queue. A single entry is made for the weekly and once recordings.
  • the working record queue represents all of the recordings that are to be done for the coming week sorted by show start times.
  • a record demon is called from the real time executive that determines if it is time to start a recording.
  • the leading entry in the working record queue is examined to detemine if it is time to start that recording. If it is time, a software function is executed that will start the recording. Once a recording is started, the record demon will determine if it is time to terminate a recording. When the stop time is reached, a software function is executed that will terminate the recording.
  • Starting and stopping a VCR recording is done in several ways, based on the configuration of the user's equipment. In the case where a cable converter is not being used, the following actions are taken to start a recording:
  • the VCR is put in stop mode and then the power is toggled. In all cases, these commands are performed by sending infrared commands to the device.
  • Another function of the record demon is to examine the queue of weekly and daily record requests and then to spawn a new entry in the working queue. For example, if it is Monday morning and a daily record request is entered for a program in the afternoon, 5 entries will be made in the working queue, i.e. Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday and Friday. After the first recording is finished on Monday afternoon, the entry in the working queue for Monday will be deleted. The record demon will examine the record queue and discover that it is time to add a new entry in the working queue for next Monday. This entry will be added in the time sorted order position in the working queue.
  • the demon maintains the proper start time when a daylight savings boundary is crossed. That is, the demon must add one hour to a show's start time in the fall and subtract one hour in the spring, provided daylight savings time is applicable to the user's region.
  • the record manager handles deletions, either singly or muliply depending on the original type of recording.
  • An on screen display is used to display the text and graphic information that makes up the various display screens.
  • a common interface is used to control various devices. Three different devices can be used: the ITT TPU2740, the ITT CCD 3005, and the Zilog Z89300.
  • the user interface has a set of functions . defined to draw text, draw an embossed rectangle, draw a channel icon, and to set the display attributes.
  • a set of software functions are used that translate these commands into the correct functions for the particular device. .
  • subscriber units 52 Details of the subscriber units 52 are provided in Figure 5. The following description is in terms of a subscriber unit 52 for a TV Receive Only (TVRO) system (see also Figure 4). With appropriate modifications, the subscriber unit 52 can also be incorporated in a cable decoder box for use with cable systems. The subscriber unit can also be built into televisions or VCRs or provided as a separate stand alone unit.
  • TVRO TV Receive Only
  • TVRO Subscriber Unit 52 This description is for the electronic hardware of the StarSight Telecast "TVRO Subscriber Unit” 52.
  • TVRO customers are people who have home satellite dishes for television viewing.
  • TVRO stands for "TV Receive Only”.
  • the TVRO Subscriber Unit 52 will hook up to the customers TVRO Satellite system and will enable the customer to subscribe to StarSight's Electronic Program Guide Service.
  • the TVRO Subscriber Unit 52 is a fully self contained, separate unit, that is installed in series with the existing customer TVRO equipment.
  • the Subscriber Unit receives Baseband Video from the customer TVRO system.
  • the Program guide display screens are merged with the customer video in the Subscriber Unit.
  • the customer has the options of Baseband Video out or Channel 3/4 RF out.
  • the Subscriber Unit formats and displays TV program schedule information in real time, overlaid on top of the TV viewing screen.
  • the TV schedule information is transmitted in one of the Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI) lines of a conventional TV broadcast.
  • VBI Vertical Blanking Interval
  • the Subscriber Unit stores this information in local on board memory.
  • the information is displayed in the form of a "Grid Guide" on the TV screen when the customer presses a button on the remote control.
  • the Subscriber Unit 52 consists of the following sub-sections:
  • Custom gate array 103 Custom gate array 103.
  • Segmented Base Registers 104 for fast memory data manipulation.
  • Security logic 106 for decoding incoming encrypted data.
  • Video Input 123
  • Custom Color Converter 126 for overlay display
  • the heart of the TVRO Subscriber Unit 52 is an "8032, 8 bit Microprocessor" 100. This microprocessor controls all sections of the Subscriber Unit. A brief description of this processor will be given for reference. For more detail, refer to the 8032 data books from Intel or Signetics.
  • the 8032 has an 8 bit Data Bus and a 16 bit Address Bus. The upper 8 bits of the address bus are always present. The lower 8 bits of the Address Bus are time multiplexed with the Data Bus and an External Address Latch is required to de-multiplex this bus. This latch is located inside of the DBE 1200 Gate Array 103.
  • the 8032 has two address spaces, the "CODE” space and the "DATA” space. The DATA space is further divided into the RAM Memory area and the I/O area. "CODE” refers to any access to Program ROM.
  • the Program CODE space is 64K bytes long and the 8032 can only "READ” from this space. All Code access uses the "PSEN" (Program Store ENable) line.
  • +ALE is the control signal used to de-multiplex the Address Bus. The falling edge of +ALE will latch the lower 8 bits of the address. -PSEN will then assert to start the ROM read.
  • the current design has the EPROM -CS line always tied to ground. This makes the EPROM "OE ACCESS” time the determining spec for ROM reads. By today's standards, this microprocessor bus timing is very slow and this allows for the use of inexpensive ROMs.
  • DATA refers to any access to external RAM 102. Special additional hardware has been added to the TVRO Subscriber Unit so that the DATA area can extend past the 64K addressing limit.
  • I/O space occupies the same first 64K segment as the DATA RAM. There is a signal called -r-DRAM_ENABLE that is used to determine which area will be accessed.
  • the I/O space is where the system control registers are located. There are 18 write registers and 13 read registers. These registers are used to control the various subsystems in the Subscriber Unit. Features like clock frequency selection, serial bus control, I.R. status and control, etc., are all controlled through this register set. There are other control registers located in the peripheral chips. The 8032 uses two serial Busses to communicate and control these peripheral chips.
  • the "IM BUS" 108 is a 3 wire serial bus used to talk to the transaction processing unit (TPU 2740) 124.
  • the TPU 2740 collects the incoming VBI data and also formats and displays the various StarSight overlay screens.
  • the Software Serial Bus 110 is used to talk to the Security Microprocessor 106 and also to the IR Blaster Chip 116. This is a two wire bus with a unique serial timing protocol.
  • the first 64K of 8032 Address Space has three separate overlapping functions.
  • Table I summarizes the input and output signals of the 8032 microprocessor:
  • PORT 0 8 bit Multiplexed 8032 Data and Address Bus.
  • I/O PORT 1 Various system control bits. I/O
  • Subscriber Unit however, is required to store more than 64K bytes of TV program data.
  • the "READ and WRITE BASE REGISTERS" allow the 8032 to access additional memory above the 64K limit.
  • the 8032 uses an internal 16 bit register called the "Data Pointer Register” (DPTR) to hold the address of the external DATA location.
  • DPTR Data Pointer Register
  • the 8032 can access any 64K byte chunk of the external RAM starting at the address written in the Base Registers. (Since the base register is shifted 4 bits left, the 8032 can access any 64K byte segment starting on even 16 byte boundaries.)
  • the upper segments are used to store TV program information.
  • Table II below tries to show how the DPTR is added to the Base Register to form the 20 bit RAM address.
  • the READ BASE REGISTER is set to 0001 Hex.
  • the WRITE BASE REGISTER is set to 1080 Hex.
  • the Data Pointer (DPTR) is set to 382A Hex.
  • the DATA RAM 102 stores the TV program guide information.
  • This RAM is currently available in 3 sizes, 128K bytes, 256K bytes or 512K bytes.
  • the TVRO product uses 512K bytes.
  • the Data RAM uses "PSRAM” chips. "PS” stands for Pseudo Static.
  • PSRAM is a standard DRAM that has been packaged with STATIC RAM pinouts. Extra logic is added so that DRAM refreshes are simplified.
  • These PSRAMs also have a power down data retention feature that works down to 3 Volts.
  • PSRAM OPERATION Sequence Up Operation
  • the PSRAMs After initial power up, the PSRAMs must be "SEQUENCED UP" before any reads or writes can be done.
  • the Sequence Up procedure is slightly different for 128K and 512K parts. This procedure was added to insure that logic and timing specifications of the PSRAM are maintained when the PSRAMs are in the power down data retention mode. There is a provision to use a large Capacitor or a Battery to keep the PSRAMs powered up when the system power is lost.
  • +Chip_Enable2 Pin 30
  • -REFRESH Pin 1
  • +Chip_Enable2 Pin 30
  • -REFRESH Pin 1
  • + CHIP_ENABLE Pin 30
  • -Chip_Enable Pin 22
  • -OE/-REFRESH Pin 24
  • -Chip_Enable Pin 22
  • -OE/-REFRESH Pin 24
  • Normal PSRAM operation is very straightforward. Refreshes are automatic and transparent to the microprocessor.
  • the PSRAM must be Refreshed at least once every 15uS.
  • the Refresh address is generated inside the PSRAM and is transparent to the user.
  • the Refresh pin on the PSRAM must be held low for a minimum time.
  • the Refresh Request is generated by the internal clock divided by 256. With a 24MHz clock, this happens about every 10.7uS.
  • the Refresh Pulse to the PSRAM chip must not occur at the same time as a PSRAM read or write access. Since the Refresh Request and any PSRAM access are asynchronous, the -PSEN line is used to start a Refresh. When the Refresh Request is detected, the Refresh circuit waits until the next -PSEN falling edge. -PSEN falls at the beginning of a CODE access to ROM. CODE accesses to ROM happen all the time as the 8032 fetches OP-CODES. During this time, it is impossible for the 8032 to access PSRAM. The Refresh is very fast and it will be finished before the -PSEN CODE fetch is complete.
  • Sequence Down is the opposite of Sequence Up.
  • the system has an "Early Warning Power Fail Detector" that will interrupt the 8032 before the supply voltage starts to drop.
  • the 8032 responds to this interrupt by saving any critical PSRAM data and then asserting the +SEQUENCE_DOWN bit.
  • Sequence Down will force the PSRAM critical inputs to their correct state and will do so insuring that the timing specification is maintained.
  • the Sequence Down logic will not start until the end of the next Refresh to insure proper timing.
  • SEQUENCE DOWN rules are shown below. For the 128K parts:
  • +Chip_Enable2 (Pin 30) must go to logic '0' at least 60nS before -REFRESH (Pin 1) is forced to logic '0'. After the power dies, external components should hold these lines at logic '0' as the gate array outputs will be undefined.
  • -Chip_Enable (Pin 22) must be forced to logic '1' at least 50nS before -OE/-REFRESH (Pin 24) is forced to logic '0'.
  • PSRAM OPERATION Power Down Data Retention
  • PSRAM POWER DOWN LATCH There is a very low current J-K Flip Flop that is powered by the same backup capacitor that powers the PSRAMs. This flip flop lets the software know if the voltage dropped below the minimum voltage specification during a power off period.
  • this latch should power up to logic '0'.
  • the PSRAM voltage must be greater than 3.1 Volts. (This releases the J-K Flip Flop Reset Pin). 2.
  • the PCB +5 Volt supply must be greater than about 4.5 Volts. (This releases system POR).
  • the -ENBLAT line must be set to logic '0'.
  • the +BAND0 line must be set to logic '1'.
  • the +LAT_CLK line must be toggled to logic '0' and then to logic '1 '.
  • the -ENBLAT and +LAT_CLK lines are driven by 8032 microprocessor
  • PORT pins These pins will be initialized to logic '1' by 8032 hardware at POR time.
  • the +BAND0 line comes from the DBE 1200 gate array and is reset to logic '0' at POR time.
  • the Gate Array 103 is packaged in an 84 pin PLCC package.
  • the Gate Array terminology is slightly different from the PCB terminology.
  • the PCB uses
  • the address decoders are shown on pages 1 and 9 of Appendix A.
  • 74F138 type 1 of 8 decoders are used with the 8032 -RD or -WR strobe used for an enable.
  • the outputs of the 74F138 will be valid only when the proper address is written or read.
  • the following tables show the Write and Read addresses that are decoded.
  • the page number refers to the page of the Gate Array schematic of Appendix A that the register can be found on.
  • the "Gate Array Name" is the name of the decoded signal on the schematic.
  • the PSRAM Control logic is shown on Page 2 of Appendix A. This logic consists of simple gates that route the control signals to their proper pins depending on the mode the chip is in.
  • the chip has two memory size modes, 128K and 512K. There is also a Sequence Up mode and Sequence Down mode.
  • PSRAM CONTROL SIGNALS XRFSH 8 (-ReFreSH or address_bit_l 8) This is a dual purpose signal that should be tied to pin 1 of the PSRAM chips. When Sequenced Up, this signal is mode dependent.
  • this is the PSRAM read output enable AND the Refresh input. If this signal asserts by itself, then a refresh happens. If it asserts along with the -Chip Select pin, then a PSRAM read takes place. When Sequenced Down, this signal is forced to logic "0".
  • XRAM_WE0 (-RAM Write Enable 0)
  • This signal should tie to pin 29 of the low order PSRAM chip.
  • a PSRAM write will be done when this signal asserts along with a valid chip select.
  • Sequenced Up this signal is the Write Enable to the PSRAMs in both modes.
  • Sequenced Down this signal is a don't care.
  • XRAM_OEl (-RAM Output Enable 1)
  • Sequenced Up this signal is the Output Enable control for reads from the upper PSRAM chip in 128K mode. This signal is not used in 512K mode as there is no upper chip installed.
  • Sequenced Down this signal is a don't care.
  • This signal should tie to pin 29 of the high order PSRAM chip.
  • a PSRAM write will be done when this signal asserts along with a valid chip select.
  • Sequenced Up this signal is the Write Enable to the upper PSRAM in 128K mode. (Note: The current design does not use an "upper” chip in 512K mode.)
  • Sequenced Down this signal is a don't care.
  • XCE1 -Chip Enable 1 This is a dual purpose signal that should be tied to pin 22 of the PSRAM chips.
  • Sequenced Up this signal enables the PSRAM chips to read and write in both modes.
  • Sequenced Down mis signal is forced to logic " 1 ".
  • the 512K PSRAM chip requires this line to be forced to logic " 1 " during power down data retention mode. This line is a don't care on 128K PSRAMs.
  • CE2_A17 (+ Chip Enable 2 or Address_bit_17)
  • this signal is tied to -f-Chip Enable and it is always logic "1 ".
  • XWRSTROB is the timing signal used to write to PSRAMS. Data is written to PSRAM at the rising edge of XWRSTROB. This rising edge hits before the rising edge of the 8032 -WR to insure that any PSRAM data hold times are met.
  • Pages 3 and 4 of the Gate Array schematics in Appendix A show the Base Registers and the PSRAM address Multiplexer. See above for a description of the Base Register functions. This section will deal with the circuitry.
  • the Base Registers are shown at the left of Page 2. The outputs of these registers pass through "AND" gates before going into the Adders. The AND gates allow the base register outputs to be quickly forced to all zeros at the Adder inputs.
  • the outputs of the Adders feed over to the MUX.
  • This MUX places the results of the READ ADDERS on the PSRAM address pins most of the time by default. There is no way to know that the 8032 is going to do a write until the -WR strobe asserts. When -WR asserts, a flip flop switches the MUX over to the WRITE
  • the read adder was chosen for the default value because RAM reads take a little longer than writes.
  • the dual adders are there so that the write address is stable as soon as the -WR strobe asserts.
  • the I.R. Receive circuit has various modes of operation depending on whether the button on the remote is released or if it is continuously held down. This circuit is on page 5 of Appendix A. When a valid code is clocked into the I.R. RECEIVE DATA REGISTER
  • TIL RD TIL RD bits will set.
  • the +IRR_VAL bit will remain set until the remote button is released. There are 2 ways to clear the +VALTILRD bit.
  • +IRR_NC (I.R. RECEIVER NO CHANGE) will set the first time that the
  • I.R. RECEIVE DATA REGISTER is read. It will remain set until the remote button is released. -l-IRR_RDY goes high as soon as the remote button is pressed and stays set until released.
  • the Security Clock Generator is at the lower middle of page 9 in Appendix
  • the original spec for this clock was 5 MHz. To allow for changing oscillator frequencies, this clock was made programmable.
  • Both the high time and the low time of this clock period can be programmed independently by writing to I/O address 3C00hex.
  • the high time is set with the upper nibble while the lower nibble sets the low time. This time is in multiples of the input oscillator frequency.
  • the circuit works by loading the program nibbles into 74F169 type counters.
  • the I.M. Bus is used to talk to the TPU 2740 chip.
  • the I.M. bus circuit is shown in Figures. Refer to the I.M. bus specification for a detailed explanation of this bus.
  • the I.M. bus is a 3 wire serial communication bus.
  • the 3 lines are called
  • the DBE 1200 gate array is always the I.M. Bus Master and therefore always drives the I.M._CLOCK line.
  • I.M._DATA line is a bi-directional data line (Open Drain with an external pull up resistor).
  • the I.M. DENTIFY line is an output used to identify the "I.M. Address” and also to terminate the transfer.
  • An "IM BUS WRITE" is a transfer out of the
  • An "IM BUS READ" is into the 8032 from the IM Slave device.
  • a bit called I1BYTE (3000W.0) determines how many data bytes to transfer.
  • WXR_BIT (000W.1) determines if the transfer will be a read or a write.
  • Page 11 of Appendix A shows the I.M. counter and control logic and Page
  • 8032 writes the 8 bit address of the slave device that communication should be established with here. This address is latched in the 74HCT273 in Figure and is transferred to the shift register when the transfer begins. It is not necessary to reload this register if the same address is accessed on two successive I.M. transfers. The byte written to this register will always be the first byte written out of the Gate
  • I.M. WRITE DATA 1 REGISTER (2400W page 12 XL_IM_D1) .
  • the byte contained in this register will be the 2nd byte shifted out onto the I.M. bus during I.M. Writes. This register must be reloaded after each transfer.
  • the byte contained in this register will be the 3rd byte shifted out during I.M. Writes, but only if the transfer length is set to 2 bytes. This register must be reloaded after each transfer.
  • I.M. READ DATA BYTE 1 1000R page 12 XRD_BYT1 . After a read transfer, this register will contain the incoming data byte. If it is a 1 byte read transfer, then the data will be in this register. If it is a 2 byte read transfer, then the second byte received will be in this register.
  • I.M. READ DATA BYTE 2 (1400R page 12 XRD_BYT2) . After a 2 byte read transfer, this register will contain the first incoming data byte. During a 1 byte read transfer, the outgoing address will wrap back and end up in this register. This wrap feature can be used for error checking or diagnostics!
  • Bit 1 of this register determines whether the transfer is read or write. Bit 0 of this register determines if 1 or 2 data bytes will be transferred.
  • I.M. BUS STATUS REGISTER. (1800R page 6 XSW_LO) Bit 7 of this register contains the +IM_BUSY line. This line will be high during the I.M. transfer.
  • I.M. CIRCUIT OPERATION The logic on page 11 controls the I.M. Bus transfers.
  • the I.M. clock (IM_P_CK) and the 8032 input oscillator elk (OSC_2) are both derived from the 24MHz oscillator.
  • the 8032 does not specify any timing with respect to the input oscillator and the timing that is specified is very loose with respect to a 12MHz input clock. For this reason, it must be assumed that the Start Transfer Pulse from the 8032 and the IM_P_CK are asynchronous.
  • the first 3 flip flops at the lower left of Figure are used to re-synchronize these signals and to start the I.M. transfer.
  • the 74F269 counter on page 11 will start to count up from zero.
  • the EN_IMCK line will allow the IM_P_CK to gate out to the I.M. bus clock pin 14.
  • the first 8 clocks will clock out the address and the I.M._IDENTIFY line will assert during this time.
  • the counter reaches a count of 8, the I.M.JDENTIFY line will negate.
  • the I.M._DATA line will continue to be an output for the rest of the transfer. If an I.M. Read is in progress, the I.M._DATA line will switch from an output to an input after the 8th count. The transfer will abort after count 16 or count 24 depending on the state of the I1BYTE (3C00W.0) bit.
  • the I.M.JDENTIFY line will briefly pulse low one more time to indicate that the transfer is complete. During this entire time, the IM_BUSY bit will be asserted and available to the 8032 as status.
  • the IM_P_CLK is created by dividing the 24MHz oscillator by 32. This yields a clock edge at about every 1.3 uS. A full 24 clock transfer takes about 32 uS. WATCHDOG TIMER
  • the Watchdog Timer is on page 13 of the Gate Array Schematic, Appendix A. This timer can be turned on and off with the bit EN_WDOG (3000W.7). The Watchdog is reset in normal operation by writing to address 6400W. The data written to this address is "don't care".
  • the Watchdog timer is 16 bits long and it is clocked by the OSC 256 clock. This timer was made out of synchronous counter blocks (I_SCBR) provided by the Gate Array vendor.
  • the Watchdog starts at Zero and counts up. If it is allowed to overflow, then the reset line to the 8032 will assert. The Power on Reset line to the Gate Array will also assert.
  • the 8032 reset line will assert about 256 clocks before the Gate Array POR internal reset asserts.
  • the 8032 requires that a fixed number of clocks be provided while the reset line is asserted in order to properly reset.
  • the internal Gate Array POR line completely resets the Watchdog circuit, so it is necessary to delay these events for proper 8032 reset timing.
  • the Gate Array internal POR line completely resets the chip to a known state except for the OSC divider clocks on page 9 and the IM Read data registers on page 12.
  • the CRC-32 circuit is on pages 15-18 of the Gate Array Schematic. This circuit can be used to Check or Generate the CRC-32 Polynomial. This polynomial is four bytes long and is used to verify data integrity.
  • the circuit has two modes of operation, CRC-32 on and CRC-32 off.
  • the bit X_EN_XOR (6000W.4) determines the mode. When this bit is logic "0”, the CRC-32 logic is enabled and any data written to the CRC registers will be multiplied by the CRC-32 polynomial. When this bit is logic "1", the CRC-32 polynomial is disabled and the data shifts into the CRC-32 registers unaltered.
  • the circuit consists of four 8 bit Read Data Registers, one Write Data
  • the CRC circuit can be turned off in order to initialize the four registers to a known value.
  • the CRC-32 Write Data Register is on page 18. This is a parallel in, serial out shift register. The end of the 8032 -WR strobe will start the shift logic in page
  • This logic will synchronize the shift start to the OSC_2 clock.
  • a 3 bit counter will count out exactly 8 clocks, then shut the circuit off.
  • the X_EN_XOR bit can be used to initialize the CRC-32 circuit to a known value. Some CRC schemes start with all 32 bits set zero, others start with all bits set to one. When X_EN_XOR is set to logic "1", the CRC-32 circuit Exclusive-OR gates are all disabled. This allows the data written to the CRC-32 Write Data
  • the CRC-32 polynomial is: x ⁇ 32+x"26* x ⁇ 23+x ⁇ 22+x A 16- ⁇ -x A 12- ⁇ -x A ll - ⁇ -x A 10+x ⁇ 8+x' 7+ ⁇ - 5-l-x"4+x A 2 + x+1.
  • Table V shows the pinouts for the gate array
  • 5 PXRFSH18 OUTPUT_2 drives psram rfsh in 128K mode, A18 in 512K mode.
  • PRAM A4 OUTPUT 2 drives psram address line
  • PRAM UO OUTPUT 2 drives psram address line
  • OUTPUTJ 4mA, NORMAL SPEED, (OUTPUT PORT CONTROL BITS)
  • OUTPUTJ 2mA NORMAL SPEED OUTPUT.
  • OUTPUTJ 4mA NORMAL SPEED OUTPUT. (Used for CLOCKS).
  • INPUTJ TTL INPUT LEVELS WITH SCHMITT TRIGGER .
  • INPUTJ TTL INPUT LEVELS.
  • I/OJ 2mA OUTPUT DRIVER (with active high enable) , OPEN DRAIN OR TRISTATABLE.
  • INPUT IS TTL LEVEL I/OJ 2mA OUTPUT DRIVER (with active high enable).
  • the TPU 2740 124 functions as an On Screen Display (OSD) controller and also as a Closed Caption Data (CCD) VBI Data Slicer. This device has two functionally separate sections, the OSD and the CCD VBI data slicer.
  • the TPU 2740 contains a RISC based processor called the Fast Processor (FP) that is used to collect the VBI data, communicate with the serial bus, and control the OSD.
  • FP Fast Processor
  • Some of the internal TPU2740 circuits are running at four times the input clock frequency (This is 72MHz on the TVRO board with an 18MHz input clock). Communications between the 8032 and the TPU2740 are via the 3 wire IM Serial Bus 108.
  • the TPU 2740 is a fully digital chip, Baseband Video data must first be digitized before the TPU can use it.
  • a 6 bit Analog to Digital converter (uPC660) does this digitizing.
  • the uPC660 is shown on page 1 of the TVRO schematics in Appendix A.
  • the input video signal is about 1 Volt P-P and this signal must be “clamped” to a known DC level before it can be digitized.
  • the "VIDEO CLAMP AND FILTER” on page 1 does this using a “Back Porch Clamp” method. This clamp will bias the video signal into the A/D converter so that the "Back Porch” area will be at about 3.69 Volts DC. (The “Back Porch” is the area where the color burst sits.)
  • the resistor network on page 1 comprised of R15, R16, R17 and R18 sets the voltage levels for the clamp and the A/D circuits.
  • the A/D upper reference (pinll) is set to about 4.52 Volts and the lower reference (pin 13) is set to about 3.35 Volts. If the input video signal back porch area is biased to 3.69 Volts DC (at pin 12), then the maximum peak to peak swing of the video signal should always be between the voltages at the reference pins.
  • the TPU only uses the incoming video signal to strip off VBI Closed Caption Data. There is no need for the entire 4MHz video bandwidth so R7 and C6 form a low pass filter that rolls off the TPU video at about 1 MHz. (Note: The ratios of the clamp voltages are the same as the expected video signal IRE values.)
  • Circuitry in the TPU detects vertical and horizontal sync from the digitized video.
  • the OSD and VBI data slicers use these signals for timing functions.
  • a programmable comparator is used to detect vertical and horizontal sync pulses. It is important that the video clamp function correctly in order for this comparator to accurately detect sync.
  • the FP reads the output of the sync detection circuitry and is . able to count horizontal lines, thus is able to read VBI data from a particular VBI line and start the graphic on screen display at the correct video scan line.
  • the VBI circuitry on the TPU will load the VBI data into internal registers that the FP may read.
  • the FP reads this data and inserts it into a buffer. At a later time the VBI data may be read by the 8032 via the IM Bus.
  • the TPU requires good digitized video and a stable horizontal timing reference on pin 27.
  • the horizontal rate signal is + Burst Gate from the MCI 378 and is fed into the TPU at pin 27. If either of these signals is missing or poor, then the TPU will not be able to create a stable overlay.
  • the OSD portion of the TPU consists of cache memory, character memory, timing functions, and an external 256K by 4 bit DRAM (U9).
  • the FP reads high level graphic commands from the IM Bus and stores the graphic information in the external DRAM memory.
  • the TPU FP outputs the graphic data on the R, G, B, and FBLOUT lines. 8 colors may be generated using the R, G, and B outputs.
  • the FBLOUT (Fast BLanking OUT) signal determines if the video output should contain the R, G, B data from the TPU, or if the incoming live video should be passed through.
  • the TPU has a 256K x 4 DRAM (U9) for storing overlay screens and data. This is a fast page mode DRAM and refresh logic is avoided by constantly reading out the screen data, even when there is no overlay on the screen.
  • R,G,B COLOR CONVERTER R,G,B COLOR CONVERTER.
  • the StarSight Telecast graphic display requires 8 colors, black, white, gray, yellow, light yellow, light green, and red. These colors are not the standard 8 NTSC saturated colors that the TPU puts out.
  • a "Color Converter Circuit” is required to translate the TPU saturated digital colors into the StarSight graphic display "pleasing" colors. This circuit is on page 2 of the PCB schematic.
  • the Color Converter if made from three "8 into 1 analog switches". There is one switch for each of the R,G,B outputs. There is a precision voltage divider that creates the desired R,G,B voltages. The analog switches route the proper voltage to their outputs based on the 3 bit digital R,G,B signal from the TPU.
  • the TPU R,G,B outputs are programmed to be open drain so that a full TTL level swing is available to the multiplexing analog switches.
  • R14 and C18 on page 2 form an inexpensive R-C delay for the Fast Blanking Signal to compensate for delays in the R,G,B channel.
  • the Motorola MCI 378 is used as a main building block for the Video Synchronizer.
  • the MC1378 operates in REMOTE MODE (pin 1 is set HIGH). In this mode, external video is required to create the synchronizing timing signals. See page 3 of the TVRO Schematic of Appendix A for a block diagram of the 1378.
  • a 1 volt peak to peak NTSC video signal must be fed into pin 24 to provide timing information for both the 1378 and the TPU.
  • the signal at pin 24 is the called the "Remote Video Signal”. This signal is internally clamped in the 1378 and then Composite sync is separated out. Composite Sync is used to separate out Vertical Sync and also to lock the 4.03 MHz Horizontal Phase Locked Loop. Both Composite Sync (pin 39) and Vertical Sync (pin 38) are externally available for debug and timing.
  • the separated composite sync is used to lock the 4.03 MHz PLL (using PD1).
  • the VCO in this PLL is formed around a 4.03MHz ceramic resonator.
  • the free running frequency of this ceramic resonator must be adjusted with C39.
  • the best way to adjust this VCO is to use a frequency counter and adjust C39 until the frequency at Ul-5 is 15,750 Hz. This adjustment is made with the Video In signal disconnected so that the VCO is free running.
  • Burst Gate (MC1378 pin 5) is about 4uS wide and is centered around the 3.58MHz color burst. This signal is the main timing reference for the overlay display. It is used extensively by both the 1378 and TPU 2740.
  • the TPU uses Burst Gate to decide when to start the overlay. There is a programmable counter in the TPU that sets the delay from Burst Gate to the overlay start. (The overlay starts when + FBLOUT goes low.) Any jitter on Burst Gate will cause an annoying side to side motion on the overlay.
  • the color burst from the remote video is used to lock the 4X color sub carrier oscillator using PD3 which is gated by burst gate.
  • Phase of the locally generated composite video from the encoder section is compared against the same sub carrier reference used to lock PD3. This is done by means of PD4 so that the sub carrier phases of both the local and the remote signals are made essentially equal.
  • PD1 - compares and locks the internally counted down 4.03 MHz VCO to the incoming remote horizontal sync. It is fast acting to follow VCR source fluctuation. Its PLL filter network consists of C24, C38, and R19.
  • PD2 - is not used in this design.
  • PD3 - a gated phase detector, which locks the crystal oscillator frequency divided by four to the incoming remote signal burst.
  • PD4 - controls the internal phase shifter to assure that the outgoing local color burst has the same phase as the incoming remote burst at PD3.
  • the remote video is AC coupled and fed in through pin 24 and clamped to proper DC level (blanking is at 0 V).
  • the clamped video is fed to the Fast Video Switch where switching between the local and the remote video occurs controlled by Overlay Enable at pin 25.
  • the second path leads to the PD3 where the remote video burst is compared against crystal oscillator frequency divided by four.
  • the third path leads to Identity Detector which determines whether incoming signal is PAL or NTSC.
  • the local video is generated from R, G, and B signals which are direct coupled, 1 volt peak to peak inputs at pins 14, 15, and 16. After that follows the Color Difference and Luma Matrix which produces B-Y, R-Y, and the luminance -Y signals.
  • the B-Y and R-Y signals are clamped and sent to their respective modulators. Modulated B-Y and R-Y signals are summed together thus making 3.58 MHz NTSC chroma signal which is fed out pin 18.
  • This chroma signal is filtered by a 3.58 MHz band-pass filter consisting of C33, C34, C35, R22, R13, and Tl. The filtered chroma signal is fed back in at pin 20.
  • the chroma signal is added to the luminance signal which passes through a 400 nS delay line.
  • the need for this delay line arises because of the longer path for the chroma signal through the modulators and the band-pass filter.
  • the delay line should have at least 4 MHz bandwidth, and good linearity through its entire bandwidth as well as linear group delay.
  • the chroma and luma signals combined make the composite NTSC video signal which is then clamped by the local video clamp and fed to the fast video switch to be mixed with the remote video at the output pin 27.
  • the two burst amplitudes are compared in the ACC detector and made equal using a variable gain ACC amplifier in the locally generated chroma path.
  • the absolute burst amplitude of the remote signal is detected by the kill detector, the chroma of the locally generated signal being mrned off when the remote burst falls below a predetermined level.
  • the kill level can be adjusted by changing the value of the resistor R3 at pin 31. 470K kills at about 10-20 mVp-p remote burst. Normal burst is 286 mVp-p. POWER SUPPLY
  • the system requires 5 VDC digital, 5VDC analog, and possibly 12 VDC analog (for certain RF Modulators).
  • the current requirements are: 5 VDC Digital 550mA
  • the microprocessor -PWRBAD line is set to zero at least lOmS before the 5 VDC Digital supply drops below 4.75 volts. This allows the microprocessor to complete any pending database transactions and do an orderly shutdown of the DRAM. This is accomplished by monitoring the unregulated power with the Seiko S80731AN power supervisor IC (U2). After the unregulated supply drops below about 8 volts, the S80731AN will assert -PWRBAD. This causes an interrupt in the microprocessor which will initiate power down subroutines. U3 monitors the 5VDC supply and controls the -RESET line into the DBE 1200. This generates a clean reset signal during power up and power down. I.R.
  • the I.R. Transmitter 116 function is done with a MC68HC05C9 microprocessor.
  • This microprocessor is programmed to interface with the software serial bus 110 for communication with the 8032..
  • This microprocessor can generate pulses on its output pin that simulate IR signals for most VCR's.
  • MC68HC05C9 contains the executable program and the codes and sequences to control a VCR via Infrared.
  • Port B on the MC68HC05C9 is used to set the serial address that it will respond to.
  • the clock signal is generated by a programmable clock divider in the DBE 1200 gate array.
  • Figure 6 illustrates how packets 300, messages 302 and commands 304 are related.
  • Figure 7 provides further details of packets 300. Unless otherwise noted, all fields are binary 2's complement numbers. All undefined bits within fields are reserved, and initialized to zero. All multi-byte variables are stored most significant byte first (big endian format), unless otherwise noted. Notable exceptions are the
  • All viewable text strings are comprised exclusively of printable characters, where printable is defined as any character with ASCII values in the range of 32 (20H) to 122 (07 AH), inclusive. Both upper and lower case letters are supported. All fixed fields which contain ASCII strings that do not fill the field are to padded with
  • NULL ASCII value 0 characters. Unless otherwise specified, strings which do fill the field are not NULL terminated.
  • Packets 300 consist of error detection information and information to be operated on by a subscriber unit.
  • the packet fields shown in Figure 7 have the following descriptions, as shown in Table VI:
  • Field Description sync Code number indicating the start of a Packet. Used to locate the start of a Packet when transmission errors occur. Value is always 2C(hex). size Is the total size of the packet, in bytes. This includes the
  • packet time stamp Is the four byte time stamp of the minute the packet was transmitted. This field is used by subscriber units to differentiate data streams on recorded mediums (such as VCR tapes) from live data streams. The time is encoded as minutes since January 1, 1992, rounded to the nearest minute boundary. Since packet headers are not guaranteed to be transmitted on minute boundaries, the maximum error of this field is up to +/- 30 seconds.
  • vbi Stream ID Is a two byte number identifying the unique ID of the VBI stream the command has been transmitted on. This field may be used by subscriber units to identify their assigned "home" data stream, where their key distribution message will be broadcast.
  • CRC1 Least significant word (16 bits) of the 32 bit cyclic redundancy code (CRC-32) value for the Packet header .
  • CRC is computed over the 'sync' and 'size' fields. This field is stored least significant byte first (little endian format).
  • Command An entity that contains information pertaining to a specific portion of the database, or time markers, or user authorization information. Each type of Command contains a unique code number and a length field.
  • CRC32 32 bit cyclic redundancy check (CRC-32) value. The CRC is computed over the 'sync', 'size', 'CRC1', and 'Message' fields.
  • the CRC32 generator polynomial is ⁇ 32 + ⁇ 26 + ⁇ 23 + ⁇ 22 + ⁇ 16 + ⁇ 12 + ⁇ ll + ⁇ 10 + ⁇ 8 + ⁇ 7 + ⁇ 5 + ⁇ 4 + ⁇ 2 + ⁇ l
  • This field is stored least significant byte first (little endian format).
  • Messages 302 are the information bearing portion of a Packet 300. As shown in Figure 8, they consist of one or more Commands 304. Messages contain an integral number of Commands and Commands are not split between Messages. The 'size' field in the packet header is used to determine when all Commands have been processed. The optimal size of the Message field is 250 bytes or less. Commands that are larger than 250 bytes should be contained singly in a packet. The bytes following the last byte in the last command is always the first byte of the CRC32 field. Commands 304
  • Commands 304 are the elements of the StarSight Data Transmission Network required to build a TV schedule database, maintain the current time of day, and handle user authorization and security issues.
  • the different Commands are distinguished by a unique value known as the
  • 'Cmd type' It is contained in the least significant 6 bits of the Command's first byte. A total of 64 unique command types are possible.
  • the second field is 'Cmd length', used to determine the byte size of the Command. The size includes the 'Cmd type' and 'Cmd length' fields. The 'Cmd length' field may be a one or two byte quantity.
  • Table II lists all commands and specifies the size of the 'Cmd length' fields. Also included in this table is the encryption offset for the command. This concept is discussed in the section that follows this table.
  • the most significant bit of the Command's first byte is a flag that signals whether the command is encrypted or not. When set, the command is encrypted, . when clear, not encrypted. It is probable that the only commands which are passed to the Subscriber Unit in an encrypted format are Show list, Authorization, and Key Distribution Commands. The Subscriber Unit should however be prepared to decrypt any command.
  • the starting offset of the encrypted portion of the command is also listed in the previous table. Most commands leave a portion of their contents in the clear so that network entities which process the packet stream may filter out unneeded commands without decrypting the guts of the command. (Note that the encryption offset for fumre commands may be changed when me commands are actually implemented.)
  • the second most significant bit of the command's first byte indicates which of two program keys are to be used when decrypting the command.
  • decryption program key 0 is used, when set, key 1 is to be used.
  • the initialization vector is an 8 byte field that is always prepended to the start of the encrypted byte stream.
  • the padding is appended to the byte stream before it is encrypted. The purpose of the padding is to help the Security Module determine if the encrypted data has been "tampered" with.
  • Enough pad characters are added to make the length of the raw data stream a multiple of eight. If the length begins as a multiple of eight, 8 pad characters are added. The value of the pad characters are the number of fill bytes that have been added; i.e., if 3 extra bytes are added to the command then each fill byte will have the value 3.
  • the encrypted data within the Command is stored as shown in Figure 9. Fumre revisions of this command set may append field definitions onto existing commands. Command processors should be prepared to ignore all data that follows the last recognized field.
  • the unit number is used to identify a particular unit within the batch group. Up to 255 units may be contained within a batch group.
  • Commands required to build the subscriber unit database are typically sent repetitively, in the order shown in Table VIII:
  • Theme Categories Always acquired (if not already acquired).
  • Theme Subcategories Always acquired (if not already acquired).
  • Regions Region's list of channels is acquired if the unit has been authorized.
  • Channel Data Channel data is acquired if the channel is in the region's list of channels.
  • Show lists Show list is acquired if it is applicable to an active channel in the region's list of channels. Show lists give the schedule data for a single channel for a single day. The current day's data is sent more often than succeeding day's data. Show Titles Show title is acquired if it is referenced in some acquired
  • Time Commands ( Figure 10) specify the current time of day and date. They are sent periodically, at a predetermined rate. Subscriber Units 52 ( Figures 1-4) should reset their current time of day and date to agree with the value received in this message.
  • the fields of time commands shown in Figure 10 are as described in Table EX: Field Description
  • Cmd type Command type 1. Identifies command as a Time
  • program decryption keys should be used to decrypt this command.
  • Cmd length Number of bytes in the command (including the type and length fields).
  • Time Current time of day and date encoded as number of minutes from midnight, January 1, 1992.
  • Time of day and date is Greenwich Mean Time.
  • DS fig Daylight Saving flag Flag indicating if Daylight Saving is in effect. Sent whether or not default time zone uses Daylight
  • time zone offset field is not a two's complement binary number, default time offset
  • time zone offset field is not a two's complement binary number, default time offset
  • Four bit field indicating the number of hours offset from Greenwich Mean Time to the time zone of the data provider station transmitting the StarSight data. Intended to be used when displaying local time before the Subscriber Unit has been authorized (which sets the real time zone).
  • the legal range for this field is from 0 to 12 binary. time (sees) Is the low order seconds part of the time field, stored previously in the command. The resolution of this field is seconds past the minute. The legal range is 0 to 59 inclusive.
  • Table IX Daylight Saving Time Change Command The Daylight Saving Time Change Command defines when the next Daylight
  • key ID Decryption key ID. Identifies which of two current
  • program decryption keys should be used to decrypt this command.
  • Cmd length Number of bytes in the command (including the type and length fields).
  • Enable Daylight Time of day and date when the Daylight Saving time would Saving be enabled at the Greenwich Meridian Encoded as number of minutes from midnight, January 1 , 1992. Time of day and date is Greenwich Mean Time. The enable time is always less than the disable time.
  • Table X Region Command The Region Command identifies all channels for which StarSight Data is available and could possibly be received by a Subscriber Unit in the given region. One Region Command is sent for each region in the area serviced by a data provider station. For example, the channel lineup for each cable system constitutes a region. The Authorization Command sends the region ID. Once the region ID is known, the Channel Data for each channel in the region can be acquired from the Channel Data Commands.
  • the channel IDs in this command are not needed by the subscriber unit after it has acquired the Channel Data for each channel in the user's region. However, the region ID and version must be held in case the Channel Data is lost (e.g., power outage) or has changed and must be re-acquired.
  • Channel ID entries are listed in the default order that Subscriber Units should display them in until the user has changed the sequencing using a setup screen.
  • Channel ordering is more or less numerical, and Channels such as HBO and DISNEY are all given a native channel number equal to 1 and probably ordered alphabetically by the 'name-affiliation' field.
  • region type Indicates if region is a broadcast, cable, or satellite system.
  • prime offset Offset in units of 1/2 hours from 6:00PM, to prime time for the region.
  • prime offset 1 means prime time starts at
  • date type flag Is a flag indicating how the date field in this command should be interpreted. If this flag is set, the date represents when the information in this command expires. If the flag is clear, the date represents the time the information in this command becomes valid. Date Specifies the time when the information in this command either expires or becomes active. See the explanation of the date type flag. The date is encoded as number of minutes from midnight January 1, 1992, Greenwich mean time. nbr Chan IDs Number of channel IDs in the region. This number must be greater than 0.
  • Channel ID Channel ID number used to identify the Channel Data
  • Maximum tunable channel is channel 511.
  • tune channel number is sent in this command to avoid having to send a Channel ID entry for each cable system that places the channel on a different tuning channel number.
  • satellite numeric ID 5 bit field representing the numeric portion of the alphanumeric satellite identifier (i.e. the '4' of satellite S4). This field is present (in all Channel ID entries) only if the
  • the field is broken up over two consecutive bytes.
  • the Channel Data Command gives channel information used for various displays.
  • Channel Data Commands are sent for each channel in all the regions serviced by a data provider station (PBS station node).
  • the subscriber unit compiles information on all the channels in its region using the Channel Data Commands that contain a Channel ID entry matching one in its region list.
  • key ID Decryption key ID. Identifies which of two current
  • program decryption keys should be used to decrypt this command.
  • nbr entries Number of Channel ID entries in the current command (not the total number in the system). This field must always have the value of 1 (i.e. only ONE channel entry can be included in each command.)
  • nat chan msb Most significant bit for the 'native channel nbr' field.
  • Channel ID Channel ID number used to identify the Channel ID entries that match those in the subscriber's region.
  • nbr text). This flag must be set if the native channel number is specified as zero.
  • native channel nbr The channel number associated with the channel if it were in a broadcast region. This is the number used to identify the channel when the 'name fig' is 0. Normally this number matches the tune channel number; however, on cable systems channels get moved around. E.g. channel 5 could be on cable channel 29. In this situation, the tone channel number will be
  • name_flg field in this command must be set.
  • name abbreviation A bit field indicating which characters from the name bits affiliation string should be used as the stations "call letters”.
  • the MSBit (bit 7) of this field represents the first byte in the name affiliation string (byte 8), while the LSBit (bit 0) represents the last byte from the string (byte 15). (i.e., a value of 11110000B for this field, with a name affiliation string of KTVU-FOX would indicate the stations call letters are KTVU).
  • name fig field a total of one to four bits must be set in this field.
  • name-affiliation Up to 8 character ASCII text string used to identify the channel for display purposes. Padded with Null characters if . less than 8 characters long. This string may not be NULL terminated if it is eight characters long. Table XII
  • Show list Commands provide schedule data for one day for a given channel. Show list commands do not contain schedule gaps (even for periods when the channel is off the air). Show list commands are sent for every channel in all regions of the system. Show list commands contain multiple Show Slot entries, with each entry corresponding to a single show in the channel's schedule.
  • Show list Commands represent at least 24 hours of schedule data.
  • the first entry for a show list begins at midnight, Greenwich Mean Time. Programs which straddle the boundary between consecutive Show lists are represented only once, in the Show list in which their start time resides.
  • the next Show list represents the portion of time in which a program from a previous Show list overruns into it with a dummy show entry.
  • These filler entries are recognized using the 'dum fig', which when set indicates the entry for the show at this time slot can be found at the tail end of the previous day's show list. Only the first entry in a show list can have the 'dum fig' set.
  • Dummy show entries operate identically to valid show entries, except that their title and description text may be substituted with something that labels it as a filler entry. If a program's start time coincides exactly with the Show list boundary time, it will be represented only once, in the next Show list.
  • Show list Commands This allows the Show list Commands to be discarded if they are not applicable to the subscriber unit's region or have already been received. Ignoring unneeded Show lists may help a Subscriber Unit's data processing throughput, since decryption is time consuming.
  • the fields of the Show list Command as shown in Figure 14 are defined in Table XIII.
  • key ID Decryption key ID. Identifies which of two current
  • program decryption keys should be used to decrypt this command.
  • version Show list version number Used to identify when changes have been made to me Show list for the given day. 'version' starts at 0 when first sent over the network and increments for every change to the Show list for that day within the time period (i.e. one week) that the given day is active. If the version field differs from the value currently held by the subscriber unit then the new schedule replaces the current one.
  • Channel ID Channel ID number identifying the channel whose schedule is being sent. Matches the channel ID number in one of the
  • nbr show slot entries Number of shows on this channel for the entire day, counting the dummy entry if one exists.
  • SID Show ID number. Unique 20 bit number used to identify the
  • Show Title command containing the show's title This field may have a zero value, which indicates no show information is present.
  • DID Description ID number Unique 16 bit number used to identify the Show Description Command, which contains the show's episode description. If a description for this show does not exist, die DID flg will be left clear and this field will be omitted. This field may not have a zero value.
  • the uncompressed show title must be between 1 and 86 bytes in length, inclusive. Since the display capabilities of Subscriber Units is limited, titles which are greater then 38 bytes in length may be truncated.
  • Show Title Commands must be saved in the database if die show is in the Show list for at least one channel in the subscriber's region. All other Show Title Commands should be ignored. Show Titles that are needed are recognized by matching the SID number in the Show list with the SID number in the Show Title Command.
  • the fields of the Show Title Command as shown in Figure 15 are defined in Table XIV. Field Description
  • program decryption keys should be used to decrypt this command.
  • Command is of interest to the subscriber unit only if this number is also found in die Show list for some channel in the • unit's region. This field is never passed with a zero value.
  • Theme ID Number that identifies the Theme type and genre information appropriate for this program. Used for Theme searches.
  • Subcategories have sets of Theme ID numbers identifying the types of shows to be selected when a Theme search is performed for that sub category. Shows whose 'Theme ID' field matches one of the values in the set are selected. A zero value indicates no theme information is present.
  • Show Description Commands contain the description of an episode of a program and some program attributes used in Theme searches. Show descriptions are usually compressed using the same Huffman encoding scheme used for show titles.
  • the uncompressed show description must be between 1 and 162 bytes in length, inclusive. Since the display capabilities of Subscriber Units is limited, descriptions which are greater then 120 bytes in length may be truncated.
  • Show Description Commands are sent for all shows that have descriptions in all regions serviced by the data provider. Show Description Commands must be saved in the database if the DID is referenced in the Show list for at least one channel in the subscriber's region. All other Show Description Commands should be ignored. Show Descriptions that are needed are recognized by matching the DID number in the Show list with the DID number in the Show Description Command.
  • the fields of the Show Description Command as shown in Figure 16 are defined in Table XV.
  • key ID Decryption key ID. Identifies which of two current
  • program decryption keys should be used to decrypt this command.
  • Cmd length Number of bytes in the command (including die type and lengdi fields).
  • DID Description ID number Unique 16 bit number identifying this episode description. This Show Description Command is of interest to the subscriber unit only if this number is also found in die Show list for some active channel in the unit's region. This field is always non-zero.
  • BW/C Flag indicating if show is broadcast in black & white or color.
  • Theme Category Command specifies the major categories displayed in the subscriber unit's theme function. These categories form the first level of indexing in the hierarchical theme search function. For each major theme category a unique 8 bit ID number and a text string is specified. The text string names the category entry. The entries are listed serially within the command in the suggested presentation order.
  • the command includes a version number which is incremented each time the theme category command is changed. Subscriber Units should replace existing versions of the command stored in memory when a command with a differing version number has been transmitted.
  • the fields of the Theme Category Command as shown in Figure 17 are defined in Table XVI. Field Description
  • Cmd type Command type 11 (OBH). Identifies command as a Theme Category Command. enc flg Flag indicating if die current command has been encrypted.
  • nbr categories Total number of primary Theme categories; i.e., number of
  • Category name length Number of bytes in the 'Category name' field. Used to locate the start of the next entry and determine the length of the text, string that follows. This field will never have a zero value (first generation Subscriber Units will crash if this is passed as zero).
  • Category name Text string naming the category. This should be used to display the name of the category.
  • the text is an uncompressed, null terminated ASCII string.
  • the Theme Sub-category Command specifies the sub-categories displayed in die subscriber unit's dieme function. These are displayed after the user has selected a major theme category. Each major theme category has one or more sub categories, which form the second level of me hierarchical search scheme. The description of each sub category includes the 8 bit ID of the parent category, a unique 16 bit theme ID number and a text string which names the entry. The entries are listed serially within the command in die suggested presentation order.
  • the command includes a version number which is incremented each time the theme sub-category command is changed. Subscriber Units should replace existing versions of the command stored in memory when a command witii a differing version number has been transmitted. All subscriber units should store these sub category names if they do not already have an entry with the same Theme Category ID, Sub category ID, and version number.
  • the fields of the Theme Sub-category Command as shown in Figure 18 are defined in Table XVII. Field Description
  • Sub-category Command enc flg Flag indicating if the current command has been encrypted.
  • key ID Decryption key ID. Identifies which of two current
  • program decryption keys should be used to decrypt this command.
  • Subcategories i.e., number of Theme sub category entries that follow. This field will never have a zero value (First generation Subscriber Units will crash if this is passed as zero). Entry length Total number of bytes in current sub category entry including this byte. Used for determining the start offset for the next entry and die number of bytes in the 'sub category name' field. This field will never have a zero value. attributes flag word An 8 bit flag word used to specify the properties of the dieme sub-category. The meaning of each field in the flag word is as follows :
  • Bit 0 DISPLAY NAME WITH DESCRIPTION - when set, die dieme sub-category name may be displayed with the description of a show widi this theme id. (Some sub-category names like ALL or OTHER may appear awkward when displayed widi a description. These types of entries will have this bit cleared. Other entries, such as COMEDY or DRAMA are desirable additions to descriptions, and hence may have mis bit set.)
  • Bits 1-7 RESERVED. nbr Theme IDs Number of Theme ID entries that follow this field. In the above diagram, the value of mis field would be 'k'. This field will never have a zero value (First generation Subscriber Units will crash if this is passed as zero).
  • Theme ID 1-k Set of 16 bit Theme ID numbers used to identify shows that should be selected when a Theme search is done for this sub category. That is, any program whose Show Title or Show Description entry contains any one of these Theme ID numbers would be included in die list of shows selected by this Sub category. These theme ID's are sorted in ascending order. These fields will never have zero values.
  • the Subscriber Unit Reset Command allows the StarSight Control Center to reset selected subscriber units. Different types of reset can be sent.
  • the fields of the Subscriber Unit Reset Command as shown in Figure 19 are defined in Table XVIII.
  • Bit 0 When set instructs the unit to clear the semi-volatile memory where the acquired network data is stored. When die unit restarts, it will begin re-acquiring network data (also known as a cold boot).
  • Bits 1-7 Reserved, serial nbr 5 byte serial number which idnetifies die subscriber unit this . command is addressed to. A serial number which is all zeroes indicates a "group broadcast", so all subscriber units should be prepared to respond to such a command.
  • the Aumorization Command au iorizes the subscriber unit to begin collecting and displaying schedule data. It is sent when a subscriber signs up for the StarSight service.
  • Audiorization Commands are addressed to individual subscriber units using the serial number given to a Customer Service rep during the audiorization process.
  • the first generation subscriber units are limited to supporting a single region and one or two separate VBI lines on the same toning frequency.
  • the fields of die Audiorization Command as shown in Figures 20-22 are defined in Table XIX. Field Description
  • Audiorization Command enc flg Flag indicating if die current command has been encrypted.
  • key ID Decryption key ID. Identifies which of two current
  • program decryption keys should be used to decrypt this command.
  • Cmd lengdi Number of bytes in the command (including die type and lengdi fields).
  • the cryptogram must be decoded using die subscriber unit's private RSA key assigned to the StarSight Security processor at time of manufacture.
  • the data is stored as follows before encryption : batch nbr 32 bit number identifying die encryption group to which the subscriber unit belongs to. When combined widi die one byte unit number that follows this element, a unique address for the subscriber unit is formed. These numbers are assigned by this command and used to address this unit or its' batch group in all subsequent commands. unit number 1 byte unit ID. Each unit within a batch group is assigned a unique unit ID.
  • program key 1 The other 8 byte decryption key. len of data following Is the number of data bytes remaining in the authorization block, not including die empty reserved data block and this field. In the current definition of this command, mis field is equal to die constant 20 (14H).
  • DP source This field has die same meaning as die source field in die region command. It is intended to indicate which input source the data provider signal is on. sign flg Sign bit for the time zone offset field, which follows. If set, it indicates die time zone offset is negative, and should be subtracted from Greenwich mean time. (For data provider stations West of the Greenwich Meridian, i.e. die entire US and Canada). Note diat diis implies the time zone offset field is not a two's complement binary number, time zone offset Four bit field indicating die number of hours offset from
  • the legal range for this field is from 0 to 12 decimal. (This field should be interpreted identically to die default time zone offset field contained in die Time command.)
  • the specific meanings of the code groups are TBD.
  • Primary Region ID Unique number identifying the region in which the subscriber unit is located. This field specifies the set of channels for which data is collected. It corresponds widi the region ID in the Region Command. First generation subscriber units can collect data for only one region.
  • Tune Channel MSB Most significant bit of the tune channel number field, which follows.
  • Tune Channel No Is the tuning channel number of the data provider. This information is transmitted in the audiorization command so tiiat the subscriber unit does not have to wait for a Channel
  • Satellite alpha ID 5 bit field representing the alphabetic portion of the alphanumeric satellite identifier (i.e. the 'S' of satellite S4).
  • Field value 1 represents the letter 'A', 2 is 'B', etc.. This fields is specified as zero if the dataprovider is a non-satellite source. If this field is non-zero, it's legal range is 1-26 inclusive, representing the alphabetic characters 'A' through satellite numeric ID 5 bit field representing the numeric portion of the alphanumeric satellite identifier (i.e. the '4' of satellite S4). The field is broken up over two consecutive bytes. The legal range for this field is 1-31 inclusive. transponder no 6 bit field representing the transponder number to be used to tune to this channel on a Satellite system. This fields legal range is 0-63 inclusive.
  • VBI line nbr VBI line number to be used for acquiring StarSight data VBI Stream ID Stream ID of primary data provider. The stream ID is transmitted widi each time command. Subscriber Units may use this to identify the VBI stream they are listening to. This may be useful for Subscriber Units while searching for the home data stream after a cable company has made an unannounced change to its channel mapping. RESERVED 10 byte field, reserved for future definitions. All first generation subscriber units will not interpret the contents of this data block.
  • the Long Assign InfraRed Codes Command specifies the control codes to be used by die Subscriber Unit Universal Remote Control chip to control a specific peripheral device.
  • the codes which describe the IR blaster language may optionally be sent for those devices diat are not in the URC chip's internal database. Transmission normally occurs while a Customer Service Rep is in contact with a user who has called StarSight because diey did not find die code group for their VCR/Cable Box/TV in the Subscriber Unit manual.
  • IR Codes may be sent eimer addressed to a specific unit via its Serial Number, or to groups of units with a given Product Code, Device Type (e.g. VCR), and Device ID. These commands may either be sent once per user request or repetitively when addressed to groups of SUs.
  • key ID Decryption key ID. Identifies which of two current
  • program decryption keys should be used to decrypt this command.
  • Interconnect A number corresponding to the way the components Configuration controlled by the SU (i.e. TV, VCR, cable box) are connected.
  • Vendor Specific Byte value whose use depends on die product to which diis command is addressed. For example, when addressed to a
  • Zenidi TV diis value is die tuning method to be used widi die downloaded IR codes.
  • Device Type Identifies the type of device (VCR, Cable Box, TV, IRD, ...) mat can recognize these IR codes.
  • VCR 0C IRD Device ID Code group number for the device diat recognizes these IR codes.
  • the Subscriber Unit (only if it has a matching address) replaces whatever code group number it currently has for the given Device Type witii is number.
  • die headend can directly set the code group for a specific user. This is not done if the Serial Number field in this command is 0. In diis case, die command is only processed if die user has already entered a code number that matches the Device ID for the same Device Type.
  • the SU saves the version number for each device type and only processes tiiose Assign IR Codes commands addressed to groups of units if its version number for the specified device differs from the version number in the command.
  • IR Codes Length Number of bytes in the IR Codes field IR Codes Information (normally IR codes) to be used by the URC chip to control devices of die specified type. Structure within diis field is determined by the URC chip manufacturer. Table XX Key Distribution Command
  • Key Distribution Commands give the current and next program keys to be used for decrypting encrypted commands. Subscriber units must watch die data stream for a Key Distribution Command containing its batch number. When the command is found it should send die audiorization bit mask, both keys, and the audientication data field to die StarSight Security processor. If the bit in die audiorization bit mask corresponding to die subscriber unit's unit number is 0 then the subscriber unit has been de-audiorized and must suspend data collection.
  • the fields of die Key Distributioin Command as shown in Figure 24 are defined in Table XXI.
  • program key 0 Cryptogram encoded using the batch key assigned to the subscriber unit's group.
  • program key 1 Cryptogram encoded using die batch key assigned to die subscriber unit's group.
  • audientication data 4 byte value used by die StarSight Security processor to authenticate the authorization bit mask and program key fields in this command
  • This command is used to transmit data bytes to one or more subscriber units.
  • the definition of the format and contents is private to subscriber units. The network does not attempt to interpret the data.
  • This command provides a hook for transmitting commands and initialization data to subscriber units during development, widiout having to define separate, formal, network messages for each function, many of which may be temporary in natore.
  • the fields of die Subscriber Unit Command as shown in Figure 25 are defined in Table XXII.
  • Subscriber Unit Command. enc flg Flag indicating if die current command has been encrypted.
  • key ID Decryption key ID. Identifies which of two current
  • program decryption keys should be used to decrypt this command.
  • Cmd lengdi Number of bytes in the command (including die type and lengdi fields). cmnd sub-type 1 byte field indicating what type of subscriber unit command this is. The following command types have been defined: 01 : Enter Diagnostics Menu if this command is addressed to the unit All otiier type values are reserved.
  • the schedule data hierarchy of data structores in descending order follows: CHANNEL DATA TABLE Contains Subscriber Units list of channels SHOW LIST Contains a list of Show Titles, descriptions, start times, and durations for a channel. SHOW TITLE Contains the Show Title attributes and title text. SHOW DESCRIPTION Contains show ratings, attributes, and description text.
  • Theme Categories and Theme SubCategories are used to select shows for viewing. They share a common data value (Theme Indexes) diat are used to extract shows that match a Theme Category /SubCategory pair.
  • Theme data hierarchy in descending order follows:
  • the Memory Manager allocates and frees Blocks of Memory as requested by die application portion of the Subscriber Unit.
  • the application software references Memory Blocks via a HANDLE.
  • the handle of a memory block is an index to a table entry containing a POOL INDEX.
  • the POOL INDEX is a scaled address that translates into the address of a MEMORY BLOCK.
  • the HANDLE approach allows MEMORY BLOCKS to be relocated as system objects age and die, widiout requiring specific updating of application data structores.
  • the Memory Manager periodically runs a garbage collection process to collect unused MEMORY BLOCKS and recombine them into larger blocks.
  • MEMORY BLOCKS can be relocated widi specific updating of application data structores.
  • die memory pool can be temporarily locked to prevent the relocation of blocks during critical periods.
  • Each MEMORY BLOCK contains as the very first element the size of, and the OBJECT TYPE of the Memory Block. This aids in the relocation and merging of MEMORY BLOCKS.
  • the OBJECT TYPES break up into two main groups.
  • the small OBJECTS which always can be defined in less tiian 16 Blocks of Memory.
  • each block of memory is 16 BYTEs long,.
  • Small OBJECTS have their OBJECT TYPE encoded in the first NIBBLE, and die lengdi in blocks encoded in die second NIBBLE of the first BYTE of the MEMORY BLOCK.
  • Large OBJECTS have their OBJECT TYPE encoded as the first BYTE of the MEMORY BLOCK , and number of allocation units as the second BYTE of the MEMORY BLOCK.
  • the Handle Table is a fixed allocation table, as shown in Figure 27, containing two types of entries; free entries and in-use entries. Free entries will always have their 2 MSBs set so as to not be confused with in-use entries.
  • In-use entries contain the Index into die Pool for database items mat are referenced via Handles; e.g.; Show Title entries.
  • a database item's Handle is an index into die Handle Table.
  • a database item's Pool Index can change due to garbage collection in the Pool, but its Handle will not change as long as that item exists in the database. Items deleted from the database retorn their Handle to die top of die free list.
  • Handle Table entry 0 is always the head of the free list.
  • the Table is initialized to all free entries with each entry containing tiie Index of the next entry.
  • the size of the Handle Table limits the number of database items that can be kept in d e Pool. Systems with various numbers of channels will require different Handle Table sizes.
  • the database show schedule access scheme is shown in Figure 28.
  • the Channel Data is maintained in the Internal Database Engine data structure called the Channel Data Table.
  • the Channel Data Table selects the channels accessed by a
  • the Channel Data Table is built by the system command processor from the Region Command and Channel Data Commands.
  • the channel related information is extracted from the Region Command and placed in the Channel Data Table.
  • the Region Id to use is extracted from the authorization command.
  • the Region Id is die key information for show schedule generation.
  • the Region Id selects the Region Command processed by die subscriber unit, which defines die Channels Id accessed, which defines die Channel Data Table, which defines die Show Lists, which selects die Show Titles and Show Descriptions, which reference the Themes Categories and Theme Sub Categories. Once the Channel Data Table is defined, the Channels are referenced directly through the Channel Data Table.
  • Each lower level table in the show schedule is accessed through a HANDLE.
  • the HANDLE is translated by the Handle Table into a pointer in memory.
  • the Channel Data Table contains information on each channel in the Region. This data is used for access to the schedule data ( Show Lists ) for a channel, toning, display on die Channel Banner, for channel gliffs, and during Setup. Further details are provided in Table XXIII.
  • Tune Channel Nbr Channel Number to be toned to receive this channel's broadcasts.
  • Tune Channel Number may differ from the . original channel number if the channel is on a cable system.
  • Channel 5 ( CBS ) might be broadcast on channel 17 on a cable network.
  • Satellite Nbr Satellite Transponder Number for acquiring Satellite broadcasts. Satellite Nbr Satellite Number, and Index used with the Satellite
  • Inact Flg Inactive Channel Flag This bit is set when the user specifies this channel as unwanted. When this bit is set no data is collected for the channel.
  • Name-Affiliation Text string giving channel's name and (if appropriate) network affiliation; e.g., "KTVU- FOX”.
  • the Channel Duplicates Table ( Figure 30) contains information on each channel in the Region diat is the duplicate of a base channel. This data is used to adjust die display of Blocks of pay-for-view type channels. All of the channels share a common base Channel Show List, but add a starting time to the offset of die base channel's Show List.
  • the Base Channel ID is not stored in the structure. Instead die structure is referenced as a Handle by the channel entry in the Channel Data Table. If a channel entry has duplicate channels, tiien die Duplicate Channel Handle field has a Handle Number to access the table by. Further details are provided in Table XXV. Field Description
  • a ' Show List Handle Table' ( Figure 31) contains Handles to Show Lists for every day of the week. This table is pointed to by the 'Show List Handle Table' Handle located in die Channel Data Table. Via this table we can access Show Lists representing a weeks worth of scheduling. Further details are provided in Table XXVII.
  • Start Time Start Time ( in number of minutes since midnight January 1, 1992 - GMT ) for the First Show in the Show List. Used for determining new schedule days as tiiey come in.
  • Table XXVIII Show Entry A Channel's schedule is given by an ordered sequence of Show Entries.
  • Entries give a show's duration, title, and possibly an episode description.
  • the entries are either 4 , 6, or 8 bytes long depending on whetiier the show has a description and/or Group ID.
  • Finding the entry that corresponds to a given start time requires the Entries to be scanned, in order, from the beginning of the list and adding Duration values. There must be no gaps in the Show List. Further details are provided in Table XXIX.
  • SID Handle Handle for the Show Title Entry that gives this Show's Title and Theme Category information DID Handle Handle for die Show Description Entry that gives this show's episode description and some additional Theme Category information. This field is only present if the 'DID Flg' field is set.
  • Group ID Value of the Group ID that is used by the Record Manager to identify shows that are members of a Record Group. Delimiters Prior to 1st show slot there will be an 'EEH' delimiter.
  • Show Titles ( Figure 33) contain the usually compressed text of a Show's Title. There is one entry per unique Show Title.
  • Show Titles are Pool based items.
  • An entry is created whenever a Show List is received (for a channel the Subscriber Unit is collecting data for) that contains an SID for which the Subscriber Unit does not already have die Show Title.
  • a Handle is allocated to it and die 'Need It' flag is set in the Show Title Handle Table Entry.
  • the entry size is determined by die length of the title.
  • a single Pool Block is reserved (containing a null title string) when a new SID is received in a Show List.
  • the entry is filled when the appropriate Show Title message is subsequently received and die 'Need It' flag is tiien cleared.
  • the entry may be relocated and expanded to multiple Pool Blocks (but its Handle will stay the same). Further details are provided in Table XXX.
  • Theme ID Unique number associated witii Theme Category Data for this show. This is an index into the Theme Category Data Table.
  • Show Title Handle Tables are Pool based tables used to determine if a show title is needed or if it has already been received. There is one Show Title Handle Table for each possible value that an SID can Hash to; i.e., 256 tables.
  • a Show Title Handle Table entry is made for every unique SID received in any Show List message for a channel that the SU is collecting data for.
  • the particular table that the entry is made in is determined by the SID's Hash value; that is, die SID's least significant 8 bits.
  • the Show Title Hash Table ( Figure 36) is a fixed size, pre-allocated table containing only Pool indices for each possible SID Hash value.
  • the SID Hash value is an index into this table.
  • the value in the nth entry is an index into the Pool for die Show Title Handle Table containing all SIDs received so far that Hash to n. Further details are provided in Table XXXII. Field Description
  • Show Descriptions ( Figure 37) contain the (usually) compressed text of a show's episode description. There is one entry per unique show description. Show Descriptions are Pool based items. An entry is created whenever a Show List is received (for a channel the SU is collecting data for) that contains a DID for which the SU does not already have the show description. That is, the 'need it' flag is set in the Show Description Handle Table entry. The entry size is determined by the length of the description. A single Pool block is reserved (containing a null description string) when a new DID is received in a Show List. The entry is filled when the appropriate Show Description message . is subsequently received and the 'need it' flag is cleared. At that time, the entry may be relocated and expanded to multiple Pool blocks (but its handle will stay the same). Further details are provided in Table XXXIII. Field Description
  • Bit Mask indicating show's attributes such as violence or profanity. See 'Show Description Command' for bit assignments.
  • Theme ID Unique number associated witii Theme category data for this episode of die show. This is an index into die Theme Category Data Table. Show Description Text string for the show name. Normally this string is compressed by Huffman encoding; however, if the 'compressed' flag is not set, the text is straight ASCII. String is null terminated.
  • Figure 38 depicts die database show title hash table access scheme. Show Description Handle Table
  • Show Description Handle Tables are Pool based tables used to determine if a Show Description is needed or if it has already been received. There is one Show Description Handle Table for each possible value that an DID can Hash to; i.e., 256 Tables.
  • a Show Description Handle Table entry is made for every unique DID received in any Show List message for a channel that the SU is collecting data for.
  • the particular table that die entry is made in is determined by the DID's Hash value; diat is, die DID's least significant 8 bits.
  • Nbr Entries Number of Table Entries. Used when searching table for matching DID values.
  • Table XXXIV Show Description Handle Table Entry
  • the Show Description Handle Table contains multiple entries. Each of these entries contains the fields shown in Table XXXV: Field Description
  • Table XXXV Show Description Hash Table The Show Description Hash Table ( Figure 40) is a fixed size, pre-allocated table containing only Pool indices for each possible DID Hash value.
  • the DID Hash value is an index into this table.
  • the value in the nth entry is an index into die Pool for the Show Description Handle Table containing all DIDs received so far that Hash to n. Further details are as follows: Field Description
  • Theme Category Table contains the definition of die Themes downloaded to die Subscriber Unit.
  • the Themes Categories are used to search for shows of a particular type.
  • Each Theme Category contains one or more Theme SubCategories.
  • Each Theme Category in the Theme Category Table has a Theme SubCategory Table associated widi it. Further details are provided in Table XXXVI. Field Description
  • pool item The type value indicates tiiat this is a 2 byte field since the length can become large due to the number of possible Theme Categories. Reference Count Number of times this table is referenced. Initialized so die garbage collector does not delete it. Version Version Number of the Theme Category Table New
  • Categories and Sub Categories are collected when die Version Number changes. New Theme Counts must be also be determined.
  • Theme Category ID The Theme Category's Unique ID assigned by the Head End. Used to Identify Theme SubCategories for this Primary Category.
  • Theme SubCategory The Handle to the Memory Pool Block containing the -
  • Theme Category The length of die text string in bytes. Used to locate die start Name Length of the next entry.
  • Theme Category Compressed text name of Theme Category. Huffman Name encoded.
  • the Theme SubCategory Table ( Figure 42) contains information about Theme SubCategories contained in a Theme Category. Each Theme SubCategory Table is referenced by one Theme Category Entry. Each Theme SubCategory Entry contains a name, qualifiers, and Theme Indexes. The Theme Indexes in Show Titles and in Show Descriptions are matched against the Theme Indexes in a Theme SubCategory. Theme Indexes tiiat match identify which shows are a members of a Theme SubCategory. Further details are provided in Table XXXVIII. Field Description
  • the Type value indicates diat this is a 2 byte field since the length can become very large due to die number of Theme SubCategories in the Theme Category.
  • Theme Category ID Theme Category ID of owning Theme Category. Reference Count Number of times this object is Referenced.
  • SubCategory Show Count of shows that reference this SubCategory.
  • a Show Count Title/Description pair should only be counted once.
  • SubCategory Theme Index [ ] Theme Indexes, ( 9 bits + Nbr extra Theme Index Bits ) long. This is implementation dependent.
  • the Head End tells the Subscriber Unit how many bits are required for the largest Theme Index. The default is 9 bits.
  • the Subscriber Unit can encode those as 9 bit values, or as 16 bit values.
  • SubCategory Name Compressed Text SubCategory Name.
  • This section describes the messages sent between all processors in a subscriber unit 52. All messages are described even tiiough some subscriber unit implementations may not use or require all of the messages.
  • Diagrams are given showing the format of the messages followed by a description of each of the fields in die message. Greyed fields represent currently unused fields, but the bits in these fields should be set to 0's in order to maintain compatability with future implementations. All fields are binary, 2's complement numbers unless otherwise noted.
  • the Database Engine and die I/O Processor communicate via an IM bus running at 1 Mb its per second.
  • the I/O Processor receives Data Transmission
  • Network data via one or more specified Vertical Blanking Interval line(s) and transmits the acquired raw bytes when requested by die Database Engine Processor.
  • the Database Engine controls the toned channel and specifies die particular VBI line(s) to be used.
  • the Database Engine also issues graphic display commands to die I/O
  • the Database Engine issues commands to d e I/O Processor in a packet
  • the I/O Processor transfers all packet bytes to a RAM command buffer and, at the completion of die transfer, begins executing the commands in the order they were received in die packet.
  • the I/O Processor sets a statos flag indicating tiiat it is busy until all commands have been executed. Packet size is always the first two bytes received in any command sequence issued to die I/O Processor. Only one command packet can be sent to die I/O Processor at a time.
  • the following commands define die primitive graphics operations needed to draw system display screens on a television set connected to or incorporating the subscriber unit 52.
  • Screen coordinates are based on (0,0) being in the upper left corner of the screen.
  • the TPU 2740 allows X coordinates as high as 503 but the system's maximum X coordinate is 251. This allows the system to keep X coordinates in a single byte and to have two pixels of different colors comprise a 'system pixel'.
  • (251,207) is the lower right corner of the screen and X coordinates received in commands must be doubled by d e 2740.
  • All colors in the following commands are comprised of two basic TPU 2740 colors in the upper and lower nibbles of the color byte. Using two separate colors in a single system pixel enhances the number of colors that can be shown. Setting a system pixel actually involves setting two successive 2740 pixels along the X axis using the two colors in the color byte. When areas are filled, die colors must be dithered. That is, the colors used for successive 2740 pixels along the X axis must alternate between the two colors given in the appropriate command color byte. Even rows start with color 1 while odd rows (i.e. Y coordinate is an odd number) start with color 2 and alternate between the two colors for successive pixels along the X axis.
  • the 2740's graphics routines clip output if the X or Y coordinate exceeds the limits of the screen. That is, graphics do not wrap if the coordinates of an operation go outside (0,0) to (251 ,207).
  • Shadow height Number of pixels along the Y axis for horizontal shadows.
  • small font delta X Number of pixels spacing along X axis for small font characters Used by Write ASCII String command.
  • small font delta Y Number of pixels spacing along the Y axis allowed for text lines written in small font characters. This value is added to the Y coordinate for the current text line when a carriage return character is encountered in a text string by the Write ASCII String command.
  • the Erase Screen command ( Figure 45) causes the I/O Processor to blank the screen and set all display buffer pixels to the specified "transparent" color. Further details are provided in Table XXXXI.
  • Rectangle Draws a rectangle of specified ditiiered colors. Rectangle can be filled, outlined, shadowed, and/or embossed in a single operation based on die corresponding flag bits set in the command. Each of tiiese operations can be done independently of die other operations. For example, an empty rectangle can be drawn by setting only the 'outline' flag bit.
  • both 'fill colorl' and 'fill color2' should be the same value. Rectangles should be filled, then embossed, outlined and shadowed . in that order. Further details are provided in Figure 46 and Table XXXXII.
  • Rectangle command upper left X X coordinate for the upper left corner of the rectangle, upper left Y Y coordinate for the upper left corner of the rectangle, width Rectangle size in pixels along the X axis, height Rectangle size in pixels along the Y axis, pop-up ID ID number assigned by die command initiator (value is equivalent to nesting level). This field is only used for debugging.
  • Rectangle to be restored is recognized by its 'pop-up ID' field. Restoration coordinates allow a previously saved rectangle to be brought back at a different place on die screen, such as when moving a cursor or icon of some sort. Further details are provided in Figure 49 and Table XXXXIV.
  • the Move Rectangle Vertically command ( Figure 50) causes the pixel contents of a specified rectangle to be copied to anotiier place in display memory, effectively moving the rectangle on the screen. Only vertical moves are handled by this command. Rectangles are scrolled up or down one line at a time until die specified scroll size has been achieved. Further details are provided in Table XXXXV.
  • Negative numbers mean shift the rectangle to a position 'scroll size' pixels higher on the screen. Positive numbers mean shift the rectangle lower on the screen. delay Number of horizontal sync pulses to count before starting the next single line scroll operation. Provides some scroll rate control for the Database Engine.
  • Table XXXXV Write ASCII String Output an ASCII string to the screen. Starting coordinates for the first character of the string correspond to die character's upper left corner. Successive characters are on a horizontal line until an ASCII carriage return character is encountered; subsequent characters are output 'delta Y' (as specified in the Set Graphics Defaults command for each font) pixels lower on the screen and restarting at the original X coordinate. Illegal characters cause a "?” to be output in their place. Characters can be output in one of two fonts. Only upper case characters are supported in die large font. Further details are provided in Figure 51 and Table XXXXVI.
  • Channel Icon command upper left X X coordinate for upper left corner of the icon.
  • Transparent Color command Network Data Acquisition and Control Interface System data is received via the PBS network, MTV, Showtime or other transmission source on one or more Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI) lines.
  • VBI Vertical Blanking Interval
  • the I/O Processor acquires data from each line (if there are multiple lines) and stores it into separate input buffers. Data is stored in the IOP's input buffers even if the framing code is bad for a given field. In this case, two bytes of 03s are stored. The data is only transferred to die Database Engine Processor if the command packet contains at least one command tiiat requires a response.
  • the I/O Processor When responding to a Database Engine request, the I/O Processor transfers as many bytes as it can that is less than or equal to die number of requested data bytes. If an input buffer becomes full, the I/O Processor begins dumping the data until the buffer is emptied or a reset is issued. A full buffer causes the 'ovfl' flag to be set in the next response it sends to die Database Engine.
  • the I/O Processor can handle up to 2 VBI lines of system data or one line of system data and closed caption data from line 21. Data is always acquired from both fields for each system data VBI line. Closed caption data is also acquired from both fields.
  • the I/O Processor responds witiiin 10 milliseconds to any command tiiat requires a response. Stop VBI
  • the Stop VBI command ( Figure 55) causes the I/O Processor to initialize its internal variables related to VBI processing. All VBI buffer counters are cleared and. any acquired data is lost. VBI data acquisition is stopped until a Set VBI Control Parameters or a Flush VBI Buffer command is received. Further details are as follows:
  • VBI line 1 Primary VBI line number whose data is to be acquired, fram code 1 Framing code to be used for VBI line 1.
  • rate 1 Data rate for VBI line 1.
  • the Read VBI Statos command ( Figure 57) causes the I/O Processor to retorn statos information on the specified VBI line buffer. Further details are provided in Table XXXXEX.
  • VBI line VBI line number whose statos is being requested. 0 means retorn statos for all active VBI lines.
  • VBI line VBI line number whose status is being retorned. 'VBI line'
  • VBI line VBI line number whose statos is being retorned.
  • data byte Successive data bytes from the buffers for the given VBI line.
  • Bytes are retorned in first in, first out (FIFO) order. Number of bytes returned will be less tiian or equal to the number of requested data bytes. No data bytes are returned if the buffer is empty.
  • FIFO first in, first out
  • the Flush VBI Buffer command causes the I/O Processor to either transfer all existing data in a given VBI buffer or to reset VBI processing for a given VBI line without stopping data acquisition.
  • VBI processing is re-enabled with the parameters sent in the last Set VBI Parameters command. This command re-enables VBI processing that had been suspended due to a Stop VBI command.
  • Reception Group (or RG) is a named entity which has an associated
  • Satellite "TVRO North all channels receivable in North America via America” Home Satellite antenna Table LIV
  • Some RGs, and certainly Cable RGs, will have information associated witii tiiem which is of interest, and may be helpful in marketing and other operations. Some examples of such information are: Name of Contact Telephone Number FAX Number ADI DMA
  • Each StarSight Subscriber Unit is considered to be a "member", so to speak, of one and only one RG.
  • the SU When it is first put into operation, the SU must be informed as to which RG it is in, so that it will display die Lineup which is true for that RG. Lineup Explanation
  • a Lineup is die actual list of channels that are received in a particular RG.
  • a Lineup can usually be thought of as a description of information that could be obtained by viewing a physical geographic map (a map that shows coverage of TV stations and cable systems, that is); it contains information about which channels are available in the physical area that die Lineup covers. The purpose of a Lineup is to define what channels in a given RG need to be supported widi data.
  • the Station List is made up of records witii each record identifying and describing die essential characteristics of one broadcast station or satellite feed.
  • a field is used to specify where, if anywhere, the station's schedule information is obtained. If the station is not currently edited, die value in this field is set to zero; if the schedule information is being provided using a different Station ID (in other words, this station is a repeater), then this field will contain the ID of the other station; if the station is handled normally (schedule is edited and data is provided under this ID), diis field is left empty.
  • the Station List is required to contain an entry corresponding to every station or feed for which the vendor supplies data to StarSight, regardless of whetiier that feed is present in any Lineup supplied by die vendor to StarSight. This is because
  • StarSight sometimes identifies a need for data for a station, due to a show or test. In a case like this StarSight might internally generate a lineup containing this station, and just ask the vendor to supply die schedule information.
  • die Station List must contain an entry identifying each one of tiiese, an entry for each alias for any of these, and an entry for every feed which appears in any lineup supplied by die vendor to StarSight.
  • Other fields give die station Call Letters or satellite feed's name, the usual abbreviation for the name, effective date and expiration date (for dealing witii Call Letter changes).
  • Lineup List The Lineup List is made up of two types of records: RG Records
  • Each RG record explains the details about one RG, such as contact names, location, type of service, daylight saving time observed etc.
  • Lineup Records Each Lineup record describes one of the channels received by die RG. The union of all the currently-effective records describing channels in a given RG comprises the Lineup for that RG. There may also be records which are not currently effective, either because the date they become effective is in the future, or because the date on which they ceased to be effective is in the past. Each record contains sufficient information to unambiguously identify die RG and channel it applies to, and (along with knowledge of die current date) to determine whetiier or not it is currently effective. It also contains information which allows the construction of composite channels.
  • the Lineup List can be updated incrementally by transmitting a Lineup List Update, consisting of only the Lineups for RGs that have been modified since die last time the full Lineup List was transmitted. Note that any time a given RG's Lineup is updated, it must be updated in full; that is: a Lineup List Update may update only some of the RGs, but any RG which has its updated must be updated by transmitting all the lineup information for that RG. Probable usage would be for the full Lineup List to be transmitted weekly, and a Lineup List Update, transmitted daily.
  • Filenames for the Station and Lineup lists shall be assigned as follows: Base name of each file shall consist of six characters signifying year, month and day; basename shall be separated from a suffix by a period, and die suffix shall denote which type of file, according to Table LV below: Basename. Suffix Type of File Examples yymmdd.STD Station List Daily file 940130.STD yymmdd.LUW Lineup Weekly file 940519.LUW yymmdd.LUD Lineup List Update 941121.LUD yymmdd.TRD TVRO Lineup File 931225.TRD
  • composite channels The issue of composite channels is handled tiirough the Lineup. If a single tunable channel routinely airs programming from more than one programming source, it is then known as a composite channel. (Example: A cable channel #41 might show VH1 for part of the day and HBO for another part of the day, etc.)
  • the Lineup will deal widi diis by assigning each of die feeds tiiat go into die composite to die same "tone" channel. The start and stop times can then be used to determine what data to compile for that composite.
  • Each record in the Station List file is comprised of the fields defined in Table LVI. Each field is delimited from the next with an ASCII "pipe" (7C hex) character. Fields witii a specified default size of 0 may be left empty if no data is available; fields with a nonzero minimum size are mandatory. Note: to inform StarSight that an entry of the Station List is being deleted, a Station List record is transmitted containing data in the the "Station ID" and "Last Modified Date/Time" fields, with all other fields empty. This signals StarSight to stop doing the internal processing associated with this Station. Station List Record Format Field # Field Name Field Size Description
  • Transponder Channel 7.
  • Affiliation 20 Network affiliation, if any.
  • Unique ID number assigned by vendor This ID is used to identify die station or feed wherever this is required.
  • Station Type empty, or 1 byte, numeric
  • this field would contain just a number.
  • Type of Satellite C or Ku
  • satellite usually a letter and a number, like G5
  • transponder a number
  • This field should contain data if the "Station Type” field contains 0, 1, or 2; it may be empty if "Station Type” is 3, 4, or 5.
  • Super Stations such as WTBS, WGN and WWOR deserve special consideration. In their home markets, these stations are just normal broadcast stations with normal broadcast Native channel numbers; but when received from satellite, the Native channel number must refer to a satellite and transponder. This is to be handled by using two separate Station IDs to refer to the two distinct usages of tiiese stations. If the schedule information is the same for both, this can be indicated by having one record give the other "Station ID" in the "Schedule Data Source” field. 7. Affiliation (up to 20 characters)
  • the Lineup database will contain one record for each currently -effective channel in each RG, and may also contain a futore lineup for each RG.
  • a "channel" is any seperately -scheduled feed. Composite channels are described using a separate record for each part of the composite.
  • RG record is transmitted, except tiiat it contains a 0 in the "Lineup Record Count” field, as well as a specific Date/Time for expiration, in the "Expiration Date/Time” field; all otiier fields should be formatted as per this specification. This signals StarSight to stop doing die internal processing associated witii this RG, as of the specified Date/Time. Note: due to die delay inherent in processing this type information, it is not a good idea to reuse this RG number to identify a new RG. To assure no problems of this natore, RG numbers should not be reused at all. 3. A lineup must always be described in its entirety, with an RG record immediately followed by all die Lineup records associated witii this RG. 4.
  • the current information is transmitted first, with an RG record having the earlier of the two effective dates, followed by all die current lineup records; then another RG record having an effective date in the futore followed by all die lineup records for the futore lineup.
  • Lineup information is to be sorted in ascending order on die following key values: a. RG number b. Effective Date c. Source d. Tune Channel .
  • Last Date/Time Modified field in the RG record; an update of the "Lineup Info Last Date/Time Modified” field implies that the entire Lineup for that RG has been updated and verified.
  • RG number 8 8 (The 8 digit I.D. number of this RG)
  • Satellite Name Reception Group (if cable, name of headend)
  • Cable System name / 0 120 (if cable, name of
  • tiiat The decimal number of Lineup records tiiat follow this record; tiiat is: the number of following records used to completely define die Lineup of diis RG.
  • RG number is the unique 8 decimal digit ID of diis RG.
  • RG numbers must not be re-assigned: once an RG number has been assigned, it may eventually pass out of usage (say, because a company goes out of business); but even in this case, its RG Number should not be reused. 4.
  • RG group type (1 byte)
  • RG Name should uniquely identify an entity that can have its own lineup. For example, each headend of a cable system can have its own lineup, so each headend should have a name which is somehow unique, even if it is only a unique number, or a unique combination of die Cable System Name with a number.
  • this may be a system operated by a Multiple System Operator (MSO). If so, name the MSO. If satellite, name the operator of the satellite.
  • MSO Multiple System Operator

Abstract

Television schedule information transmission and utilization systems (50A-50D) transmit TV schedule data and associated network control messages provided by computer (54) as packets via the Video Blanking Interval (VBI) lines in the TV signal from various television program providers (51). This data is acquired by regional data processing systems and forwarded by the regional data processing systems to subscriber units (52) and used to construct an internal database. This internal database can be accessed by the subscriber unit (52) to display a TV schedule for the channels that are received by the user's TV.

Description

TELEVISION SCHEDULE INFORMATION TRANSMISSION AND UTILIZATION SYSTEM AND PROCESS
ORIGIN OF THE INVENTION This application is a continuation in part of copending, commonly assigned
Young et al., Pending U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 08/198,538, filed February 18, 1994, and entitled "User Interface for Television Schedule System," which is in turn a file wrapper continuing application of U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 07/579,555, filed September 10, 1990, now abandoned. This application is further a continuation in part of copending, commonly assigned Roop et al., Pending U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 08/239,225, filed May 4, 1994 and entitled "Television Schedule Information Transmission and Utilization System and Process," Attorney Docket STAR-005/00US.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
1. Field of the Invention:
The present invention relates generally to a system and method for broadcasting, receiving and using television schedule information. More particularly, it relates to such a system and method in which the television schedule information is broadcast in, e.g., the vertical blanking interval (VBI) of a television broadcast, a schedule of television programs for a user's broadcast area or cable system is compiled from the broadcast, and the schedule is displayed on the user's television set for interactive use. As used herein, the term "broadcast" is used in a broad sense to include such transmission modes as cable and telephonic transmission. 2. Description of the Prior Art:
It is known in the art to provide an interactive television program schedule system utilizing broadcast schedule information. For example, such a schedule system is disclosed in commonly assigned Young, U.S. Patent 4,706,121, issued November 10, 1987 and the above referenced Young et al. pending application. In the design of such a schedule system, only a limited amount of memory and data processing capability can be provided in the user's equipment that receives the schedule information broadcast, compiles the schedule for the user's broadcast area or cable system, displays the schedule on the user's television set and interacts with the user, while enabling that equipment to be provided at a low enough price for mass marketing. This memory and data processing limitation was recognized by Hallenbeck, U.S. Patent 5,038,211 , issued August 6, 1991. The solution proposed by Hallenbeck is to subdivide the schedule information into prioritized categories, store the highest priority category, and as much of the lower priority categories as possible in the amount of memory available. A significant problem with this approach is that less information may be provided about programs in the schedule when there are more programs in the schedule and the need for more information is greatest. Further development in light of the memory and processor limitations of consumer electronics is therefore required.
When schedule information is transmitted as part of a program broadcast signal and a prior art subscriber unit acquires the schedule information from the program broadcast signal, a potential problem arises when previously broadcast programs have been recorded on a VCR and are played back. The prior art subscriber unit lacks any ability to distinguish a video signal generated from a recorded program from a video signal received in real time from a broadcast. As a result, the subscriber unit may overwrite more recent program schedule information acquired from a real time broadcast with older program schedule information coming from a video tape.
Proposals to transmit television schedule information with television broadcast signals often use a low bandwidth transmission mode, such as one or more lines in the vertical blanking interval (VBI) of the television broadcast signals. The use of such low bandwidth transmission modes means that the format and management of the transmissions must be carefully planned in order to avoid practical problems. For example, when a schedule update is to be transmitted, unless special provisions are made for such updates, worst case transmission delay until the update is received and entered in a user's subscriber unit could amount to five hours, the time for transmission of a complete schedule for a week in an NTSC television broadcast signal using one line of the VBI for the schedule information. In the case of last minute schedule changes, such a delay would be unacceptable.
Data encryption is essential for a subscription-based broadcast television schedule system. Without data encryption, the schedule information could be acquired and used by pirate user equipment without payment of the subscription fee. However, decryption of encoded data is a processor intensive. A conventional approach of encrypting the entire schedule information transmission requires a faster and more expensive microprocessor than would otherwise be suitable for the subscriber units.
When implementing a television schedule system on a national or even international basis, provision must be made for different time zones. Adjusting times in the schedule for the different time zones in the process of transmitting the schedule adds substantial overhead to the data transmission. It would be desirable to eliminate the need for such adjustments in the transmission.
It may be desirable in the operation of a television schedule system to provide the schedule information embedded at different places in the television signal at different parts of the system in order to avoid the necessity of imposing uniformity throughout the system. To do so, it is necessary to provide a way for recipients of the schedule information to identify it in the television signal.
In the operation of a broadcast television schedule system, acquisition of new schedule information by the subscriber units consumes a substantial proportion of available microprocessor processing time. When obsolete schedule information is deleted and new schedule information is acquired, a substantial portion of the new information, such as program titles, duplicates information already present in stored schedule information or to be deleted with the obsolete schedule information. Avoiding the deletion of information that will form part of new schedule information would help to minimize the amount of processor time devoted to the acquisition of new schedule information. Because of the severe memory limitations in consumer electronic products, it is necessary to use the memory efficiently in order to provide as much information and as much functionality in the subscriber unit as possible with the available memory.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
Accordingly, it is an object of this invention to provide an interactive television program schedule system and method that can be implemented with low cost microprocessors and memory in subscriber data processing systems. It is another object of the invention to provide an interactive television program schedule system and method in which television program schedule data is transmitted and stored in a manner that allows a low cost microprocessor suitable for use in a mass produced consumer product to carry out subset searching of the television program schedule data.
It is a further object of the invention to provide such a system and method in which television program schedule information is transmitted in an efficient manner. It is still another object of the invention to provide such a system and method in which me television program schedule information is acquired by the subscriber data processing systems in an efficient manner.
It is a still further object of the invention to provide such a system and method in which fast schedule updates to accommodate schedule updates can be provided with a low bandwidth transmission system.
It is yet another object of the invention to provide such a system and method that will be able to distinguish between currently broadcast schedule information and older schedule information included with a broadcast that was recorded.
It is yet a further object of the invention to provide such a system and method in which schedule update information is given priority treatment.
It is another object of the invention to provide such a system and method in which the schedule information transmission is selectively encrypted.
It is a further object of the invention to provide such a system and method in which a single system time is employed in schedule information transmission portions of the system and compensation for local time is carried out in the subscriber units. It is still another object of the invention to provide such a system and method in which the subscriber units are able to identify schedule information provided in different locations of a television broadcast signal.
It is still another object of the invention to provide such a system and method in which portions of schedule information already acquired by a subscriber unit and which duplicate portions of new schedule information are retained, so that such schedule information portions need not be acquired again by the subscriber unit. It is yet another object of the invention to provide such a system and method in which data compression is employed in a unique way to make most efficient use of available memory.
The attainment of these and related objects may be achieved through use of the novel television schedule information transmission and utilization system and method herein disclosed. In one aspect, a television schedule information transmission and utilization system in accordance with this invention has a central data processing system. A means is connected to the central data processing system for providing schedule information data for a predetermined territory to the central data processing system. The central data processing system includes means for formatting the schedule information data for the predetermined territory into a predetermined schedule information transmission format. A means is coupled to the central data processing system for transmitting the schedule information data for the predetermined territory in the predetermined schedule information transmission formats. A plurality of regional data processing systems, each located in a region of the predetermined territory, include means for receiving the schedule information data for the predetermined territory, means for selecting the schedule information data for the region in which each of the plurality of regional data processing systems is located and means for transmitting the schedule information data for the region. A plurality of subscriber data processing systems are in each of the regions. Each of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems include means for receiving at least a portion of the schedule information data for the region, means for storing the schedule information data received by the subscriber data processing system, means for assembling portions of the schedule information data received by the subscriber data processing system for display to a user of the subscriber data processing system and a display connected to the means for assembling portions of the schedule information data to display the portions of the schedule information data.
In another aspect of the invention, a television schedule information transmission system includes a central data processing system for a predetermined territory having means for transmitting television schedule data for the predetermined territory and subscriber data processing systems in the predetermined territory. The system is improved with a plurality of regional data processing systems, each located in a region of the predetermined territory. The plurality of regional data processing systems each include means for receiving the schedule information data for the predetermined territory, means for selecting the schedule information data for the region in which each of said plurality of regional data processing systems is located and means for transmitting the schedule information data for the region to a plurality of the subscriber data processing systems in each of the regions.
In a further improvement of the television schedule transmission system, the means for transmitting the schedule information data for the region in each of said plurality of regional data processing systems has an ability to transmit the schedule information data for the region in different places of a television broadcast signal. Each of the subscriber data processing systems includes a means for locating the schedule information data in the television broadcast signal.
In a further aspect of the invention, a method in a television schedule information transmission system includes transmitting schedule information data for a predetermined territory to a plurality of regional data processing systems each located in a region of the territory. The schedule information data for each region is selected with its regional data processing system The schedule information data for each region is transmitted with its regional data processing system to a plurality of subscriber data processing systems in each region. Portions of the schedule information data received by each subscriber data processing system are assembled for display to a user of each subscriber data processing system. The portions of the schedule information data are displayed to the user.
The method further desirably includes having at least some of the plurality of regional data processing systems transmit the schedule information data in different places of a television broadcast signal. Each of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems locates the schedule information data in the television broadcast signal.
In still another aspect of the invention, a television schedule information transmission system includes a central data processing system for a predetermined territory having means for transmitting television schedule data for the predetermined territory and a plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the predetermined territory. The system is improved by providing means in the central data processing system for transmitting the television schedule data as commands. The commands include instructions for the plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the system and television schedule information in elemental form used by the commands in the plurality of subscriber data processing systems to assemble and display a television schedule.
In a still further aspect of the invention, a method in a television schedule information transmission system includes transmitting commands from a central data processing system to a plurality of subscriber data processing systems. The commands include instructions for the plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the system and television schedule information used by the commands in the plurality of subscriber data processing systems to assemble and display a television schedule. The television schedule is assembled from the television schedule information in each of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems. The television schedule is displayed to a user of each of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems.
In a still further aspect of the invention, a television schedule information transmission system includes a central data processing system for a predetermined territory having means for transmitting television schedule data for the predetermined territory and a plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the predetermined territory. The system is improved with means in the central data processing system for transmitting a predetermined character string comprising a portion of the schedule information to the plurality of subscriber data processing systems. A means in each of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems determines whether the predetermined character string has been acquired by that subscriber data processing system. A means in each of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems stores the predetermined character string in that subscriber data processing system if it has not already been acquired.
In yet another aspect of the invention, a method in a television schedule information transmission system includes transmitting a predetermined character string comprising a portion of the schedule information to a plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the system. Whether the predetermined character string has been acquired by a particular subscriber data processing system is determined.
The predetermined character string is stored in that subscriber data processing system if it has not already been acquired. In a further aspect of the invention, a television schedule information transmission system includes a direct broadcast satellite. A central data processing system has means for transmitting television schedule data for the direct broadcast satellite to the direct broadcast satellite. Subscriber data processing systems have means for receiving the television schedule data for the direct broadcast satellite from the direct broadcast satellite. The system is improved with a plurality of regional data processing systems, each located in a region of a predetermined territory. The plurality of regional data processing systems each include means for receiving the schedule information data for the predetermined territory. Means selects the schedule information data for the region in which each of the plurality of regional data processing systems is located. Means transmits the schedule information data for the region to a plurality of the subscriber data processing systems in each of the regions.
In another aspect of the invention, a method in a television schedule transmission system includes transmitting television schedule data for a direct broadcast satellite to the direct broadcast satellite. The television schedule data for the direct broadcast satellite is received from the direct broadcast satellite at a subscriber data processing system. Schedule information data for a predetermined territory is received in a regional data processing system located in a region of the predetermined territory. The schedule information data for the region in which the regional data processing system is located is selected in the regional data processor. The schedule information data for the region is transmitted to the subscriber data processing system.
In still another aspect of the invention, a television schedule information transmission system includes a central data processing system having means for transmitting television schedule data. A subscriber data processing system has means for receiving at least some of the television schedule data transmitted by the central data processing system. The system is improved by providing a subscriber data processing system including a memory for efficiently storing database items comprising the television schedule information. Each of the database items has a handle as an index into a handle table identifying memory locations corresponding to the handle. This allows physical movement of database items from one memory location to another for garbage collection. This allows holes in the database memory which arise as data ages and is discarded to be recovered and concatenated into large useful memory blocks. This trades "free" microcontroller cycles for memory, which is expensive.
In a still further aspect of the invention, a method in a television schedule information transmission system includes transmitting television schedule data. At least some of the television schedule data is received at a subscriber data processing system as database items comprising the television schedule information. Each of the database items has a handle. The handle is used as an index into a handle table identifying memory locations corresponding to the handle. In another aspect of the invention, a television schedule information transmission system includes a central data processing system for a predetermined territory having means for transmitting television schedule data for the predetermined territory including updates of television schedule data previously transmitted. There are a plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the predetermined territory. Each of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems includes a receiver for television schedule data and a memory for storing television schedule data. The memory is coupled to the receiver. The system is improved by including means in the central data processing system for assigning a transmission priority for the updates of television schedule data previously transmitted relative to other television schedule data.
In a further aspect of the invention, a method in a television schedule information transmission system includes establishing a relative priority for transmission of the television schedule information between updates of originally transmitted television schedule information and originally transmitted schedule information. The television schedule information is transmitted in accordance with the relative priority. At least some of the transmitted television schedule information is received at a subscriber data processing system.
In yet another aspect of the invention, a television schedule information transmission system includes a central data processing system for a predetermined territory having means for transmitting television schedule data for the predetermined territory and a plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the predetermined territory. Each of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems includes a receiver for television schedule data. A memory for storing television schedule data is coupled to the receiver. The system is improved by including means in the central data processing system for identifying the transmitted television schedule data by time relative to other transmitted television schedule data. Means in the subscriber data processing system determines if television schedule data received by the subscriber data processing system has a time identification later than a time identification of television schedule data stored in the memory.
In yet a further aspect of the invention, a method in a television schedule transmission system includes transmitting television schedule data with an identification of the transmitted television schedule data by time relative to other transmitted television schedule data. The transmitted television -schedule data is received with a subscriber data processing system. The television schedule data is stored in a memory of the subscriber data processing system. Television schedule data is subsequently supplied including an identification by time relative to other television schedule data. The identification by time of the subsequently supplied television schedule data is compared with the identification by time of the television schedule data stored in the memory. The stored television schedule data is replaced with the subsequently supplied television schedule data if the identification by time of the subsequently supplied television schedule data is later than the identification by time of the stored television schedule data. The stored television schedule data is maintained in the memory if the identification by time of the stored television schedule data is later than the identification by time of the subsequently supplied television schedule data.
In still another aspect of the invention, a television schedule information transmission system includes a central data processing system for a predetermined territory having means for transmitting television schedule data for the predetermined territory and a plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the predetermined territory. Each of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems includes a receiver for television schedule data. A memory for storing television schedule data is coupled to the receiver. The system is improved by including means in the central data processing system for encrypting a selected portion of the television schedule data required by the subscriber data processing system to assemble a television schedule for display. Means in the subscriber data processing system decrypts the selected portion of the television schedule data. In a still further aspect of the invention, a method in a television schedule transmission system includes selectively encrypting a portion of television schedule data necessary to assemble a television schedule for display. The television schedule data including d e encrypted portion is transmitted. The television schedule data is received in a subscriber data processing system. The encrypted portion of the television schedule data is decrypted. The television schedule data, including the now decrypted portion, is used to assemble a television schedule for display. In another aspect of the invention, a television schedule information transmission system includes a central data processing system for a predetermined territory having means for transmitting television schedule data for the predetermined territory and a plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the predetermined territory. Each of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems includes a receiver for television schedule data. A memory for storing television schedule data is coupled to the receiver. The system is improved by including a real time clock in the central data processing system for establishing a single system time for the transmission system. The means for transmitting television schedule data includes means for transmitting the single system time. The receiver includes means for receiving the single system time. The memory has a stored value for calculating local real time from the single system time. In a further aspect of the invention, a method in a television schedule transmission system includes establishing a single system time related to real time. The single system time is transmitted to a subscriber data processing system. Television schedule data expressed in the single system time is transmitted to the subscriber data processing system. A value is provided to the subscriber data processing system for calculating local real time from the single system time. Local times are calculated for a television schedule from the schedule data expressed in the single system time using the value.
In still another aspect of the invention, a television schedule information transmission system includes a central data processing system for a predetermined territory having means for transmitting television schedule data for the predetermined territory and a plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the predetermined territory. Each of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems includes a receiver for television schedule data. A memory for storing television schedule data is coupled to the receiver. The system is improved by having the means for transmitting television schedule data configured to transmit the television schedule data as a show list for each day in the television schedule. The subscriber data processing system is configured to maintain show lists for a rolling window comprising a plurality of days extending from present time into future time.
In a still further aspect of the invention, a method in a television schedule information transmission system includes transmitting television schedule data as a show list for each day in the television schedule. Show lists are maintained for a rolling window comprising a plurality of days extending from present time into future time.
In yet another aspect of the invention, a television schedule information transmission system includes a central data processing system for a predetermined territory having means for transmitting television schedule data for the predetermined territory and a plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the predetermined territory. Each of said plurality of subscriber data processing systems includes a receiver for television schedule data. A memory for storing television schedule data is coupled to the receiver. The system is improved by having the subscriber data processing systems configured to store the television schedule data in compressed form in the memory. A read only memory in the data processing system stores fixed text for the system. The fixed text is stored in said read only memory in compressed form.
In yet a further aspect of the invention, a method in a television schedule information transmission system includes storing television schedule data in compressed form in a memory of the system. Fixed text for the system is stored in a read only memory, also in compressed form.
The attainment of the foregoing and related objects, advantages and features of the invention should be more readily apparent to those skilled in the art, after review of the following more detailed description of the invention, taken together with the drawings, in which:
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
Figures 1-5 are block diagrams of television schedule information transmission and utilization systems in accordance with the invention. Figures 6-25 are schematic representations of message formats used in the systems of Figures 1-5.
Figures 26-60 are schematic representations of data structures, flow charts and display formats used in the systems of Figures 1-5.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
Turning now to the drawings, more particularly to Figures 1-4, there is shown television schedule information transmission and utilization systems 50A-50D. The systems 50A-50D transmit TV schedule data and associated network control messages as packets via the Video Blanking Interval (VBI) lines *in the TV signal from various television program providers 51, such as PBS, MTV or Showtime. This data is acquired by StarSight Subscriber Units 52 and used to construct an internal database. This internal database can be accessed by the Subscriber Unit 52 to display a TV schedule for the channels that are received by the user's TV. Since access to the network systems 50A-50D is via a subscription service, certain messages are encrypted by a security computer 53 to prevent access by nonsubscribers. Essentially any encryption system can be used with the invention, but an encryption system as disclosed in U.S. Patents 4,531,020 and 4,531,021 is preferred. Packets contain error detection information and system overhead bytes for finding the head of a packet. The information embedded in a Packet is termed a Message. Messages consist of one or more Commands. There are various types of Commands, each type distinguished by a unique code number. Commands contain the different types of information necessary to construct and maintain a TV schedule database, time markers, and user authorization information.
The systems 50A-50D are data networks that deliver specially formatted data to subscribers 52 located throughout the USA. This data is used to build an "on screen program guide" that enables the system subscribers to interactively view television program listings on their TV screen. The information for this network is derived from a database that is built by a computer program running on a UNIX computer 54. To build this database a data provider (DP) 56 is required to supply the computer 54 with program listing files called Show list files. Television program schedule data is generated by a vendor company at 56 and providedto the StarSight computer center 54 in a simple interchange format. Information is encoded that specifies what television programs are on at what time and on what channel. This data is received and processed for all channels for the entire country for 10 days. Any changes to the TV schedule are transmitted as soon as they are available on an as needed basis. The following description describes the specific information and fields that are contained in the files.
The Show list files are transferred electronically to the file system in computer 54 through a router connected to the DP's Ethernet and a digital leased line 58, using the standard TCP/IP program, FTP, or other file transfer protocol standard mutually agreed upon. The files may require compression, due to the bulk of data being transferred, using a mutually agreed upon data compression algorithm compatible with the UNIX file system in computer 54. The operating speed of the leased line 58 will be sufficient to transfer all data files in a reasonable length of time.
The files are transferred to the computer 54 on a daily basis 7 days a week, with the file transfer completed by 0800 hours PST. The daily file transfer will be into the home directory corresponding to the login name used to perform the file transfer. The "Main" file download to the computer 54 will always be for the date 12 days into the future. Thus if today is the 10th, today's data download would be for start times beginning at 0000 hours GMT on the 22nd.
Since the data files are sent on a daily basis some mechanism must be in place to allow for the updating of a program listing that has already been transferred. This is accomplished via the "Update" file. An Update file contains records of all changes that have been made since the last Update file was produced, which modify any of the data for any date which is still "active". An "active" date is defined as the dates beginning with today's date, and spanning the 11 days following (that is, all dates from today to the date covered by today's "Main" file, but not including that date.
Last minute schedule changes require "Flash Updates", which provide a "Flash Update" file within 5 minutes after entry of any change. Such files "trickle" across the leased line 58 to the computer 54 throughout the day. The TV schedule information is processed by the computer 54 and inserted into a master database. During this process, redundant information is removed. For example, if the I Love Lucy show is playing more than one time during the 10 days of schedule information, the character string for the title of that show is only stored once in the master database. For each channel and day, information is stored that specifies what shows are on at what time for the entire day. Each show may, but not necessarily, contain a show title and a show description.
The purpose of the master database is to store all of the TV schedule data in a relational database with standardized methods to access the data. The data is organized in a way that makes retrieval of the data efficient.
Television viewers receive a set of television video signals at the viewing location. Cable television providers assign broadcast and satellite program channels to specific channels. Every cable company has a unique assignment of channels. Every geographic location has a set of broadcast channels that may be received in that locality. A subscriber unit must have a listing of the program channels and the channel assignments in order to provide a subscriber with the TV schedule data relevant to that subscriber.
Each unique set of channel assignments are assigned to a Reception Group. Associated with each Reception Group is a region name, reception group type (cable, broadcast, satellite), set of zip codes where this set of program channels may be received, a list of program channels received, and the channel assignment for those program channels.
The Reception Group and program channel information is referred to as a Line Up. Line Up information comes from many sources, such as commercial companies that collect the information, subscribers, cable companies and analysis of broadcast channel transmission coverage.
Line Up information obtained from a single source is not considered correct. Various processes are used to align data from the multiple sources to obtain one database with superior quality. A master database is created to which all other Line Up data is compared. Changes are made to the master database when a correction is verified. The primary key to associating one Line Up to another is by verifying that the zip code of the Line Ups are the same. Once the zip code information is verified, the channel assignments are compared and verified by phone calls to the cable company or subscribers in the area.
Once the TV schedule data and Reception Group data are entered into the master database, a computer program processes the data to emit a data stream suitable for transmission over the PBS data network. The data is compressed and organized optimally for the Station Nodes and subscribers 52. The specific format of the output data stream is described below.
The output data stream is grouped and ordered by the data type. Due to the methods employed in the subscriber unit, it is optimal to sequence the data in a particular order. This allows the subscriber unit to collect an entire TV schedule in one pass of the data. The data blocks and their order is as follows:
1. Security Keys
Security keys are required to restrict access to the data to only those subscribers authorized to receive the data. Portions of the data stream are encrypted using the industry standard Data Encryption Standard security key algorithm. These keys may be changed at any time. To keep all of the desired subscriber units authorized and to change the keys, a series of messages are transmitted that contain the current and future security keys. A subscriber unit's initial set of decryption keys are sent in the network message that authorizes the unit to begin collecting data. The keys in this authorization message are encrypted with a key that is unique to the individual subscriber unit.
2. Theme Data
Most of the TV programs are categorized by theme categories and sub categories. The master database contains a set of attributes for each category that indicates if that TV program falls into a particular genre. Each unique combination of genre attributes are assigned a unique theme identification. Each show is assigned a theme identification based on a set of genre attributes. A table is transmitted that assigns a text description to each theme identification in the theme data block.
3. Daylight Savings Time Change Data is transmitted that specifies the time when daylight savings begins and ends. A message is repeatedly transmitted on the data network that specifies the exact time that daylight savings time begins and the time that it ends. The subscriber units 52 pick this message and adjust the local time to compensate for the effect of daylight savings.
4. Reception Group Data
Reception Group data contains the necessary channel line up data for all of the unique Reception Groups. This data includes Regiod ID (unique number associated with the reception group), region type (broadcast, cable, satellite), Channel ID (unique number associated with the particular channel), and tune channel • number (channel to which the TV must be tuned to receive the channel). Any particular subscriber unit 52 is assigned to a Reception Group during the authorization process. The subscriber unit will only process the data for the
Reception Group for which it was authorized. All other Reception Group data is ignored by the subscriber unit.
5. Channel Data
Each channel reference in any reception group must have an associated channel data command. The channel data command contains information about that channel. The native channel number (tune channel for that channel if it were a broadcast channel), station call letters, network affiliation (ABC, NBC, CBS), and an abbreviation for the channel name. The later abbreviation is used to display a 1 to 4 character icon for that channel on the subscriber unit. Data for any particular channel is only transmitted once per data cycle.
6. Show List Data
A show list contains a list of the TV programs and their duration for a particular channel and day. The command contains a Channel ID, start time for the first program, and a list of subsequent programs and their duration. Each show contains a Show ID and an optional Description ID. The Show ID and Description ID are each a unique number associated with the text of that show title or description, respectively. Each show also contains a flag that indicates if it is a pay per view program.
7. Show Title Data Every unique show title reference in a show list has an associated Show Title command. The Show Title command contains the Show ID, Theme ID, and show title text. Each unique Show Title is included only once in the data stream, and may be used many times by the subscriber unit 52. The text in the show title is compressed using Huffman compression techniques. 8. Show Description Data
Every unique show description reference in a show list has an associated Show Description command. The Show Description command contains the Show Description ID, MPAA rating, critics rating, and show description text. Each unique Show Description is included only once in the data stream, and may be used many times by the subscriber unit 52. The text in the show description is compressed using Huffman compression techniques. 9. Station Node Data Messages
Each PBS station node receives blocks of data that will be retransmitted by that station node. Only data that is required by the subscriber units in the area serviced by the station node is sent to that station node. For example, the station node in San Francisco only receives data for the cable systems and TV stations received by subscribers in the San Francisco area. None of the Los Angeles data is received by the San Francisco station node.
The goal of the security software for the StarSight system is provide conditional access to the StarSight data stream. Portions of the data are encrypted. Access to the schedule data is conditional in the sense that a subscriber unit 52 must know the decryption key. Only units that are authorized may receive the decryption key.
The conditional access system involves three levels of encryption. At the top, each unit has an RSA public/private key pair. Next, batches of up to 256 units share a DES key, which is called the batch key. At the bottom, program guides are encrypted with a DES key shared by all authorized units, which is called the program key. The program keys, changed periodically, are distributed under the batch keys, and the batch keys are distributed under the RSA keys, giving a three- level hierarchy.
The various keys are distributed either at the factory, or in later messages as follows:
• The RSA private key, as well as a serial number identifying the unit, are preprogrammed at the factory. StarSight keeps a copy of the corresponding
RSA public key. • The batch key is distributed in an authorization message, which is encrypted with the unit's RSA public key. The authorization message also gives the unit a batch number, and a unit number within the batch, a "service type" field, as well as the current and next program keys. The authorization message would typically be the first interaction between StarSight and a unit in the field, although it can be sent at any time to reassign batches.
• Program keys are distributed in a key distribution message, which is encrypted with a batch key. The key distribution message also indicates, according to a unit number in the batch, whether a unit is still authorized. Two of the security system functions are to process the authorization and key distribution messages. A third function is to decrypt encrypted text with one of the program keys. The text is encrypted in cipher block chaining (CBC) mode.
Periodically, the program keys are changed and distributed with the key distribution message. If a subscriber is to be de-authorized, they will not receive a new key distribution message, and will thus be unable to decrypt TV schedule data. The subscriber unit 52 is a microprocessor based system designed to receive, process and display the TV program schedule data. The subscriber unit 52 hardware includes a microprocessor, read only memory, random access memory, security co¬ processor, IR blaster co-processor, on screen display co-processor, and power management circuitry. These components are combined with software that implements the Electronic Program Guide system.
1. Operating System Executive
The microprocessor has many tasks to perform as will be described. Each task must be serviced in real time, but may not necessarily be completed each time slice. A "round robin" executive is used to perform this function. A main loop sequentially calls each of the individual tasks. When a task is called, it will perform its defined function, based on its current state. The tasks are required to complete the entire task or a subtask in a pre-defined time period. This way, all of the tasks have an opportunity to execute their defined task within a time period. After the last task has executed its function, the first task is executed again.
2. Memory Management
Television program data is dynamic and always changing. Showlists, show titles, and descriptions are variable length and change from day to day. For this reason, a memory managment system is deployed that allows dynamic allocation and recovery of data blocks. Memory is divided into equal sized allocation blocks. The set of memory blocks is referred to as the pool. A handle table is created that makes references to the memory blocks in the pool. An application software subroutine may allocate memory by creating and storing an entry in the handle table, which references one or more allocation units in the memory pool. Memory may be de¬ allocated by releasing the memory references in the handle table.
It is a requirement of the application to have continguous blocks of memory that exceed the length of a single memory block in the pool. This is done by allocating multiple contiguous memory blocks when needed.
After many memory blocks are de-allocated, the memory pool will be fragmented. There will be many blocks of memory of varying size that are not contiguous. One of the background tasks is to de-fragment the memory pool. A procedure is run that moves the allocated memory blocks to the lowest possible memory location. When a block of memory is moved, the references to that memory are changed in the handle table. This way the application program still has a reference to the memory block. Each allocation unit is moved so that any de¬ allocated blocks that are between allocated blocks are collapsed. The net result is that all of the de-allocated memory is at the highest possible memory location and all of the blocks are contiguous.
3. VBI Data Processing
VBI data is decoded from the video stream and processed by an 8032 microprocessor. A buffer is used to store the data and assemble packets. A comparator is used to detect a special sync character sequence. As soon as these characters are detected, the buffer is reset and the packet header is assembled. If the correct cyclic redundancy check (CRC) of the packet header is detected, the remaining portion of the packet is assembled. After the complete packet is assembled, an additional CRC is computed to verify that the complete packet was received without an error. Once this is verified, the packet is broken up and individual network messages are passed to the command processor.
4. Command Processor
The command processor determines if the encryption bit is set in the command header, and if so, the data is passed to the security module. The security module then decrypts the data and returns it to the command processor. The command processor functions as a dispatcher to send the command to the correct processing module, based on the command function.
5. Database Processing The database processor is responsible for storing and retrieving all TV schedule and channel data. It receives data from the command processor and stores that data into the database. A set of function calls is used to retrieve data for the application program. The organization of the database is described below.
6. Security Processing The security processor has two major functions: key management and data decryption. When messages are received from the command processor that contain the correct serial number or batch number, the security processor receives the message and decrypts the message. In the case of an authorization message, the data is decrypted using the RSA private key. The batch number, batch key and other control information is decoded and stored for fumre use. In the case of a key management message, the data is decrypted using the batch key, and the information is stored for future use. Program keys are distributed encrypted under the batch key.
7. User Interface
The user interface takes remote control commands as its primary input. A user requests various functions by pressing a button on a remote control. The user interface receives these commands and responds with the requested display screen. In addition, display commands are generated asynchronously when a recording begins or when the unit attempts to collect data.
The application has over 20 different and distinct display screens. Each display screen has associated with it a particular state. The data and format of the screen is dependent on the previous screen, the time of day, the contents of the database, and what remote control button was pressed. A state table is used to define the screen flow.
For every defined screen, there is an entrance function, an exit function, an update function, and an array of key -handling functions. The entrance function is called when a state is first entered, to collect all necessary data and format the screen. The exit function is called to release memory and data for the screen. The update function is called once per minute to update the screen time and to re-draw the screen if any shows have ended or any recordings have started or completed. Once in a particular state, the table contains a reference to another software function for every key on the remote control. These functions will be executed when the associated remote control button is pressed. The user interface also manages an array of pop-up windows that may appear and disappear on the screen either synchronously or in response to key presses. There are over 18 popup categories that define the screen priority for each, i.e., which one covers which when several popups are on the screen at once. These popups may be cursors, show descriptions, error messages, help messages, or requests for more information. Each popup category has its own entrance, exit, update, and key-handling routines similar to those of the main screen states.
In addition, the user interface is responsible for locking and unlocking the database while the user is interacting with the program guides, maintaining the selection and ordering of the program channels, controlling the tuner from the guide screens, performing the theme searches in the database, and controlling a demon that automatically collects schedule data at a pre-determined time from the data provider channel. 8. VCR Recording
The purpose of the record manager is to maintain a list of recording requests and to then start a recording at the correct time on the correct channel. The user interface defines three types of recordings, once, weekly and daily. The user may record the shows he/she is currently watching or select a particular title from one of the guide screens. The user will move the cursor to a particular title on one of the guides (grid, channel or theme), press the "record" button, and select if the program is to be recorded once, weekly or daily.
Once the user confirms the recording request, an entry is made in the recording queue. The recording queue contains entries for each of these types of recordings. In the case of the daily recordings, up to five individual entries are made in the working record queue. A single entry is made for the weekly and once recordings. The working record queue represents all of the recordings that are to be done for the coming week sorted by show start times.
A record demon is called from the real time executive that determines if it is time to start a recording. The leading entry in the working record queue is examined to detemine if it is time to start that recording. If it is time, a software function is executed that will start the recording. Once a recording is started, the record demon will determine if it is time to terminate a recording. When the stop time is reached, a software function is executed that will terminate the recording. Starting and stopping a VCR recording is done in several ways, based on the configuration of the user's equipment. In the case where a cable converter is not being used, the following actions are taken to start a recording:
1. Toggle the VCR power.
2. Tune the VCR to the desired channel. 3. Put the VCR in record mode.
If a cable converter is being used, the following actions are done:
1. Toggle the VCR power.
2. Tune the VCR to channel 2, 3 or 4.
3. Tune the cable converter to the desired channel. 4. Put the VCR in record mode.
5. Tell the user interface software what the currently tuned channel is.
To stop the recording, the VCR is put in stop mode and then the power is toggled. In all cases, these commands are performed by sending infrared commands to the device. Another function of the record demon is to examine the queue of weekly and daily record requests and then to spawn a new entry in the working queue. For example, if it is Monday morning and a daily record request is entered for a program in the afternoon, 5 entries will be made in the working queue, i.e. Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday and Friday. After the first recording is finished on Monday afternoon, the entry in the working queue for Monday will be deleted. The record demon will examine the record queue and discover that it is time to add a new entry in the working queue for next Monday. This entry will be added in the time sorted order position in the working queue.
Additionally, the demon maintains the proper start time when a daylight savings boundary is crossed. That is, the demon must add one hour to a show's start time in the fall and subtract one hour in the spring, provided daylight savings time is applicable to the user's region. The record manager handles deletions, either singly or muliply depending on the original type of recording. 9. On Screen Display
An on screen display (OSD) is used to display the text and graphic information that makes up the various display screens. A common interface is used to control various devices. Three different devices can be used: the ITT TPU2740, the ITT CCD 3005, and the Zilog Z89300. The user interface has a set of functions . defined to draw text, draw an embossed rectangle, draw a channel icon, and to set the display attributes. A set of software functions are used that translate these commands into the correct functions for the particular device. .
Details of the subscriber units 52 are provided in Figure 5. The following description is in terms of a subscriber unit 52 for a TV Receive Only (TVRO) system (see also Figure 4). With appropriate modifications, the subscriber unit 52 can also be incorporated in a cable decoder box for use with cable systems. The subscriber unit can also be built into televisions or VCRs or provided as a separate stand alone unit.
This description is for the electronic hardware of the StarSight Telecast "TVRO Subscriber Unit" 52. TVRO customers are people who have home satellite dishes for television viewing. TVRO stands for "TV Receive Only". The TVRO Subscriber Unit 52 will hook up to the customers TVRO Satellite system and will enable the customer to subscribe to StarSight's Electronic Program Guide Service. The TVRO Subscriber Unit 52 is a fully self contained, separate unit, that is installed in series with the existing customer TVRO equipment.
The Subscriber Unit receives Baseband Video from the customer TVRO system. The Program guide display screens are merged with the customer video in the Subscriber Unit. The customer has the options of Baseband Video out or Channel 3/4 RF out.
The Subscriber Unit formats and displays TV program schedule information in real time, overlaid on top of the TV viewing screen. The TV schedule information is transmitted in one of the Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI) lines of a conventional TV broadcast. The Subscriber Unit stores this information in local on board memory. The information is displayed in the form of a "Grid Guide" on the TV screen when the customer presses a button on the remote control. The Subscriber Unit 52 consists of the following sub-sections:
Inexpensive 8 bit Microprocessor 100.
64K Bytes of code ROM 101.
512K of RAM 102 for program data storage.
Custom gate array 103.
Segmented Base Registers 104 for fast memory data manipulation.
Security logic 106 for decoding incoming encrypted data.
Serial "I.M." Bus 108 for display controller interface.
Serial "StarSight" Bus 110 for inter processor communications. (ISB)
Watchdog timer 112 for error recovery.
IR input 113.
Infrared Receiver circuits 114.
Infrared Transmitter circuits 116 for TV, VCR control.
IR output 117.
CRC-32 encoding and decoding logic 118.
On board power supply 120.
Power down RAM data retention 122.
Video Input 123.
On Screen Display Controller and Formatter 124.
Custom Color Converter 126 for overlay display.
RF Modulator 127.
Choice of Baseband Video or RF outputs 128 or 130.
The heart of the TVRO Subscriber Unit 52 is an "8032, 8 bit Microprocessor" 100. This microprocessor controls all sections of the Subscriber Unit. A brief description of this processor will be given for reference. For more detail, refer to the 8032 data books from Intel or Signetics.
The 8032 has an 8 bit Data Bus and a 16 bit Address Bus. The upper 8 bits of the address bus are always present. The lower 8 bits of the Address Bus are time multiplexed with the Data Bus and an External Address Latch is required to de-multiplex this bus. This latch is located inside of the DBE 1200 Gate Array 103. The 8032 has two address spaces, the "CODE" space and the "DATA" space. The DATA space is further divided into the RAM Memory area and the I/O area. "CODE" refers to any access to Program ROM. The Program CODE space is 64K bytes long and the 8032 can only "READ" from this space. All Code access uses the "PSEN" (Program Store ENable) line. The -WR and -RD lines do not assert during CODE accesses. +ALE is the control signal used to de-multiplex the Address Bus. The falling edge of +ALE will latch the lower 8 bits of the address. -PSEN will then assert to start the ROM read. The current design has the EPROM -CS line always tied to ground. This makes the EPROM "OE ACCESS" time the determining spec for ROM reads. By today's standards, this microprocessor bus timing is very slow and this allows for the use of inexpensive ROMs. "DATA" refers to any access to external RAM 102. Special additional hardware has been added to the TVRO Subscriber Unit so that the DATA area can extend past the 64K addressing limit. This is done via segmenting "BASE REGISTERS" 104 and will be discussed later. The 8032 -RD strobe will assert for RAM Data Reads and the -WR strobe will assert for RAM Data Writes. PSEN will not assert during Data accesses. The RAM Data accesses can only take place via the "MOVX" instruction. No other 8032 instruction will cause -RD or -WR to assert. Once again, +ALE is used to latch the address, then -RD or -WR will assert to start the data transfer. Read data must be valid just before -RD negates. The Write data is valid the entire time that -WR is asserted. Along with the RAM Data Space, there is also a "64K I/O SPACE". This
I/O space occupies the same first 64K segment as the DATA RAM. There is a signal called -r-DRAM_ENABLE that is used to determine which area will be accessed. The I/O space is where the system control registers are located. There are 18 write registers and 13 read registers. These registers are used to control the various subsystems in the Subscriber Unit. Features like clock frequency selection, serial bus control, I.R. status and control, etc., are all controlled through this register set. There are other control registers located in the peripheral chips. The 8032 uses two serial Busses to communicate and control these peripheral chips. The "IM BUS" 108 is a 3 wire serial bus used to talk to the transaction processing unit (TPU 2740) 124. The TPU 2740 collects the incoming VBI data and also formats and displays the various StarSight overlay screens. The Software Serial Bus 110 is used to talk to the Security Microprocessor 106 and also to the IR Blaster Chip 116. This is a two wire bus with a unique serial timing protocol.
The first 64K of 8032 Address Space has three separate overlapping functions.
1. If -PSEN is asserted, then the CODE ROM will be accessed.
2. If +DRAM_ENABLE = logic '0', then the I/O registers will be accessed.
3. If +DRAM_ENABLE = logic '1', then the first 64K of RAM will be accessed. The area above 64K is always RAM and the total length is 512K bytes.
8032 SIGNAL SUMMARY
Table I summarizes the input and output signals of the 8032 microprocessor:
Signal Name FUNCTION Direction
+ALE Latches the low 8 bits of the Address Bus. Output
-PSEN Enables Op-Code read fetches from ROM. Output -WR Asserts to Write to external DATA RAM Output
-RD Asserts to Read from external DATA RAM Output
-INTO Interrupt 0-Indicates the ISB circuit requesting service. Input
-INT1 Interruptl — Indicates that power is about to fail. Input
PORT 0 8 bit Multiplexed 8032 Data and Address Bus. I/O PORT 1 Various system control bits. I/O
PORT 2 Upper 8 bits of the Address Bus Output
PORT 3 8032 control bits. I/O
Table I Base Register Description The 8032 Data Address space is only 64K bytes long. The TVRO
Subscriber Unit however, is required to store more than 64K bytes of TV program data. The "READ and WRITE BASE REGISTERS" allow the 8032 to access additional memory above the 64K limit.
The 8032 uses an internal 16 bit register called the "Data Pointer Register" (DPTR) to hold the address of the external DATA location. The Base Registers
(located in the DBE 1200 Gate Array) hold another 16 bit value that is added to the Data Pointer value to form the actual RAM address. The Base Register contents is shifted 4 bits left with respect to the Data Pointer so that the RAM address becomes 20 bits long. 20 bits allows for a 1 Megabyte total Data RAM size. The 8032 can access any 64K byte chunk of the external RAM starting at the address written in the Base Registers. (Since the base register is shifted 4 bits left, the 8032 can access any 64K byte segment starting on even 16 byte boundaries.)
There are two base registers so that Memory Block Moves can be performed quickly. It would be very slow and cumbersome to the software if the value of the DPTR had to be changed for each read and then changed again before a write during block moves. The dual Base Registers allow you to put the starting address of the Read (Source) Block into the Read Base Register, and the starting address of the
Write (Destination) block into the Write Base Register. A software loop can then be written that does a read followed by a write to the same DPTR address. The DPTR is then incremented and the process repeated. This allows software to quickly move blocks of Data anywhere in external RAM. A provision has also been added to quickly disable the Base Registers. The signal +ENABLE_BASE will force the outputs of both Base Registers to all zeros. This is done without altering the contents of the Base Registers. This feature provides a quick method of accessing the first 64K segment of RAM. Both RAM Reads and Writes will go to the same location. Processor related data will be stored in the first 64K segment (Register Images, Software Counter Values, System
Parameters etc.). The upper segments are used to store TV program information. Table II below tries to show how the DPTR is added to the Base Register to form the 20 bit RAM address.
Note: Base Reg shifted 4 bits left with respect to Address bus.
Base Reg 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
+ 8032 Addr 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
=20 bit Addr 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
+DRAM_EN must = 1 to access the external memory area Table II
As an example:
The READ BASE REGISTER is set to 0001 Hex. The WRITE BASE REGISTER is set to 1080 Hex. The Data Pointer (DPTR) is set to 382A Hex.
An 8032 Read (MOVX A,@DPTR), will access address 0383A Hex (note: 20 bits!).
An 8032 Write (MOVX @DPTR,A), will access address 1403A Hex (note: 20 bits!).
+DRAM_EN must = 0 to access the I/O area.
DATA RAM DESCRIPTION
As previously mentioned, the DATA RAM 102 stores the TV program guide information. This RAM is currently available in 3 sizes, 128K bytes, 256K bytes or 512K bytes. The TVRO product uses 512K bytes. The Data RAM uses "PSRAM" chips. "PS" stands for Pseudo Static. The PSRAM is a standard DRAM that has been packaged with STATIC RAM pinouts. Extra logic is added so that DRAM refreshes are simplified. These PSRAMs also have a power down data retention feature that works down to 3 Volts. There are four modes of PSRAM operation in this product. They are:
1. Sequence Up Mode.
2. Normal Data Transfer Mode.
3. Sequence Down Mode.
4. Power Down Data Retention Mode. There are two sizes of PSRAM that can be used in this design. The 128K by
8 chip or the 512K by 8 chip. There is a provision to use two of the 128K by 8 parts to obtain 256K bytes of total memory.
These two parts have slightly different pin outs and operate in slightly different methods. Circuitry has been added to compensate for these differences. There is a bit called +512KRAM that must be set by the software depending on which chip is used.
Also the PSRAMs must go through a "Sequence Up" state after power on and a "Sequence Down" state just prior to power off. PSRAM OPERATION (Sequence Up Operation) After initial power up, the PSRAMs must be "SEQUENCED UP" before any reads or writes can be done. The Sequence Up procedure is slightly different for 128K and 512K parts. This procedure was added to insure that logic and timing specifications of the PSRAM are maintained when the PSRAMs are in the power down data retention mode. There is a provision to use a large Capacitor or a Battery to keep the PSRAMs powered up when the system power is lost. In order to preserve PSRAM data when the power is off, certain of the PSRAM inputs must be held in a known logic state. On top of this, these pins must follow defined timing constraints when they are put into the known logic states. The pins and logic levels are different for the 128K and the 512K parts.
For the 128K parts: +Chip_Enable2 (Pin 30) and -REFRESH (Pin 1) must both be held at logic '0' when the power is removed to insure data retention. When going from data retention mode to normal operation, -REFRESH (Pin 1) must go high at -least 225nS before + CHIP_ENABLE (Pin 30) goes high.
For the 512K parts: -Chip_Enable (Pin 22) must be held at logic '1 ' and -OE/-REFRESH (Pin 24) must be held at logic '0' when the power is removed to insure data retention. When going from data retention mode to normal operation, -Chip_Enable (Pin 22) must go high at least 50nS before -OE/-REFRESH (Pin 24) goes high.
There is also a timing constraint as to how soon after normal PSRAM REFRESH the above sequences can occur. The Sequence Up logic in the DBE 1200 Gate Array controls the above timing. After a Power On Reset (POR) sequence is finished, the Microprocessor toggles a bit called +SEQUENCE_UP [Wr Addr 7400Hex, bit 5]. (Be sure to always return this bit to logic '0'). Toggling the +SEQUENCE_UP bit will start the Sequence Up State Machine. This State Machine will wait for the end of the next normal Refresh Pulse and then it will remove the forced logic levels using the correct timing as mentioned above. The refresh pulses occur about every 1 luS and the Sequence Up process takes about luS. Software should wait at least 15uS from the time that +SEQUENCE_UP is set till when the first PSRAM access is attempted. PSRAM OPERATION (Normal Operation)
Normal PSRAM operation is very straightforward. Refreshes are automatic and transparent to the microprocessor. The PSRAM must be Refreshed at least once every 15uS. The Refresh address is generated inside the PSRAM and is transparent to the user. In order to do a Refresh, the Refresh pin on the PSRAM must be held low for a minimum time. For ease of circuit design, the Refresh Request is generated by the internal clock divided by 256. With a 24MHz clock, this happens about every 10.7uS.
The Refresh Pulse to the PSRAM chip must not occur at the same time as a PSRAM read or write access. Since the Refresh Request and any PSRAM access are asynchronous, the -PSEN line is used to start a Refresh. When the Refresh Request is detected, the Refresh circuit waits until the next -PSEN falling edge. -PSEN falls at the beginning of a CODE access to ROM. CODE accesses to ROM happen all the time as the 8032 fetches OP-CODES. During this time, it is impossible for the 8032 to access PSRAM. The Refresh is very fast and it will be finished before the -PSEN CODE fetch is complete.
CAUTION: This system must have -PSEN toggling in order to refresh PSRAM. In normal operation this will happen all of the time. Be careful if you use an 8032 emulator. The refreshes will stop if you ever break and stop the emulator. Most emulators have an option to insure that -PSEN still asserts even when an emulator breakpoint occurs.
PSRAM OPERATION (Sequence Down Operation)
Sequence Down is the opposite of Sequence Up. The system has an "Early Warning Power Fail Detector" that will interrupt the 8032 before the supply voltage starts to drop. The 8032 responds to this interrupt by saving any critical PSRAM data and then asserting the +SEQUENCE_DOWN bit. Sequence Down will force the PSRAM critical inputs to their correct state and will do so insuring that the timing specification is maintained. The Sequence Down logic will not start until the end of the next Refresh to insure proper timing. The SEQUENCE DOWN rules are shown below. For the 128K parts:
+Chip_Enable2 (Pin 30) must go to logic '0' at least 60nS before -REFRESH (Pin 1) is forced to logic '0'. After the power dies, external components should hold these lines at logic '0' as the gate array outputs will be undefined. For the 512K parts: -Chip_Enable (Pin 22) must be forced to logic '1' at least 50nS before -OE/-REFRESH (Pin 24) is forced to logic '0'. PSRAM OPERATION (Power Down Data Retention) As long as the critical input pins are held at their power down levels (See Above) and the voltage to the PSRAM chips stays above 3.0 Volts, the data will be retained.
PSRAM POWER DOWN LATCH There is a very low current J-K Flip Flop that is powered by the same backup capacitor that powers the PSRAMs. This flip flop lets the software know if the voltage dropped below the minimum voltage specification during a power off period.
At initial power on, this latch should power up to logic '0'. The microprocessor can read the state of this latch on the +RAMV_OK line. If the latch is '0', then it should be assumed that the voltage dropped below the PSRAM minimum data retention specification and all RAM data is invalid. If the latch = T, then the PSRAM data is still valid from before the power down.
If +RAMV_OK is logic '0', then the microprocessor can set it to logic '1 ' after self test diagnostics pass. Once this latch is set to logic T, it will stay set until the PSRAM Vdd Voltage drops below about 3.1 Volts.
Five conditions are necessary to set this latch. 1. The PSRAM voltage must be greater than 3.1 Volts. (This releases the J-K Flip Flop Reset Pin). 2. The PCB +5 Volt supply must be greater than about 4.5 Volts. (This releases system POR).
3. The -ENBLAT line must be set to logic '0'.
4. The +BAND0 line must be set to logic '1'.
5. The +LAT_CLK line must be toggled to logic '0' and then to logic '1 '. The -ENBLAT and +LAT_CLK lines are driven by 8032 microprocessor
PORT pins. These pins will be initialized to logic '1' by 8032 hardware at POR time. The +BAND0 line comes from the DBE 1200 gate array and is reset to logic '0' at POR time.
By requiring all of these conditions, it is hoped that the latch will not be able to be set by spurious noise glitches at power up. It would not be a bad idea to have checksum locations in PSRAM to verify that the data is valid if the latch reads a logic T. (Just in case the latch can be set by a noise glitch.) The MC14xxx series CMOS devices were chosen for the latch circuit because this family guaranteed very low worst case current drain. DBE 1200 GATE ARRAY 103
The Gate Array 103 is packaged in an 84 pin PLCC package. The Gate Array terminology is slightly different from the PCB terminology. The PCB uses
" + " in front of a signal name to indicate "active high". The Gate Array dropped the " + " and just uses the signal name when the signal is "active high". The PCB uses "-" in front of a signal name to indicate "active low". The Gate Array adds the letter "X" in front of a signal name when it is "active low". The following abbreviations for addresses and bits will be used.
(6000W.5) = Write Address 6000 hex, bit 5. (6C00R.3) = Read Address 6C00 hex, bit 3. ADDRESS DECODING
The address decoders are shown on pages 1 and 9 of Appendix A. 74F138 type 1 of 8 decoders are used with the 8032 -RD or -WR strobe used for an enable. The outputs of the 74F138 will be valid only when the proper address is written or read.
The following tables show the Write and Read addresses that are decoded. The page number refers to the page of the Gate Array schematic of Appendix A that the register can be found on. The "Gate Array Name" is the name of the decoded signal on the schematic. Table III below shows the I/O Write register decodes and Table IV shows the I/O read register decodes. +DRAM_EN must = 0 to access these registers.
WRITE Pg WRITE Gate Array
ADDRESS REGISTER ACCESSED Name 8 8003322 PPOORRTT 11 X X VARIOUS OUTPUT CONTROL BITS
8032 PORT 3 X VARIOUS CONTROL AND I/O BITS
0000H 3 READ_BASE_REGISTER_LOW XRBASELO
0400H 3 READ_BASE_REGISTER_HIGH XRBASEHI
0800H 3 WRITE_BASE_REGISTER_LOW XWBASELO 0 0CC0000HH 3 3 WRITE_BASE_REGISTER_HIGH XWBASEHI
1000H 10 PWM_CONTROL_REGISTER_LOW XPWM LO
1400H 10 PWM_CONTROL_REGISTER_HI XPWM_HI
2000H 12 I.M. BUS ADDRESS REGISTER XL IM AD 2400H 12 I.M. WRITE DATA 1 REGISTER XL_IM_D1
2800H 12 I.M. WRITE DATA 2 REGISTER XL_IM_D2
2C00H 12 I.M. BUS START TRANSFER REGISTER XSTRT M
3000H 9 IM BUS CONTROL REGISTER XIM_CTRL
3C00H 9 SECURITY CHIP CLOCK FREQ REGISTER XCLK_REG
6000H 9 OUTPUT CONTROL REGISTER XCNTRL 1
6400H 13 REFRESH WATCHDOG REGISTER XWDOG_CS
6800H 18 CRC-32 DATA REGISTER XWR_CRC
6C00H 29 ISB CONTROL REGISTER XISBCTRL
7000H 24 ISB TRANSMIT DATA REGISTER . XISBXMIT
7400H 31 RAM SEQUENCE AND GATE ARRAY XWR_TEST TEST REGISTER TABLE III 8032 I/O WRITE REGISTERS
READ Pg READ Gate Array
ADDRESS REGISTER ACCESSED Name
0400H 31 READ TEST MULTIPLEXER REGISTER XRD_MUX
0800H 5 I.R. RECEIVE DATA REGISTER XIRR REG
0C00H 6 ISB INTERRUPT STATUS REGISTER XRD_STAT
1000H 12 I.M. READ DATA BYTE # 1 XRD_BYT1
1400H 12 I.M. READ DATA BYTE it 2 XRD_BYT2
1800H 6 I.M. STATUS AND CHIP I.D. REGISTER XSW LO
1C00H 6 I.R. RECEIVER STATUS REGISTER XSW_HI
6800H 24 ISB RECEIVE DATA REGISTER XRRECREG
6C00H 29 ISB STATUS REGISTER 2 XISB_ST2
7000H 16 CRC-32 READ REGISTER 3 XRDCRC3
7400H 16 CRC-32 READ REGISTER 2 XRDCRC2
7800H 17 CRC-32 READ REGISTER 1 XRDCRC1
7C00H 17 CRC-32 READ REGISTER 0 XRDCRCO TABLE IV 8032 I/O READ REGISTERS
PSRAM CONTROL
The PSRAM Control logic is shown on Page 2 of Appendix A. This logic consists of simple gates that route the control signals to their proper pins depending on the mode the chip is in. The chip has two memory size modes, 128K and 512K. There is also a Sequence Up mode and Sequence Down mode. PSRAM CONTROL SIGNALS XRFSH 8 (-ReFreSH or address_bit_l 8) This is a dual purpose signal that should be tied to pin 1 of the PSRAM chips. When Sequenced Up, this signal is mode dependent.
In 128K mode, the -REFRESH signal is routed to this pin. In 512K mode, Bit 18 from the Address Mux is routed to this pin. When Sequenced Down, this signal is forced to logic "0". XRAM_OE0 (-RAM Output Enable 0)
This is a dual purpose signal that should be tied to pin 24 of the lower PSRAM chip. When Sequenced Up, this signal is mode dependent.
In 128K mode, this is the PSRAM read output enable line for the lower 128K PSRAM chip. It can only assert (active low) if the address is to the lower 128K and the 8032 -RD line asserts.
In 512K mode, this is the PSRAM read output enable AND the Refresh input. If this signal asserts by itself, then a refresh happens. If it asserts along with the -Chip Select pin, then a PSRAM read takes place. When Sequenced Down, this signal is forced to logic "0". XRAM_WE0 (-RAM Write Enable 0)
This signal should tie to pin 29 of the low order PSRAM chip. A PSRAM write will be done when this signal asserts along with a valid chip select. When Sequenced Up, this signal is the Write Enable to the PSRAMs in both modes. When Sequenced Down, this signal is a don't care. XRAM_OEl (-RAM Output Enable 1)
This is a dual purpose signal that should be tied to pin 24 of the upper PSRAM chip. When Sequenced Up, this signal is the Output Enable control for reads from the upper PSRAM chip in 128K mode. This signal is not used in 512K mode as there is no upper chip installed. When Sequenced Down, this signal is a don't care.
XRAM_WE1 (-RAM Write Enable 1)
This signal should tie to pin 29 of the high order PSRAM chip. A PSRAM write will be done when this signal asserts along with a valid chip select. When Sequenced Up, this signal is the Write Enable to the upper PSRAM in 128K mode. (Note: The current design does not use an "upper" chip in 512K mode.) When Sequenced Down, this signal is a don't care. XCE1 (-Chip Enable 1) This is a dual purpose signal that should be tied to pin 22 of the PSRAM chips. When Sequenced Up, this signal enables the PSRAM chips to read and write in both modes. When Sequenced Down, mis signal is forced to logic " 1 ". The 512K PSRAM chip requires this line to be forced to logic " 1 " during power down data retention mode. This line is a don't care on 128K PSRAMs. CE2_A17 (+ Chip Enable 2 or Address_bit_17)
This is a dual purpose signal that should be tied to pin 30 of the PSRAM chips. When Sequenced Up, this signal is mode dependent.
In 128K mode, this signal is tied to -f-Chip Enable and it is always logic "1 ".
In 512K mode, Bit 17 from the Address Mux is routed to this pin. XWRSTROB (-WRite STROBe)
During write, this is a shorter version of the 8032 write strobe. XWRSTROB is the timing signal used to write to PSRAMS. Data is written to PSRAM at the rising edge of XWRSTROB. This rising edge hits before the rising edge of the 8032 -WR to insure that any PSRAM data hold times are met. BASE REGISTERS AND ADDRESS MULTIPLEXER
Pages 3 and 4 of the Gate Array schematics in Appendix A show the Base Registers and the PSRAM address Multiplexer. See above for a description of the Base Register functions. This section will deal with the circuitry.
The Base Registers are shown at the left of Page 2. The outputs of these registers pass through "AND" gates before going into the Adders. The AND gates allow the base register outputs to be quickly forced to all zeros at the Adder inputs.
The outputs of the Adders feed over to the MUX. This MUX places the results of the READ ADDERS on the PSRAM address pins most of the time by default. There is no way to know that the 8032 is going to do a write until the -WR strobe asserts. When -WR asserts, a flip flop switches the MUX over to the WRITE
ADDER output. The read adder was chosen for the default value because RAM reads take a little longer than writes. The dual adders are there so that the write address is stable as soon as the -WR strobe asserts.
I.R. RECEIVE CIRCUIT
The I.R. Receive circuit has various modes of operation depending on whether the button on the remote is released or if it is continuously held down. This circuit is on page 5 of Appendix A. When a valid code is clocked into the I.R. RECEIVE DATA REGISTER
(0800R), the +IRR_VAL (IR Receive Valid) bit and the +VALTILRD (VALid
TIL RD) bits will set. The +IRR_VAL bit will remain set until the remote button is released. There are 2 ways to clear the +VALTILRD bit.
1. Reading the I.R. RECEIVE DATA REGISTER will clear +VALTILRD. 2. If the remote button is released and then pressed again, then + VALTILRD will clear when the button is re-pressed.
+IRR_NC (I.R. RECEIVER NO CHANGE) will set the first time that the
I.R. RECEIVE DATA REGISTER is read. It will remain set until the remote button is released. -l-IRR_RDY goes high as soon as the remote button is pressed and stays set until released.
SECURITY CLOCK GENERATOR
The Security Clock Generator is at the lower middle of page 9 in Appendix
A. This is a programmable clock generator for the Motorola Security Chip. The original spec for this clock was 5 MHz. To allow for changing oscillator frequencies, this clock was made programmable.
Both the high time and the low time of this clock period can be programmed independently by writing to I/O address 3C00hex. The high time is set with the upper nibble while the lower nibble sets the low time. This time is in multiples of the input oscillator frequency.
The circuit works by loading the program nibbles into 74F169 type counters.
These counters are set up as "down counters" and only one of them will decrement at any one time. After one counter reaches zero, the output will toggle, the counter will re-load and then the other counter will decrement. The inverters at the output of the program register set the initial value to "divide-by-7".
I.M. SERIAL BUS CIRCUIT
The I.M. Bus is used to talk to the TPU 2740 chip. The I.M. bus circuit is shown in Figures. Refer to the I.M. bus specification for a detailed explanation of this bus.
Briefly, the I.M. bus is a 3 wire serial communication bus. The 3 lines are called
I.M._CLOCK, I.M._DATA and I.M._IDENTIFY. The DBE 1200 gate array is always the I.M. Bus Master and therefore always drives the I.M._CLOCK line. The
I.M._DATA line is a bi-directional data line (Open Drain with an external pull up resistor). The I.M. DENTIFY line is an output used to identify the "I.M. Address" and also to terminate the transfer. An "IM BUS WRITE" is a transfer out of the
8032 to the IM Slave. An "IM BUS READ" is into the 8032 from the IM Slave device.
I.M. bus transfers always start with a 1 byte address and then 1 or 2 bytes of data.. A bit called I1BYTE (3000W.0) determines how many data bytes to transfer.
Another bit called WXR_BIT (3000W.1) determines if the transfer will be a read or a write. Page 11 of Appendix A shows the I.M. counter and control logic and Page
12 shows the I.M. Data Shift Registers.
I.M. CIRCUIT OVERVIEW The I.M. circuit is operated via the control and data registers. Here is a quick summary:
I.M. BUS ADDRESS REGISTER (2000W page 12 XL_IM_AD) . The
8032 writes the 8 bit address of the slave device that communication should be established with here. This address is latched in the 74HCT273 in Figure and is transferred to the shift register when the transfer begins. It is not necessary to reload this register if the same address is accessed on two successive I.M. transfers. The byte written to this register will always be the first byte written out of the Gate
Array for all I.M. transfers.
I.M. WRITE DATA 1 REGISTER (2400W page 12 XL_IM_D1) . The byte contained in this register will be the 2nd byte shifted out onto the I.M. bus during I.M. Writes. This register must be reloaded after each transfer.
I.M. WRITE DATA 2 REGISTER (2800W page 12 XL_IM_D2) . The byte contained in this register will be the 3rd byte shifted out during I.M. Writes, but only if the transfer length is set to 2 bytes. This register must be reloaded after each transfer.
I.M. READ DATA BYTE 1 (1000R page 12 XRD_BYT1) . After a read transfer, this register will contain the incoming data byte. If it is a 1 byte read transfer, then the data will be in this register. If it is a 2 byte read transfer, then the second byte received will be in this register.
I.M. READ DATA BYTE 2 (1400R page 12 XRD_BYT2) . After a 2 byte read transfer, this register will contain the first incoming data byte. During a 1 byte read transfer, the outgoing address will wrap back and end up in this register. This wrap feature can be used for error checking or diagnostics!
I.M. BUS CONTROL REGISTER. (3000W page 9 XIM_CTRL) Bit 1 of this register determines whether the transfer is read or write. Bit 0 of this register determines if 1 or 2 data bytes will be transferred.
I.M. BUS START TRANSFER REGISTER. (2C00W page 11 XSTRT_IM) Writing any value to this register will start the I.M. bus hardware.
I.M. BUS STATUS REGISTER. (1800R page 6 XSW_LO) Bit 7 of this register contains the +IM_BUSY line. This line will be high during the I.M. transfer.
I.M. CIRCUIT OPERATION The logic on page 11 controls the I.M. Bus transfers. The I.M. clock (IM_P_CK) and the 8032 input oscillator elk (OSC_2) are both derived from the 24MHz oscillator. The 8032 does not specify any timing with respect to the input oscillator and the timing that is specified is very loose with respect to a 12MHz input clock. For this reason, it must be assumed that the Start Transfer Pulse from the 8032 and the IM_P_CK are asynchronous. The first 3 flip flops at the lower left of Figure are used to re-synchronize these signals and to start the I.M. transfer.
After the transfer is started, the 74F269 counter on page 11 will start to count up from zero. The EN_IMCK line will allow the IM_P_CK to gate out to the I.M. bus clock pin 14. The first 8 clocks will clock out the address and the I.M._IDENTIFY line will assert during this time. When the counter reaches a count of 8, the I.M.JDENTIFY line will negate.
If an I.M. Write is in progress, then the I.M._DATA line will continue to be an output for the rest of the transfer. If an I.M. Read is in progress, the I.M._DATA line will switch from an output to an input after the 8th count. The transfer will abort after count 16 or count 24 depending on the state of the I1BYTE (3C00W.0) bit.
After all of the clocks have completed, the I.M.JDENTIFY line will briefly pulse low one more time to indicate that the transfer is complete. During this entire time, the IM_BUSY bit will be asserted and available to the 8032 as status. The IM_P_CLK is created by dividing the 24MHz oscillator by 32. This yields a clock edge at about every 1.3 uS. A full 24 clock transfer takes about 32 uS. WATCHDOG TIMER The Watchdog Timer is on page 13 of the Gate Array Schematic, Appendix A. This timer can be turned on and off with the bit EN_WDOG (3000W.7). The Watchdog is reset in normal operation by writing to address 6400W. The data written to this address is "don't care".
The Watchdog timer is 16 bits long and it is clocked by the OSC 256 clock. This timer was made out of synchronous counter blocks (I_SCBR) provided by the Gate Array vendor. The Watchdog starts at Zero and counts up. If it is allowed to overflow, then the reset line to the 8032 will assert. The Power on Reset line to the Gate Array will also assert. The 8032 reset line will assert about 256 clocks before the Gate Array POR internal reset asserts. The 8032 requires that a fixed number of clocks be provided while the reset line is asserted in order to properly reset. The internal Gate Array POR line completely resets the Watchdog circuit, so it is necessary to delay these events for proper 8032 reset timing. NOTE: The Gate Array internal POR line completely resets the chip to a known state except for the OSC divider clocks on page 9 and the IM Read data registers on page 12.
CRC 32 POLYNOMIAL CIRCUIT
The CRC-32 circuit is on pages 15-18 of the Gate Array Schematic. This circuit can be used to Check or Generate the CRC-32 Polynomial. This polynomial is four bytes long and is used to verify data integrity. The circuit has two modes of operation, CRC-32 on and CRC-32 off. The bit X_EN_XOR (6000W.4) determines the mode. When this bit is logic "0", the CRC-32 logic is enabled and any data written to the CRC registers will be multiplied by the CRC-32 polynomial. When this bit is logic "1", the CRC-32 polynomial is disabled and the data shifts into the CRC-32 registers unaltered.
The circuit consists of four 8 bit Read Data Registers, one Write Data
Register, the above mentioned control bit and control logic. Here is a summary of the registers.
CRC-32 READ REGISTER 3 (7000R)
CRC-32 READ REGISTER 2 (7400R)
CRC-32 READ REGISTER 1 (7800R)
CRC-32 READ REGISTER 0 (7C00R) CRC-32 WRITE DATA REGISTER (6800W)
X_EN_XOR Control bit (6000W.4)
CRC 32 CIRCUIT OPERATION
Data is entered into the CRC circuit one byte at a time. This is done by writing the byte to the CRC-32 Write Data Register (6800W). After the 8032 completes the write, a hardware state machine will take the byte and shift it into the
CRC circuit. (This shift takes about 1.5uS if the OSC is at 24MHz.) When all of the bytes have been shifted in, the resultant can be read out of the four CRC-32 Read
Registers. The CRC circuit can be turned off in order to initialize the four registers to a known value. The CRC-32 Write Data Register is on page 18. This is a parallel in, serial out shift register. The end of the 8032 -WR strobe will start the shift logic in page
15. This logic will synchronize the shift start to the OSC_2 clock. A 3 bit counter will count out exactly 8 clocks, then shut the circuit off.
The X_EN_XOR bit can be used to initialize the CRC-32 circuit to a known value. Some CRC schemes start with all 32 bits set zero, others start with all bits set to one. When X_EN_XOR is set to logic "1", the CRC-32 circuit Exclusive-OR gates are all disabled. This allows the data written to the CRC-32 Write Data
Register to enter the CRC-32 flip flop chain unaltered. This feature also allows for breaks in the CRC calculation. When a break occurs, the software could read and store the data in the four CRC-32 READ REGISTERS. At a later time, this data can then be reloaded back into these registers.
The CRC-32 polynomial is: xΛ32+x"26* xΛ23+xΛ22+xA16-τ-xA12-τ-xAll -τ-xA10+xΛ8+x' 7+χ- 5-l-x"4+xA2 + x+1. GATE ARRAY PINOUTS
Table V shows the pinouts for the gate array
PIN PIN NAME PIN TYPE SPECIAL NOTES
NO.
1 GND1 POWER
2 VDD1 POWER
3 PRAM_A15 OUTPUT_2 drives psram address line
4 PRAM_A16 OUTPUT_2 drives psram address line •
5 PXRFSH18 OUTPUT_2 drives psram rfsh in 128K mode, A18 in 512K mode.
6 PTESTOUT OUTPUT_2 TEST OUTPUT
7 PBAND1 OUTPUT_l output digital control bit.
8 PBAND0 OUTPUT_l output digital control bit.
9 PIRR DTA INPUTJ IR input
10 PIRR_CLK INPUTJ IR input
11 PIRR_RDY INPUTJ IR input
12 P_XRESET INPUTJ SYSTEM POWER ON RESET
13 P_IM_DTA I/OJ IM bus data line, open drain
14 PIM_CLK OUTPUT IM bus elk line, output only
15 PIMJDEN OUTPUT_4 IM bus identify line
16 PXRAMWE1 OUTPUT_3 PSRAM #1 R/W line
17 PXRAMWE0 OUTPUT_3 PSRAM m R/W line
18 PRAM_A13 OUTPUT 2 drives psram address line
19 PRAM_A8 OUTPUT_2 drives psram address line
20 PRAM A6 OUTPUT_2 drives psram address line
21 PRAM_A9 OUTPUT_2 drives psram address line
22 GND2 POWER
23 VDD2 POWER
24 PRAM_A5 OUTPUT 2 drives psram address line
25 PRAM_A11 OUTPUT_2 drives psram address line
26 PRAM A4 OUTPUT 2 drives psram address line 27 PRAM UO OUTPUT 2 drives psram address line
28 PXRAMOEO OUTPUTJ PSRAM #0 output enable line
29 PXRAMOEl OUTPUTJ PSRAM #1 output enable line
30 PXCE1 OUTPUTJ PSRAM chip select
31 P6805CLK OUTPUT_4 Security Micro Clock
32 POSC_2 OUTPUTJ 8032 microprocessor clock
33 P_XWR INPUTJ 8032 write strobe
34 P_XRD INPUTJ 8032 read strobe
35 PXISBINT OUTPUTJ ISB interrupt line to 8032
36 PUPRESET OUTPUTJ active high reset to 8032 .
37 PDRAM_EN INPUTJ RAM enable bit
38 PXENBASE INPUTJ Base Register enable bit
39 P_AD0 I/OJ 8032 data bus
40 P_AD1 I/OJ 8032 data bus
41 P_AD2 I/OJ 8032 data bus
42 P_AD3 I/OJ 8032 data bus
43 GND3 POWER
44 VDD3 POWER
45 P_AD4 I/OJ 8032 data bus
46 P_AD5 I/OJ 8032 data bus
47 P_AD6 I/OJ 8032 data bus
48 P_AD7 I/OJ 8032 data bus
49 P_ALE INPUTJ 8032 address latch enable
50 P_XPSEN INPUTJ 8032 program store enable
51 P_A15 INPUTJ 8032 upper address bus bit
52 P_A14 INPUTJ 8032 upper address bus bit
53 P_A13 INPUTJ 8032 upper address bus bit
54 P_A12 INPUTJ 8032 upper address bus bit
55 P_A11 INPUTJ 8032 upper address bus bit
56 P_A10 INPUTJ 8032 upper address bus bit
57 P_A9 INPUTJ 8032 upper address bus bit
58 P_A8 INPUTJ 8032 upper address bus bit
59 PIR XCLK OUTPUT 4 2 or 4 MHz elk for IR transmitter 60 P_A0 OUTPUT_3 demultiplexed 8032 lower address bus bit 61 P_A1 OUTPUTJ demultiplexed 8032 lower address bus bit 62 P_A2 OUTPUTJ demultiplexed 8032 lower address bus bit 63 P_A3 OUTPUTJ demultiplexed 8032 lower address bus bit 64 GND4 POWER 65 VDD4 POWER 66 PXTAL1 OSC INPUT 67 PXTAL2 OSC OUT external crystal oscillator pin 68 P_A4 OUTPUTJ demultiplexed 8032 lower address bus bit 69 P_A5 OUTPUTJ demultiplexed 8032 lower -address bus bit 70 P_A6 OUTPUTJ demultiplexed 8032 lower address bus bit 71 P_A7 OUTPUTJ demultiplexed 8032 lower address bus bit 72 PISB_CLK I/OJ ISB elk line 73 PISB_DTA I/OJ ISB data line 74 PBAND2 OUTPUTJ output digital control bit. 75 PI378_IN INPUTJ divide by 2275 elk input for MCI 378 76 P1378OUT OUTPUT 4 divide by 2275 output for MCI 378 77 PPWM OUT OUTPUTJ Pulse Width Modulator output 78 PRF_SEL2 OUTPUT _ output digital control bit. 79 PRF_SEL1 OUTPUTJ output digital control bit. 80 PRF_SEL0 OUTPUTJ output digital control bit. 81 PRAM_A7 OUTPUTJ drives psram address line 82 PRAM_A12 OUTPUTJ drives psram address line 83 PCE2_A17 OUTPUTJ PSRAM CE2 in 128K mode, A17 in 512K mode
84 P PRRAAMM AA1144 OOUUTTPPUUTT 22 drives psram address line
OUTPUTJ = 4mA, NORMAL SPEED, (OUTPUT PORT CONTROL BITS)
OUTPUTJ = 2mA„ SLOW (lOnS) RISE AND FALL TIMES. (PSRAM
ADDRESS OUTPUTS)
OUTPUTJ = 2mA NORMAL SPEED OUTPUT.
OUTPUTJ = 4mA NORMAL SPEED OUTPUT. (Used for CLOCKS).
Note: Outputs 1 and 2 grouped differently so output bit current can easily be changed between groups. INPUTJ = TTL INPUT LEVELS WITH SCHMITT TRIGGER . INPUTJ = TTL INPUT LEVELS.
I/OJ = 2mA OUTPUT DRIVER (with active high enable) , OPEN DRAIN OR TRISTATABLE. INPUT IS TTL LEVEL I/OJ = 2mA OUTPUT DRIVER (with active high enable). INPUT IS TTL LEVEL [data bus]
Table V TPU 2740 ONSCREEN CONTROLLER 124
The TPU 2740 124 functions as an On Screen Display (OSD) controller and also as a Closed Caption Data (CCD) VBI Data Slicer. This device has two functionally separate sections, the OSD and the CCD VBI data slicer. The TPU 2740 contains a RISC based processor called the Fast Processor (FP) that is used to collect the VBI data, communicate with the serial bus, and control the OSD. Some of the internal TPU2740 circuits are running at four times the input clock frequency (This is 72MHz on the TVRO board with an 18MHz input clock). Communications between the 8032 and the TPU2740 are via the 3 wire IM Serial Bus 108.
The TPU 2740 is a fully digital chip, Baseband Video data must first be digitized before the TPU can use it. A 6 bit Analog to Digital converter (uPC660) does this digitizing. The uPC660 is shown on page 1 of the TVRO schematics in Appendix A.
The input video signal is about 1 Volt P-P and this signal must be "clamped" to a known DC level before it can be digitized. The "VIDEO CLAMP AND FILTER" on page 1 does this using a "Back Porch Clamp" method. This clamp will bias the video signal into the A/D converter so that the "Back Porch" area will be at about 3.69 Volts DC. (The "Back Porch" is the area where the color burst sits.)
The resistor network on page 1 comprised of R15, R16, R17 and R18 sets the voltage levels for the clamp and the A/D circuits. The A/D upper reference (pinll) is set to about 4.52 Volts and the lower reference (pin 13) is set to about 3.35 Volts. If the input video signal back porch area is biased to 3.69 Volts DC (at pin 12), then the maximum peak to peak swing of the video signal should always be between the voltages at the reference pins. The TPU only uses the incoming video signal to strip off VBI Closed Caption Data. There is no need for the entire 4MHz video bandwidth so R7 and C6 form a low pass filter that rolls off the TPU video at about 1 MHz. (Note: The ratios of the clamp voltages are the same as the expected video signal IRE values.)
Circuitry in the TPU detects vertical and horizontal sync from the digitized video. The OSD and VBI data slicers use these signals for timing functions. A programmable comparator is used to detect vertical and horizontal sync pulses. It is important that the video clamp function correctly in order for this comparator to accurately detect sync. The FP reads the output of the sync detection circuitry and is . able to count horizontal lines, thus is able to read VBI data from a particular VBI line and start the graphic on screen display at the correct video scan line. When a VBI signal that contains the proper lead in and framing data is detected, the VBI circuitry on the TPU will load the VBI data into internal registers that the FP may read. The FP reads this data and inserts it into a buffer. At a later time the VBI data may be read by the 8032 via the IM Bus.
The TPU requires good digitized video and a stable horizontal timing reference on pin 27. The horizontal rate signal is + Burst Gate from the MCI 378 and is fed into the TPU at pin 27. If either of these signals is missing or poor, then the TPU will not be able to create a stable overlay.
The OSD portion of the TPU consists of cache memory, character memory, timing functions, and an external 256K by 4 bit DRAM (U9). The FP reads high level graphic commands from the IM Bus and stores the graphic information in the external DRAM memory. In conjunction with the cache memory, timing circuitry, and the character generation hardware, the TPU FP outputs the graphic data on the R, G, B, and FBLOUT lines. 8 colors may be generated using the R, G, and B outputs. The FBLOUT (Fast BLanking OUT) signal determines if the video output should contain the R, G, B data from the TPU, or if the incoming live video should be passed through.
The TPU has a 256K x 4 DRAM (U9) for storing overlay screens and data. This is a fast page mode DRAM and refresh logic is avoided by constantly reading out the screen data, even when there is no overlay on the screen. R,G,B COLOR CONVERTER.
The StarSight Telecast graphic display requires 8 colors, black, white, gray, yellow, light yellow, light green, and red. These colors are not the standard 8 NTSC saturated colors that the TPU puts out. A "Color Converter Circuit" is required to translate the TPU saturated digital colors into the StarSight graphic display "pleasing" colors. This circuit is on page 2 of the PCB schematic. The Color Converter if made from three "8 into 1 analog switches". There is one switch for each of the R,G,B outputs. There is a precision voltage divider that creates the desired R,G,B voltages. The analog switches route the proper voltage to their outputs based on the 3 bit digital R,G,B signal from the TPU. The TPU R,G,B outputs are programmed to be open drain so that a full TTL level swing is available to the multiplexing analog switches. R14 and C18 on page 2 form an inexpensive R-C delay for the Fast Blanking Signal to compensate for delays in the R,G,B channel.
OVERLAY GENERATOR AND VIDEO SYNCHRONIZER.
The Motorola MCI 378 is used as a main building block for the Video Synchronizer. The MC1378 operates in REMOTE MODE (pin 1 is set HIGH). In this mode, external video is required to create the synchronizing timing signals. See page 3 of the TVRO Schematic of Appendix A for a block diagram of the 1378.
A 1 volt peak to peak NTSC video signal must be fed into pin 24 to provide timing information for both the 1378 and the TPU.
The signal at pin 24 is the called the "Remote Video Signal". This signal is internally clamped in the 1378 and then Composite sync is separated out. Composite Sync is used to separate out Vertical Sync and also to lock the 4.03 MHz Horizontal Phase Locked Loop. Both Composite Sync (pin 39) and Vertical Sync (pin 38) are externally available for debug and timing.
The separated composite sync is used to lock the 4.03 MHz PLL (using PD1). The VCO in this PLL is formed around a 4.03MHz ceramic resonator. The free running frequency of this ceramic resonator must be adjusted with C39. The best way to adjust this VCO is to use a frequency counter and adjust C39 until the frequency at Ul-5 is 15,750 Hz. This adjustment is made with the Video In signal disconnected so that the VCO is free running.
The 4.03 MHz VCO output is divided by 256 to obtain horizontal frequency, and then further decoded to create "BURST GATE". Burst Gate (MC1378 pin 5) is about 4uS wide and is centered around the 3.58MHz color burst. This signal is the main timing reference for the overlay display. It is used extensively by both the 1378 and TPU 2740. The TPU uses Burst Gate to decide when to start the overlay. There is a programmable counter in the TPU that sets the delay from Burst Gate to the overlay start. (The overlay starts when + FBLOUT goes low.) Any jitter on Burst Gate will cause an annoying side to side motion on the overlay.
The color burst from the remote video is used to lock the 4X color sub carrier oscillator using PD3 which is gated by burst gate.
Phase of the locally generated composite video from the encoder section is compared against the same sub carrier reference used to lock PD3. This is done by means of PD4 so that the sub carrier phases of both the local and the remote signals are made essentially equal. Phase detector operation summary:
1. PD1 - compares and locks the internally counted down 4.03 MHz VCO to the incoming remote horizontal sync. It is fast acting to follow VCR source fluctuation. Its PLL filter network consists of C24, C38, and R19.
2. PD2 - is not used in this design. 3. PD3 - a gated phase detector, which locks the crystal oscillator frequency divided by four to the incoming remote signal burst.
4. PD4 - controls the internal phase shifter to assure that the outgoing local color burst has the same phase as the incoming remote burst at PD3.
5. PD5 - not used in this mode of operation Video paths inside the MCI 378
The remote video is AC coupled and fed in through pin 24 and clamped to proper DC level (blanking is at 0 V). The clamped video is fed to the Fast Video Switch where switching between the local and the remote video occurs controlled by Overlay Enable at pin 25. The second path leads to the PD3 where the remote video burst is compared against crystal oscillator frequency divided by four. The third path leads to Identity Detector which determines whether incoming signal is PAL or NTSC.
The local video is generated from R, G, and B signals which are direct coupled, 1 volt peak to peak inputs at pins 14, 15, and 16. After that follows the Color Difference and Luma Matrix which produces B-Y, R-Y, and the luminance -Y signals. The B-Y and R-Y signals are clamped and sent to their respective modulators. Modulated B-Y and R-Y signals are summed together thus making 3.58 MHz NTSC chroma signal which is fed out pin 18. This chroma signal is filtered by a 3.58 MHz band-pass filter consisting of C33, C34, C35, R22, R13, and Tl. The filtered chroma signal is fed back in at pin 20. At this point the chroma signal is added to the luminance signal which passes through a 400 nS delay line. The need for this delay line arises because of the longer path for the chroma signal through the modulators and the band-pass filter. The delay line should have at least 4 MHz bandwidth, and good linearity through its entire bandwidth as well as linear group delay. The chroma and luma signals combined make the composite NTSC video signal which is then clamped by the local video clamp and fed to the fast video switch to be mixed with the remote video at the output pin 27. To keep the local video amplitude correct in respect to the remote video amplitude the two burst amplitudes are compared in the ACC detector and made equal using a variable gain ACC amplifier in the locally generated chroma path. The absolute burst amplitude of the remote signal is detected by the kill detector, the chroma of the locally generated signal being mrned off when the remote burst falls below a predetermined level. The kill level can be adjusted by changing the value of the resistor R3 at pin 31. 470K kills at about 10-20 mVp-p remote burst. Normal burst is 286 mVp-p. POWER SUPPLY
The system requires 5 VDC digital, 5VDC analog, and possibly 12 VDC analog (for certain RF Modulators). The current requirements are: 5 VDC Digital 550mA
5 VDC Analog 150mA
12 VDC Analog 80mA It is very important that the microprocessor -PWRBAD line is set to zero at least lOmS before the 5 VDC Digital supply drops below 4.75 volts. This allows the microprocessor to complete any pending database transactions and do an orderly shutdown of the DRAM. This is accomplished by monitoring the unregulated power with the Seiko S80731AN power supervisor IC (U2). After the unregulated supply drops below about 8 volts, the S80731AN will assert -PWRBAD. This causes an interrupt in the microprocessor which will initiate power down subroutines. U3 monitors the 5VDC supply and controls the -RESET line into the DBE 1200. This generates a clean reset signal during power up and power down. I.R.
TRANSMITTER 116.
The I.R. Transmitter 116 function is done with a MC68HC05C9 microprocessor. This microprocessor is programmed to interface with the software serial bus 110 for communication with the 8032.. This microprocessor can generate pulses on its output pin that simulate IR signals for most VCR's. The ROM in the
MC68HC05C9 contains the executable program and the codes and sequences to control a VCR via Infrared.. Port B on the MC68HC05C9 is used to set the serial address that it will respond to. The clock signal is generated by a programmable clock divider in the DBE 1200 gate array.
Figure 6 illustrates how packets 300, messages 302 and commands 304 are related. Figure 7 provides further details of packets 300. Unless otherwise noted, all fields are binary 2's complement numbers. All undefined bits within fields are reserved, and initialized to zero. All multi-byte variables are stored most significant byte first (big endian format), unless otherwise noted. Notable exceptions are the
CRC 16 and CRC32 fields, which are stored in reverse order, least significant byte first (little endian format).
All viewable text strings are comprised exclusively of printable characters, where printable is defined as any character with ASCII values in the range of 32 (20H) to 122 (07 AH), inclusive. Both upper and lower case letters are supported. All fixed fields which contain ASCII strings that do not fill the field are to padded with
NULL (ASCII value 0) characters. Unless otherwise specified, strings which do fill the field are not NULL terminated.
Packets 300 Packets 300 consist of error detection information and information to be operated on by a subscriber unit. The packet fields shown in Figure 7 have the following descriptions, as shown in Table VI:
Field Description sync Code number indicating the start of a Packet. Used to locate the start of a Packet when transmission errors occur. Value is always 2C(hex). size Is the total size of the packet, in bytes. This includes the
'sync', 'size' 'packet time stamp, 'CRC1 ', 'Message', and
'CRC32' fields. There is no official maximum size for packets. All units which listen to packet streams should be prepared to ignore any packet that exeeeds the maximum packet size the unit can handle. First generation Subscriber
Units ignore any packet that is greater than 2048 Bytes in length, total. packet time stamp Is the four byte time stamp of the minute the packet was transmitted. This field is used by subscriber units to differentiate data streams on recorded mediums (such as VCR tapes) from live data streams. The time is encoded as minutes since January 1, 1992, rounded to the nearest minute boundary. Since packet headers are not guaranteed to be transmitted on minute boundaries, the maximum error of this field is up to +/- 30 seconds. vbi Stream ID Is a two byte number identifying the unique ID of the VBI stream the command has been transmitted on. This field may be used by subscriber units to identify their assigned "home" data stream, where their key distribution message will be broadcast.
CRC1 Least significant word (16 bits) of the 32 bit cyclic redundancy code (CRC-32) value for the Packet header . The
CRC is computed over the 'sync' and 'size' fields. This field is stored least significant byte first (little endian format).
Message Information bearing portion of a Packet. Contains one or more Commands. Command An entity that contains information pertaining to a specific portion of the database, or time markers, or user authorization information. Each type of Command contains a unique code number and a length field. CRC32 32 bit cyclic redundancy check (CRC-32) value. The CRC is computed over the 'sync', 'size', 'CRC1', and 'Message' fields. The CRC32 generator polynomial is χ32 + χ26 + χ23 + χ22 + χ16 + χ12 + χll + χ10 + χ8 + χ7 + χ5 + χ4 + χ2 + χl
+ 1. This field is stored least significant byte first (little endian format).
Table VI Messages 302
Messages 302 are the information bearing portion of a Packet 300. As shown in Figure 8, they consist of one or more Commands 304. Messages contain an integral number of Commands and Commands are not split between Messages. The 'size' field in the packet header is used to determine when all Commands have been processed. The optimal size of the Message field is 250 bytes or less. Commands that are larger than 250 bytes should be contained singly in a packet. The bytes following the last byte in the last command is always the first byte of the CRC32 field. Commands 304
Commands 304 are the elements of the StarSight Data Transmission Network required to build a TV schedule database, maintain the current time of day, and handle user authorization and security issues. The different Commands are distinguished by a unique value known as the
'Cmd type'. It is contained in the least significant 6 bits of the Command's first byte. A total of 64 unique command types are possible. The second field is 'Cmd length', used to determine the byte size of the Command. The size includes the 'Cmd type' and 'Cmd length' fields. The 'Cmd length' field may be a one or two byte quantity. Table II lists all commands and specifies the size of the 'Cmd length' fields. Also included in this table is the encryption offset for the command. This concept is discussed in the section that follows this table. COMMAND NAME COMMAND SIZE HELD ENCRYPTION
CODE SIZE OFFSET
Time Command 1 1 2
Daylight Saving Time Change Command 2 1 2 Region Command 3 2 10 (OAH)
Channel Data Command 4 1 5
Show list Command 5 2 11 (0BH)
Show Title Command 6 1 5
Reserved 7 1 2 Show Description Command 8 1 5
Reserved 9 1 2
Reserved 10 (OAH) 1 2
Theme Category Command 11 (0BH) 2 5
Theme Sub-Category Command 12 (0CH) 2 5 Subscriber Unit Reset Command 13 (ODH) 1 8
Authorization Command 14 (OEH) 1 2
Reserved 15 (OFH) 1 2
Reserved 16 (10H) 1 2
Key Distribution Command 17 (11H) 1 2 Reserved 18 (12H) 1 2
Reserved 19 (13H) 1 2
Sequence Number Command 20 (14H) 1 2
Station Node Status Command 21 (15H) 2 3
Long Assign IR Codes Command 22 (16H) 2 18 (22H) Reserved 23 (17H) 2 3
Subscriber Unit Command 24 (18H) 2 9
Reserved 25 (19H) 1 2
Reserved 26 (1AH) 1 2
Reserved 27 (1BH) 1 2 Reserved 28 (1CH) 1 2
Reserved 29 (1DH) 2 3
All Future Command Definitions 30-63(lEH-3FH) 2 3 Table VII Subscriber units that do not recognize a command type (as will happen in the future when new commands are implemented) must compute the Command length and skip over/ignore the command.
The most significant bit of the Command's first byte is a flag that signals whether the command is encrypted or not. When set, the command is encrypted, . when clear, not encrypted. It is probable that the only commands which are passed to the Subscriber Unit in an encrypted format are Show list, Authorization, and Key Distribution Commands. The Subscriber Unit should however be prepared to decrypt any command.
The starting offset of the encrypted portion of the command is also listed in the previous table. Most commands leave a portion of their contents in the clear so that network entities which process the packet stream may filter out unneeded commands without decrypting the guts of the command. (Note that the encryption offset for fumre commands may be changed when me commands are actually implemented.)
The second most significant bit of the command's first byte indicates which of two program keys are to be used when decrypting the command. When the bit is clear, decryption program key 0 is used, when set, key 1 is to be used.
Since it is necessary to add an initialization vector and pad characters, the process of encrypting a command increases the amount of memory necessary for storing the command. The initialization vector is an 8 byte field that is always prepended to the start of the encrypted byte stream. The padding is appended to the byte stream before it is encrypted. The purpose of the padding is to help the Security Module determine if the encrypted data has been "tampered" with. Enough pad characters are added to make the length of the raw data stream a multiple of eight. If the length begins as a multiple of eight, 8 pad characters are added. The value of the pad characters are the number of fill bytes that have been added; i.e., if 3 extra bytes are added to the command then each fill byte will have the value 3. The encrypted data within the Command is stored as shown in Figure 9. Fumre revisions of this command set may append field definitions onto existing commands. Command processors should be prepared to ignore all data that follows the last recognized field.
Some commands are addressed to particular units or groups of units. Units are addressed using a logical address that is comprised of two parts; the four byte batch number and the one byte unit number. The batch number is used as the group address, directing the command to a group of units that share the same batch number. A batch number of zero has a reserved meaning ; it addresses all units. All other possible batch numbers are valid addresses, (i.e. a command transmitted with batch number = 0 is intended as a system wide broadcast, while a command with batch address 23456 is directed towards units in batch group 23456 only. Units in other batch groups should ignore the latter command).
The unit number is used to identify a particular unit within the batch group. Up to 255 units may be contained within a batch group. The unit number of zero has the reserved meaning of addressing all unit's within a batch group, (i.e. a logical address with batch number =23456, unit number =0 is directed to all units within the batch group 23456).
Commands required to build the subscriber unit database are typically sent repetitively, in the order shown in Table VIII: Theme Categories Always acquired (if not already acquired). Theme Subcategories Always acquired (if not already acquired). Regions Region's list of channels is acquired if the unit has been authorized. Channel Data Channel data is acquired if the channel is in the region's list of channels.
Show lists Show list is acquired if it is applicable to an active channel in the region's list of channels. Show lists give the schedule data for a single channel for a single day. The current day's data is sent more often than succeeding day's data. Show Titles Show title is acquired if it is referenced in some acquired
Show list and the subscriber unit does not already have it. Show Descriptions Show description is acquired if it is referenced in some acquired Show list and the subscriber unit does not already have it. Key Distributions Key distribution commands are always processed, if the batch address of the command matches the unit's assigned batch address.
Table VIII Other messages are interspersed in this cyclic stream on a random basis as required. Note that transmission errors can cause missing messages and commands can therefore be received out of order. Note especially that there can be gaps in the Show lists. Subscriber units must be able to handle missing and out of order messages.
The following sections describe each command. Commands are shown in their non-encrypted form, but the reader must be aware that the above mentioned modifications due to encryption may be made to any command. Time Command
Time Commands (Figure 10) specify the current time of day and date. They are sent periodically, at a predetermined rate. Subscriber Units 52 (Figures 1-4) should reset their current time of day and date to agree with the value received in this message. The fields of time commands shown in Figure 10 are as described in Table EX: Field Description
Cmd type Command type = 1. Identifies command as a Time
Command, enc fig Flag indicating if the current command has been encrypted. Command type and command length fields are never encrypted. 0= not encrypted, 1 = encrypted, key ID Decryption key ID. Identifies which of two current
"program" decryption keys should be used to decrypt this command. Cmd length Number of bytes in the command (including the type and length fields). Time Current time of day and date encoded as number of minutes from midnight, January 1, 1992. Time of day and date is Greenwich Mean Time. DS fig Daylight Saving flag. Flag indicating if Daylight Saving is in effect. Sent whether or not default time zone uses Daylight
Saving time. 0 = Daylight Saving not in effect, 1 = Daylight Saving in effect, sign fig Sign bit for the default time zone offset field, which follows.
If set, it indicates the time zone offset is negative, and should be subtracted from Greenwich mean time. (For data provider stations West of the Greenwich Meridian, i.e. the entire U.S. and Canada). Note that this implies the time zone offset field is not a two's complement binary number, default time offset Four bit field indicating the number of hours offset from Greenwich Mean Time to the time zone of the data provider station transmitting the StarSight data. Intended to be used when displaying local time before the Subscriber Unit has been authorized (which sets the real time zone). The legal range for this field is from 0 to 12 binary. time (sees) Is the low order seconds part of the time field, stored previously in the command. The resolution of this field is seconds past the minute. The legal range is 0 to 59 inclusive. Table IX Daylight Saving Time Change Command The Daylight Saving Time Change Command defines when the next Daylight
Saving time changes will occur so that displays of schedule data for time periods that contain these changes can show the correct adjusted local time. Subscriber units must add their Time Zone offset (obtained from the Authorization Command) to calculate the GMT time for the change corresponding to their local change time. Show list entries after this calculated GMT time should be shown with a time offset affected by the upcoming Daylight Savings state. The fields in the Daylight Saving Time Change Command as shown in Figure 11 are defined in Table X. Field Description Cmd type Command type = 2. Identifies command as a Daylight
Saving Time Change Command. enc fig Flag indicating if the current command has been encrypted.
Command type and command length fields are never encrypted. 0=not encrypted, 1 = encrypted. key ID Decryption key ID. Identifies which of two current
"program" decryption keys should be used to decrypt this command. Cmd length Number of bytes in the command (including the type and length fields).
Enable Daylight Time of day and date when the Daylight Saving time would Saving be enabled at the Greenwich Meridian. Encoded as number of minutes from midnight, January 1 , 1992. Time of day and date is Greenwich Mean Time. The enable time is always less than the disable time.
Disable Daylight Time of day and date when the Daylight Saving time would Saving be disabled at me Greenwich Meridian. Encoded as number of minutes from midnight, January 1, 1992. Time of day and date is Greenwich Mean Time. The disable time is always greater than the enable time. Table X Region Command The Region Command identifies all channels for which StarSight Data is available and could possibly be received by a Subscriber Unit in the given region. One Region Command is sent for each region in the area serviced by a data provider station. For example, the channel lineup for each cable system constitutes a region. The Authorization Command sends the region ID. Once the region ID is known, the Channel Data for each channel in the region can be acquired from the Channel Data Commands.
The channel IDs in this command are not needed by the subscriber unit after it has acquired the Channel Data for each channel in the user's region. However, the region ID and version must be held in case the Channel Data is lost (e.g., power outage) or has changed and must be re-acquired.
Channel ID entries are listed in the default order that Subscriber Units should display them in until the user has changed the sequencing using a setup screen. Channel ordering is more or less numerical, and Channels such as HBO and DISNEY are all given a native channel number equal to 1 and probably ordered alphabetically by the 'name-affiliation' field.
Only Base channels are sent in a Region Command (see Duplicate Channels Command). The fields in the Region Command as shown in Figure 12 are defined in Table XI
Field Description
Cmd type Command type = 3. Identifies command as a Region
Command, enc fig Flag indicating if me current command has been encrypted. Command type and command length fields are never encrypted. 0= not encrypted, 1 = encrypted, key ID Decryption key ID. Identifies which of two current
"program" decryption keys should be used to decrypt this command. Cmd length Number of bytes in the command (including the type and length fields). Region ID Unique region ID number that must match one of the region
IDs received in the Authorization Command. Identifies the region for which the following list of channel IDs is appropriate. This field is never to have a zero value. region type Indicates if region is a broadcast, cable, or satellite system.
(0=broadcast, 1 = standard cable, 2=IRC cable, 3=HRC cable, and 5=satellite. All other values are undefined.), prime offset Offset, in units of 1/2 hours from 6:00PM, to prime time for the region. E.g.; prime offset = 1 means prime time starts at
6:30 PM, = 2 means prime time starts at 7:00 PM, etc. date type flag Is a flag indicating how the date field in this command should be interpreted. If this flag is set, the date represents when the information in this command expires. If the flag is clear, the date represents the time the information in this command becomes valid. date Specifies the time when the information in this command either expires or becomes active. See the explanation of the date type flag. The date is encoded as number of minutes from midnight January 1, 1992, Greenwich mean time. nbr Chan IDs Number of channel IDs in the region. This number must be greater than 0.
Channel ID Channel ID number used to identify the Channel Data
Commands required to assemble channel data for all channels in the subscriber's system. This field is never passed with a zero value. tune channel nbr Channel number used to tune a TV/VCR to this channel.
Maximum tunable channel is channel 511.
Note: tune channel number is sent in this command to avoid having to send a Channel ID entry for each cable system that places the channel on a different tuning channel number.
E.g.; HBO might be on channel 10 on one cable system and on channel 25 on another. Putting the tuning channel number here means only one HBO entry needs to be sent in the
Channel Data Commands. source This field has no meaning if region type is broadcast. If region type is satellite, this field indicates the band, (00=C
Band, 01 =KU Band, and 02 & 03 are undefined). If region type is any of the cable types, this field indicates what source this channel is on (00 - no source specified, 01 = source A,
02 = source B, 03 = source C). channel type 3 bit field which indicates the type of channel (00 = no special attributes, 01 = extended basic, 02 = premium, 03 = pay per view, 04=video on demand, all other values are reserved.). satellite alpha ID 5 bit field representing the alphabetic portion of the alphanumeric satellite identifier (i.e. the 'S' of satellite S4). This field is present (in all Channel ID entries) only if the 'region type' field = = Satellite Field value 1 represents the letter 'A', 2 is 'B', etc.. The legal range for this field is 1-26 inclusive, representing the alphabetic characters 'A' through 'Z'. satellite numeric ID 5 bit field representing the numeric portion of the alphanumeric satellite identifier (i.e. the '4' of satellite S4). This field is present (in all Channel ID entries) only if the
'region type' field = = Satellite. The field is broken up over two consecutive bytes. The legal range for this field is 1-31 inclusive, transponder no 6 bit field representing the transponder number to be used to tune to this channel on a Satellite system. This field is present (in all Channel ID entries) only if the 'region type' field = = Satellite. This field is never passed with a zero value. It's legal range is 1-63 inclusive. Table XI Channel Data Command
The Channel Data Command gives channel information used for various displays. Channel Data Commands are sent for each channel in all the regions serviced by a data provider station (PBS station node). The subscriber unit compiles information on all the channels in its region using the Channel Data Commands that contain a Channel ID entry matching one in its region list.
Only Base channels are sent in Channel Data Commands (see Duplicate Channels Command). The fields of the Channel Data Command as shown in Figure 13 are defined in Table XII. Field Description Cmd type Command type = 4. Identifies command as a Channel Data
Command. enc fig Flag indicating if the current command has been encrypted.
Command type and command length fields are never encrypted. 0=not encrypted, 1 = encrypted. key ID Decryption key ID. Identifies which of two current
"program" decryption keys should be used to decrypt this command.
Cmd length Number of bytes in the command (including the type and length fields). nbr entries Number of Channel ID entries in the current command (not the total number in the system). This field must always have the value of 1 (i.e. only ONE channel entry can be included in each command.) nat chan msb Most significant bit for the 'native channel nbr' field. Channel ID Channel ID number used to identify the Channel ID entries that match those in the subscriber's region. name fig Flag indicating if the channel's name should be displayed as a number or as a three character text string. (0= number,
1 =text). This flag must be set if the native channel number is specified as zero. native channel nbr The channel number associated with the channel if it were in a broadcast region. This is the number used to identify the channel when the 'name fig' is 0. Normally this number matches the tune channel number; however, on cable systems channels get moved around. E.g. channel 5 could be on cable channel 29. In this situation, the tone channel number will be
29 while the native channel number will be 5. If the native channel number is zero, the name_flg field in this command must be set. name abbreviation A bit field indicating which characters from the name bits affiliation string should be used as the stations "call letters".
The MSBit (bit 7) of this field represents the first byte in the name affiliation string (byte 8), while the LSBit (bit 0) represents the last byte from the string (byte 15). (i.e., a value of 11110000B for this field, with a name affiliation string of KTVU-FOX would indicate the stations call letters are KTVU).
If the name fig field is set, a total of one to four bits must be set in this field. name-affiliation Up to 8 character ASCII text string used to identify the channel for display purposes. Padded with Null characters if . less than 8 characters long. This string may not be NULL terminated if it is eight characters long. Table XII
Show list Command
Show list Commands provide schedule data for one day for a given channel. Show list commands do not contain schedule gaps (even for periods when the channel is off the air). Show list commands are sent for every channel in all regions of the system. Show list commands contain multiple Show Slot entries, with each entry corresponding to a single show in the channel's schedule.
Show list Commands represent at least 24 hours of schedule data. The first entry for a show list begins at midnight, Greenwich Mean Time. Programs which straddle the boundary between consecutive Show lists are represented only once, in the Show list in which their start time resides. The next Show list represents the portion of time in which a program from a previous Show list overruns into it with a dummy show entry. These filler entries are recognized using the 'dum fig', which when set indicates the entry for the show at this time slot can be found at the tail end of the previous day's show list. Only the first entry in a show list can have the 'dum fig' set. Dummy show entries operate identically to valid show entries, except that their title and description text may be substituted with something that labels it as a filler entry. If a program's start time coincides exactly with the Show list boundary time, it will be represented only once, in the next Show list.
Show list Commands, when they are encrypted, are encrypted starting with byte 11 in the above diagram (i.e.; starting with the 'nbr show slot entries' field).
This allows the Show list Commands to be discarded if they are not applicable to the subscriber unit's region or have already been received. Ignoring unneeded Show lists may help a Subscriber Unit's data processing throughput, since decryption is time consuming. The fields of the Show list Command as shown in Figure 14 are defined in Table XIII.
Field Description Cmd type Command type = 5. Identifies command as a Show list
Command. enc fig Flag indicating if die current command has been encrypted.
Command type and command length fields are never encrypted. 0=not encrypted, 1 = encrypted. key ID Decryption key ID. Identifies which of two current
"program" decryption keys should be used to decrypt this command.
Cmd length Number of bytes in the command (including the type and length fields). version Show list version number. Used to identify when changes have been made to me Show list for the given day. 'version' starts at 0 when first sent over the network and increments for every change to the Show list for that day within the time period (i.e. one week) that the given day is active. If the version field differs from the value currently held by the subscriber unit then the new schedule replaces the current one.
Channel ID Channel ID number identifying the channel whose schedule is being sent. Matches the channel ID number in one of the
Channel Data Command entries. This field will never have a zero value. start time Start time and start date for the first show in this Show list command. Encoded as number of minutes from midnight
January 1, 1992, Greenwich Mean Time. Start times for subsequent shows are calculated by adding successive duration's from each Show Slot entry. Thus, a show that starts in one day and finishes in the next (e.g., Johnny
Carson) would be the last show in the list. nbr show slot entries Number of shows on this channel for the entire day, counting the dummy entry if one exists.
DID flg Flag indicating if a DID field is present in the current Show
Slot entry; 0=not present, 1 =present. grp flg Show group flag indicating if this show is a member of a show group. 0=no, l =yes. pay /view flg Indicates show is a pay per view event. 1 = yes, 0 = not a . pay /view. fgrp flg Show group flag indicating if this show is a member of a show group. 0= no, l =yes. dum flg Dummy entry flag. Indicates that the program at this time slot can be found at the end of die previous day's Show list. Only the first entry in a show list may have the 'dum flg' set. duration Show duration in units of 1 minute. The minimum total show duration is 5 minutes, the maximum is 4 hours, or 240 minutes.
SID Show ID number. Unique 20 bit number used to identify the
Show Title command containing the show's title. This field may have a zero value, which indicates no show information is present.
DID Description ID number. Unique 16 bit number used to identify the Show Description Command, which contains the show's episode description. If a description for this show does not exist, die DID flg will be left clear and this field will be omitted. This field may not have a zero value. show group ID Show group ID number. Identifies program as being a member of the set of programs that all have this same group ID number. Field is only present if the 'grp fig' field =1. This field may not have a zero value. Note : A SERIES recording for a program that has a show group ID number will cause all members of the group found on the same channel to be recorded. Record queue entries for show groups are deleted 2 weeks after the last recording is made so that users do not have to torn off group recordings. Table XIII Show Title Command Show Title Commands contain the name of a program (e.g. COSBY SHOW) and some program attributes used in Theme searches. Show titles are usually compressed using a Huffman encoding scheme.
The uncompressed show title must be between 1 and 86 bytes in length, inclusive. Since the display capabilities of Subscriber Units is limited, titles which are greater then 38 bytes in length may be truncated.
Show Title Commands must be saved in the database if die show is in the Show list for at least one channel in the subscriber's region. All other Show Title Commands should be ignored. Show Titles that are needed are recognized by matching the SID number in the Show list with the SID number in the Show Title Command. The fields of the Show Title Command as shown in Figure 15 are defined in Table XIV. Field Description
Cmd type Command type = 6. Identifies command as a Show Title
Command. enc flg Flag indicating if the current command has been encrypted.
Command type and command lengdi fields are never encrypted. 0=not encrypted, 1 = encrypted, key ID Decryption key ID. Identifies which of two current
"program" decryption keys should be used to decrypt this command.
Cmd length Number of bytes in the command (including die type and length fields), cmp flg Flag indicating title is compressed. A few titles are longer when compressed using the Huffman encoding scheme (e.g. lots of 'x's or 'q's). 1 =title has been compressed, 0=title is uncompressed ASCII. CC Flag indicating show contains closed captioning information
(VBI line 21). 0=not close captioned, 1 = closed captioned. stereo Flag indicating show is broadcast in stereo. 0=not stereo,
1 = stereo. BW/C Flag indicating if show is broadcast in black & white or color.
0=color, l =black & white. SID 20 bit unique number identifying this show. This Show Title
Command is of interest to the subscriber unit only if this number is also found in die Show list for some channel in the • unit's region. This field is never passed with a zero value. Theme ID Number that identifies the Theme type and genre information appropriate for this program. Used for Theme searches.
Subcategories have sets of Theme ID numbers identifying the types of shows to be selected when a Theme search is performed for that sub category. Shows whose 'Theme ID' field matches one of the values in the set are selected. A zero value indicates no theme information is present. show title Huffman encoded or straight ASCII text string giving the show's title. Huffman encoding scheme is described in Appendix A. The string is always NULL terminated. The NULL character is appended before it is Huffman encoded. Table XIV
Show Description Command
Show Description Commands contain the description of an episode of a program and some program attributes used in Theme searches. Show descriptions are usually compressed using the same Huffman encoding scheme used for show titles.
The uncompressed show description must be between 1 and 162 bytes in length, inclusive. Since the display capabilities of Subscriber Units is limited, descriptions which are greater then 120 bytes in length may be truncated. Show Description Commands are sent for all shows that have descriptions in all regions serviced by the data provider. Show Description Commands must be saved in the database if the DID is referenced in the Show list for at least one channel in the subscriber's region. All other Show Description Commands should be ignored. Show Descriptions that are needed are recognized by matching the DID number in the Show list with the DID number in the Show Description Command. The fields of the Show Description Command as shown in Figure 16 are defined in Table XV.
Field Description Cmd type Command type = 8. Identifies command as a Show
Description Command. enc flg Flag indicating if the current command has been encrypted.
Command type and command length fields are never encrypted. 0= not encrypted, 1 = encrypted. key ID Decryption key ID. Identifies which of two current
"program" decryption keys should be used to decrypt this command.
Cmd length Number of bytes in the command (including die type and lengdi fields).
DID Description ID number. Unique 16 bit number identifying this episode description. This Show Description Command is of interest to the subscriber unit only if this number is also found in die Show list for some active channel in the unit's region. This field is always non-zero. cmp flg Flag indicating description is compressed. A few descriptions are longer when compressed using the Huffman encoding scheme (e.g. lots of 'x's or 'q's). 1 =title has been compressed, 0=title is uncompressed ASCII.
CC Flag indicating show contains closed captioning information
(VBI line 21). 0=not close captioned, 1 = closed captioned. stereo Flag indicating show is broadcast in stereo. 0=not stereo,
1 = stereo.
BW/C Flag indicating if show is broadcast in black & white or color.
0= color, 1 = black & white. rating flg Flag indicating if the command has the ratings fields in bytes
7, 8, and 9. Otherwise these bytes are absent and the Theme
ID field begins in byte 5. 0= ratings bytes not present,
1 = ratings bytes present. critic's rating Three bit field representing the critic's rating of the movie. It is a number which is interpreted as follows : 0=no rating, l =poor, 4=excellent. Values 5-7 are reserved.
MPAA rating Four bit field indicating the movie audience suitability rating. 0=no rating, 1 =G, 2=NR, 3=PG, 4=PG13, 5=R, 6=X, 7=NC17. Values 8-15 are reserved. traits bit mask Eight bit mask indicating program's attributes such as violence or nudity.
Bit Attribute 0 profanity
1 nudity
2 violence
3 adult situation
4 adult themes 5 not used
6 not used
7 adult language year produced The year which the episode was produced minus 190010. For example, a movie produced in 1943 would have the binary value 4310. This byte is present only if the 'rating flg' is set. The value 00 indicates that the production year has not been specified, show description Huffman encoded or straight ASCII text string giving the show's episode description. Huffman encoding scheme is described in Appendix A. The string is always NULL terminated. The NULL character is appended before it is Huffman encoded.
Table XV Theme Category Command The Theme Category Command specifies the major categories displayed in the subscriber unit's theme function. These categories form the first level of indexing in the hierarchical theme search function. For each major theme category a unique 8 bit ID number and a text string is specified. The text string names the category entry. The entries are listed serially within the command in the suggested presentation order.
The command includes a version number which is incremented each time the theme category command is changed. Subscriber Units should replace existing versions of the command stored in memory when a command with a differing version number has been transmitted. The fields of the Theme Category Command as shown in Figure 17 are defined in Table XVI. Field Description
Cmd type Command type = 11 (OBH). Identifies command as a Theme Category Command. enc flg Flag indicating if die current command has been encrypted.
Command type and command length fields are never encrypted. 0= not encrypted, 1 = encrypted, key ID Decryption key ID. Identifies which of two current "program" decryption keys should be used to decrypt this command. Cmd length Number of bytes in the command (including die type and length fields), version Theme Category set version number. Version number changes if any category is added, deleted, or the text changes.
A completely new set of categories should be acquired when the version number changes, nbr categories Total number of primary Theme categories; i.e., number of
Theme category entries that follow. Theme Category ID Unique 8 bit number used to identify corresponding sub category entries. This field is never passed widi a zero value, attributes flag word An 8 bit flag word used to specify the properties of the theme sub-category. The meaning of each field in the flag word is as follows : Bit 0 : DISPLAY NAME WITH DESCRIPTION - when set, the theme category name may be displayed with the description of a show with this theme id. (Some category names like ALL or OTHER may appear awkward when displayed witii a description. These types of entries will have this bit cleared. Other entries, such as MOVIE or DOCUMENTARY are desirable additions to descriptions, and hence may have this bit set.) Bits 1-7 : RESERVED.
Category name length Number of bytes in the 'Category name' field. Used to locate the start of the next entry and determine the length of the text, string that follows. This field will never have a zero value (first generation Subscriber Units will crash if this is passed as zero).
Category name Text string naming the category. This should be used to display the name of the category. The text is an uncompressed, null terminated ASCII string.
Table XVI Theme Sub-category Command
The Theme Sub-category Command specifies the sub-categories displayed in die subscriber unit's dieme function. These are displayed after the user has selected a major theme category. Each major theme category has one or more sub categories, which form the second level of me hierarchical search scheme. The description of each sub category includes the 8 bit ID of the parent category, a unique 16 bit theme ID number and a text string which names the entry. The entries are listed serially within the command in die suggested presentation order.
The command includes a version number which is incremented each time the theme sub-category command is changed. Subscriber Units should replace existing versions of the command stored in memory when a command witii a differing version number has been transmitted. All subscriber units should store these sub category names if they do not already have an entry with the same Theme Category ID, Sub category ID, and version number. The fields of the Theme Sub-category Command as shown in Figure 18 are defined in Table XVII. Field Description
Cmd type Command type = 12 (OCH). Identifies command as a Theme
Sub-category Command. enc flg Flag indicating if the current command has been encrypted.
Command type and command lengdi fields are never encrypted. 0= not encrypted, 1 = encrypted. key ID Decryption key ID. Identifies which of two current
"program" decryption keys should be used to decrypt this command.
Cmd length Number of bytes in the command (including the type and length fields). Theme Category ID Unique 8 bit number used to identify die primary category corresponding to this sub category entry. This field will never have a zero value. nbr Subcategories 7 bit unsigned number indicating die total number of Theme
Subcategories; i.e., number of Theme sub category entries that follow. This field will never have a zero value (First generation Subscriber Units will crash if this is passed as zero). entry length Total number of bytes in current sub category entry including this byte. Used for determining the start offset for the next entry and die number of bytes in the 'sub category name' field. This field will never have a zero value. attributes flag word An 8 bit flag word used to specify the properties of the dieme sub-category. The meaning of each field in the flag word is as follows :
Bit 0 : DISPLAY NAME WITH DESCRIPTION - when set, die dieme sub-category name may be displayed with the description of a show widi this theme id. (Some sub-category names like ALL or OTHER may appear awkward when displayed widi a description. These types of entries will have this bit cleared. Other entries, such as COMEDY or DRAMA are desirable additions to descriptions, and hence may have mis bit set.)
Bits 1-7 : RESERVED. nbr Theme IDs Number of Theme ID entries that follow this field. In the above diagram, the value of mis field would be 'k'. This field will never have a zero value (First generation Subscriber Units will crash if this is passed as zero). Theme ID 1-k Set of 16 bit Theme ID numbers used to identify shows that should be selected when a Theme search is done for this sub category. That is, any program whose Show Title or Show Description entry contains any one of these Theme ID numbers would be included in die list of shows selected by this Sub category. These theme ID's are sorted in ascending order. These fields will never have zero values. Sub category name Text string naming the category. This should be used to display die name of the category. The text is an uncompressed, null terminated ASCII string. Table XVII Subscriber Unit Reset Command
The Subscriber Unit Reset Command allows the StarSight Control Center to reset selected subscriber units. Different types of reset can be sent. The fields of the Subscriber Unit Reset Command as shown in Figure 19 are defined in Table XVIII.
Field Description Cmd type Command type = 13 (ODH). Identifies command as a Subscriber Unit Reset Command. enc flg Flag indicating if the current command has been encrypted. Command type and command lengdi fields are never encrypted. 0=not encrypted, 1 = encrypted. key ID Decryption key ID. Identifies which of two current "program" decryption keys should be used to decrypt this command.
Cmd lengdi Number of bytes in the command (including die type and length fields). reset type Reset Control Bit Field :
Bit 0 : When set instructs the unit to clear the semi-volatile memory where the acquired network data is stored. When die unit restarts, it will begin re-acquiring network data (also known as a cold boot).
Bits 1-7 : Reserved, serial nbr 5 byte serial number which idnetifies die subscriber unit this . command is addressed to. A serial number which is all zeroes indicates a "group broadcast", so all subscriber units should be prepared to respond to such a command.
Table XVIII Authorization Command
The Aumorization Command au iorizes the subscriber unit to begin collecting and displaying schedule data. It is sent when a subscriber signs up for the StarSight service.
Until the Audiorization Command is received, a subscriber unit does not know what region it is in, and hence, does not know which channels to collect data for. Similarly, it does not have the decryption key necessary to decrypt various commands until die Aumorization Command is received. Audiorization Commands are addressed to individual subscriber units using the serial number given to a Customer Service rep during the audiorization process. The first generation subscriber units are limited to supporting a single region and one or two separate VBI lines on the same toning frequency. The fields of die Audiorization Command as shown in Figures 20-22 are defined in Table XIX. Field Description
Cmd type Command type = 14 (OEH). Identifies command as an
Audiorization Command, enc flg Flag indicating if die current command has been encrypted.
Command type and command lengdi fields are never encrypted. 0= not encrypted, 1 = encrypted. key ID Decryption key ID. Identifies which of two current
"program" decryption keys should be used to decrypt this command. Cmd lengdi Number of bytes in the command (including die type and lengdi fields).
SU serial nbr Subscriber unit serial number assigned by die manufacturer.
Used to address the subscriber unit during authorization or re-authorization. Subsequent commands are addressed to a subscriber unit using the batch and unit numbers. This number is given to the customer service representative during, the audiorization process and determines the RSA public key used to encode die encrypted portion of this command.
Audiorization data 72 byte block of audiorization data, encrypted with die unit's factory assigned public key. The cryptogram must be decoded using die subscriber unit's private RSA key assigned to the StarSight Security processor at time of manufacture. The data is stored as follows before encryption : batch nbr 32 bit number identifying die encryption group to which the subscriber unit belongs to. When combined widi die one byte unit number that follows this element, a unique address for the subscriber unit is formed. These numbers are assigned by this command and used to address this unit or its' batch group in all subsequent commands. unit number 1 byte unit ID. Each unit within a batch group is assigned a unique unit ID.
Service level mask 2 byte bit mask indicating which StarSight services the user has subscribed to. The meaning of the individual bits is TBD. All bits are to be remain zero until defined. program key 0 The first 8 byte decryption key. Subsequent Key Distribution
Commands are addressed to this unit's batch assigned group to assign new program keys. program key 1 The other 8 byte decryption key. len of data following Is the number of data bytes remaining in the authorization block, not including die empty reserved data block and this field. In the current definition of this command, mis field is equal to die constant 20 (14H). batch key 8 byte key assigned to this unit's batch group. This key is used to decrypt die program keys transmitted in die Key Distribution Command.
Batch keys are only changed if the key is broken for a given batch. New batch keys are assigned to a batch by sending new. Authorization Commands to each member of the group. DP source This field has die same meaning as die source field in die region command. It is intended to indicate which input source the data provider signal is on. sign flg Sign bit for the time zone offset field, which follows. If set, it indicates die time zone offset is negative, and should be subtracted from Greenwich mean time. (For data provider stations West of the Greenwich Meridian, i.e. die entire US and Canada). Note diat diis implies the time zone offset field is not a two's complement binary number, time zone offset Four bit field indicating die number of hours offset from
Greenwich Mean Time to the time zone the subscriber unit is located widiin. Intended to be used when displaying local time before the Subscriber Unit has been aud orized (which sets the real time zone). The legal range for this field is from 0 to 12 decimal. (This field should be interpreted identically to die default time zone offset field contained in die Time command.)
VCR code group Code number identifying the group of VCR control codes to be used when commanding die user's VCR to do a recording, to rewind, etc. This field is defaulted with value 8000H, which means that no code group has been specified. Cable box code group Code number identifying cable box control codes to be used when commanding die user's cable box to change channels. This field is defaulted with value 8000H, which means that no code group has been specified. Satellite code group Code number identifying satellite control codes to be used when commanding die user's satellite interface to change channels. This field is defaulted with value 8000H, which means that no code group has been specified.
TV code group Code number identifying codes used to control the television remotely. This field is defaulted wid a zero value. The specific meanings of the code groups are TBD.
Primary Region ID Unique number identifying the region in which the subscriber unit is located. This field specifies the set of channels for which data is collected. It corresponds widi the region ID in the Region Command. First generation subscriber units can collect data for only one region.
DSA flg Daylight Saving applicable flag. Flag indicating if Daylight
Saving time is used in die subscriber's time zone. 0=no,
1 =yes.
Tune Channel MSB Most significant bit of the tune channel number field, which follows.
Data provider Channel ID number for the station to be used for receiving all channel ID subsequent StarSight commands. Normally this will be me station used during die audiorization process, but load balancing requirements may force a change.
Tune Channel No Is the tuning channel number of the data provider. This information is transmitted in the audiorization command so tiiat the subscriber unit does not have to wait for a Channel
Data Command to interpret the Data Provider Channel ID field. The legal range for this field is 0 to 511, inclusive. satellite alpha ID 5 bit field representing the alphabetic portion of the alphanumeric satellite identifier (i.e. the 'S' of satellite S4).
Field value 1 represents the letter 'A', 2 is 'B', etc.. This fields is specified as zero if the dataprovider is a non-satellite source. If this field is non-zero, it's legal range is 1-26 inclusive, representing the alphabetic characters 'A' through satellite numeric ID 5 bit field representing the numeric portion of the alphanumeric satellite identifier (i.e. the '4' of satellite S4). The field is broken up over two consecutive bytes. The legal range for this field is 1-31 inclusive. transponder no 6 bit field representing the transponder number to be used to tune to this channel on a Satellite system. This fields legal range is 0-63 inclusive.
VBI line nbr VBI line number to be used for acquiring StarSight data. VBI Stream ID Stream ID of primary data provider. The stream ID is transmitted widi each time command. Subscriber Units may use this to identify the VBI stream they are listening to. This may be useful for Subscriber Units while searching for the home data stream after a cable company has made an unannounced change to its channel mapping. RESERVED 10 byte field, reserved for future definitions. All first generation subscriber units will not interpret the contents of this data block.
Table XIX Long Assign IR Codes Command The Long Assign InfraRed Codes Command specifies the control codes to be used by die Subscriber Unit Universal Remote Control chip to control a specific peripheral device. The codes which describe the IR blaster language may optionally be sent for those devices diat are not in the URC chip's internal database. Transmission normally occurs while a Customer Service Rep is in contact with a user who has called StarSight because diey did not find die code group for their VCR/Cable Box/TV in the Subscriber Unit manual.
IR Codes may be sent eimer addressed to a specific unit via its Serial Number, or to groups of units with a given Product Code, Device Type (e.g. VCR), and Device ID. These commands may either be sent once per user request or repetitively when addressed to groups of SUs. The fields of die Long Assign IR Codes Command as shown in Figure 23 are defined in Table XX. Field Description Cmd Type Command type = 22 (16H). Identifies command as a Long
Assign IR Codes Command. enc flg Flag indicating if die current command has been encrypted.
Command type and command lengdi fields are never encrypted. 0 = not encrypted, 1 = encrypted. key ID Decryption key ID. Identifies which of two current
"program" decryption keys should be used to decrypt this command.
Cmd length Number of bytes in the command (including die type and length fields). Serial Number Subscriber unit serial number to which the command is addressed. A Serial Number of 0 means the command is addressed to all Subscriber Units having a Product Code,
Device Type, and Device ID corresponding to die one in this command.
Interconnect A number corresponding to the way the components Configuration controlled by the SU (i.e. TV, VCR, cable box) are connected.
Values and configurations are TBD.
Vendor Specific Byte value whose use depends on die product to which diis command is addressed. For example, when addressed to a
Zenidi TV diis value is die tuning method to be used widi die downloaded IR codes.
Product Code Number identifying die type/model of Subscriber Unit to which this command is addressed. Correlates with die type of
URC chip in die SU. This command is ignored by a
Subscriber Unit if this number does not match its Product
Code when the Serial Number field = 0.
Device Type Identifies the type of device (VCR, Cable Box, TV, IRD, ...) mat can recognize these IR codes.
0 Cable Box
1 TV
2 VCR 0C IRD Device ID Code group number for the device diat recognizes these IR codes. The Subscriber Unit (only if it has a matching address) replaces whatever code group number it currently has for the given Device Type witii is number. Thus die headend can directly set the code group for a specific user. This is not done if the Serial Number field in this command is 0. In diis case, die command is only processed if die user has already entered a code number that matches the Device ID for the same Device Type.
Version Version number for the IR codes in diis command. The SU saves the version number for each device type and only processes tiiose Assign IR Codes commands addressed to groups of units if its version number for the specified device differs from the version number in the command.
IR Codes Length Number of bytes in the IR Codes field. IR Codes Information (normally IR codes) to be used by the URC chip to control devices of die specified type. Structure within diis field is determined by the URC chip manufacturer. Table XX Key Distribution Command
Key Distribution Commands give the current and next program keys to be used for decrypting encrypted commands. Subscriber units must watch die data stream for a Key Distribution Command containing its batch number. When the command is found it should send die audiorization bit mask, both keys, and the audientication data field to die StarSight Security processor. If the bit in die audiorization bit mask corresponding to die subscriber unit's unit number is 0 then the subscriber unit has been de-audiorized and must suspend data collection. The fields of die Key Distributioin Command as shown in Figure 24 are defined in Table XXI.
Field Description
Cmd type Command type = 17 (011 H). Identifies command as a Key
Distribution Command. enc flg Flag indicating if die current command has been encrypted.
Command type and command lengdi fields are never encrypted. 0= not encrypted, 1 = encrypted, key ID Decryption key ID. Identifies which of two current "program" decryption keys should be used to decrypt this command. Cmd lengdi Number of bytes in the command (including die type and length fields), batch nbr 32 bit number identifying the encryption group to which the subscriber unit belongs. This number was assigned during the authorization process, authorization bit mask 256 bit mask (32 bytes) with each bit corresponding to one unit in the batch. The bit applicable to a subscriber unit is the bit corresponding to the unit's unit number. Bit is set (=1) if the unit is authorized and reset (=0) if not. program key 0 Cryptogram encoded using the batch key assigned to the subscriber unit's group. The StarSight Security processor uses this key to decrypt encrypted commands when die 'key ID' field = 0. program key 1 Cryptogram encoded using die batch key assigned to die subscriber unit's group. The StarSight Security processor uses this key to decrypt encrypted commands when the 'key ID' field = 1. audientication data 4 byte value used by die StarSight Security processor to authenticate the authorization bit mask and program key fields in this command
Table XXI Subscriber Unit Command
This command is used to transmit data bytes to one or more subscriber units. The definition of the format and contents is private to subscriber units. The network does not attempt to interpret the data.
This command provides a hook for transmitting commands and initialization data to subscriber units during development, widiout having to define separate, formal, network messages for each function, many of which may be temporary in natore. The fields of die Subscriber Unit Command as shown in Figure 25 are defined in Table XXII.
Field Description Cmd type Command type = 24 (018H). Identifies the command as
Subscriber Unit Command. enc flg Flag indicating if die current command has been encrypted.
Command type and command lengdi fields are never encrypted. 0= not encrypted, 1 = encrypted. key ID Decryption key ID. Identifies which of two current
"program" decryption keys should be used to decrypt this command.
Cmd lengdi Number of bytes in the command (including die type and lengdi fields). cmnd sub-type 1 byte field indicating what type of subscriber unit command this is. The following command types have been defined: 01 : Enter Diagnostics Menu if this command is addressed to the unit All otiier type values are reserved.
SU Serial Nbr Is die assigned 5 byte serial number of the Subscriber Unit. All zeroes in this field indicates a group broadcast to all subscriber units.
Table XXII
The following describes the Subscriber Unit 52 Database Engine Internal Data Structores. The general natore of the Subscriber Unit data is hierarchical. The schedule data hierarchy of data structores in descending order follows: CHANNEL DATA TABLE Contains Subscriber Units list of channels SHOW LIST Contains a list of Show Titles, descriptions, start times, and durations for a channel. SHOW TITLE Contains the Show Title attributes and title text. SHOW DESCRIPTION Contains show ratings, attributes, and description text. Theme Categories and Theme SubCategories are used to select shows for viewing. They share a common data value (Theme Indexes) diat are used to extract shows that match a Theme Category /SubCategory pair. The Theme data hierarchy in descending order follows:
THEME TABLE Table of Theme Categories
THEME SUB TABLE Table of Theme SubCategories
THEME SHOW TABLE Table of Theme selected shows For a description of Network Commands received by die Subscriber Unit see die InSight Data Transmission Network Protocol description. Database Memory Pool Overview
The Memory Manager allocates and frees Blocks of Memory as requested by die application portion of the Subscriber Unit. The application software references Memory Blocks via a HANDLE. The handle of a memory block is an index to a table entry containing a POOL INDEX. The POOL INDEX is a scaled address that translates into the address of a MEMORY BLOCK. The HANDLE approach allows MEMORY BLOCKS to be relocated as system objects age and die, widiout requiring specific updating of application data structores. The Memory Manager periodically runs a garbage collection process to collect unused MEMORY BLOCKS and recombine them into larger blocks. Because applications reference MEMORY BLOCKS with HANDLES through the HANDLE TABLE, MEMORY BLOCKS can be relocated widi specific updating of application data structores. In addition die memory pool can be temporarily locked to prevent the relocation of blocks during critical periods.
Each MEMORY BLOCK contains as the very first element the size of, and the OBJECT TYPE of the Memory Block. This aids in the relocation and merging of MEMORY BLOCKS.
The OBJECT TYPES break up into two main groups. The small OBJECTS which always can be defined in less tiian 16 Blocks of Memory. Currently each block of memory is 16 BYTEs long,. Small OBJECTS have their OBJECT TYPE encoded in the first NIBBLE, and die lengdi in blocks encoded in die second NIBBLE of the first BYTE of the MEMORY BLOCK. Large OBJECTS have their OBJECT TYPE encoded as the first BYTE of the MEMORY BLOCK , and number of allocation units as the second BYTE of the MEMORY BLOCK.
If the first BYTE of the MEMORY BLOCK bit wise ANDed with OxCO is 0, tiien this is a Large OBJECT, otherwise it is a small OBJECT. Database Memory Pool Access Scheme
A schematic representation of the database memory pool access scheme is shown in Figure 26. Further details are as follows: Handle Table
The Handle Table is a fixed allocation table, as shown in Figure 27, containing two types of entries; free entries and in-use entries. Free entries will always have their 2 MSBs set so as to not be confused with in-use entries.
In-use entries contain the Index into die Pool for database items mat are referenced via Handles; e.g.; Show Title entries. A database item's Handle is an index into die Handle Table. A database item's Pool Index can change due to garbage collection in the Pool, but its Handle will not change as long as that item exists in the database. Items deleted from the database retorn their Handle to die top of die free list.
Handle Table entry 0 is always the head of the free list. The Table is initialized to all free entries with each entry containing tiie Index of the next entry. The size of the Handle Table limits the number of database items that can be kept in d e Pool. Systems with various numbers of channels will require different Handle Table sizes. Field Description
Pool Index Index into die Pool for the first Pool Block containing the item. Database Show Schedule Access Overview
The database show schedule access scheme is shown in Figure 28. The Channel Data is maintained in the Internal Database Engine data structure called the Channel Data Table. The Channel Data Table selects the channels accessed by a
Region. The Channel Data Table is built by the system command processor from the Region Command and Channel Data Commands. The channel related information is extracted from the Region Command and placed in the Channel Data Table. The Region Id to use is extracted from the authorization command. The Region Id is die key information for show schedule generation. The Region Id selects the Region Command processed by die subscriber unit, which defines die Channels Id accessed, which defines die Channel Data Table, which defines die Show Lists, which selects die Show Titles and Show Descriptions, which reference the Themes Categories and Theme Sub Categories. Once the Channel Data Table is defined, the Channels are referenced directly through the Channel Data Table.
Each lower level table in the show schedule is accessed through a HANDLE. The HANDLE is translated by the Handle Table into a pointer in memory. Channel Data Table
As shown in Figure 29, the Channel Data Table contains information on each channel in the Region. This data is used for access to the schedule data ( Show Lists ) for a channel, toning, display on die Channel Banner, for channel gliffs, and during Setup. Further details are provided in Table XXIII.
Field Description Type/Nbr Blks Pool Entry Type and number of blocks required to hold diis Pool item. The type value indicates diat this is a 2 byte field since the lengdi can become very large due to die number of channels in the Region. Channel Data Table Type = 1.
Nbr Channels Number of Channel Entries in the user's Region (including inactive channels ). Table XXIII
Channel Entry
There is one Channel Entry (see also Figure 29) for each channel in the
Region. Further details are provided in Table XXIV.
FIELD DESCRIPTION Channel ID Channel's unique ID number assigned by die InSight Control Center. Used to distinguish Show Lists diat die Subscriber Unit needs.
Tune Channel Nbr Channel Number to be toned to receive this channel's broadcasts. Tune Channel Number may differ from the . original channel number if the channel is on a cable system. E.g.; Channel 5 ( CBS ) might be broadcast on channel 17 on a cable network.
Transponder Nbr Satellite Transponder Number, for acquiring Satellite broadcasts. Satellite Nbr Satellite Number, and Index used with the Satellite
Codes to generate die specific commands for communicating with the satellite receiver box.
Original Channel Nbr Channel Number displayed in the channel gliff. This is the channel the user recognizes. Signal Strength Signal Strength rating for the channel acquired during
Authorization scanning. Larger numbers represent stronger signals.
Data Pro Flg Data Provider Flag. Identifies the channel we receive
StarSight data from. Bit set during Authorization scan.
Inact Flg Inactive Channel Flag. This bit is set when the user specifies this channel as unwanted. When this bit is set no data is collected for the channel.
No Desc Flg No Descriptions Flag. Identifies channels for which no description data is acquired. Set during user
Setop.
Name Flg Flag indicating if channel icon should display the
Original Channel Number or the first three characters from the 'Name-Affiliation' Field. 0 = use number,
1 = use characters.
Name-Affiliation Text string giving channel's name and (if appropriate) network affiliation; e.g., "KTVU- FOX".
Mask Bits Bits which are set indicate which characters in die
'Name- Afflilation' string are to be masked out.
Favorite Link Channel ID Entry number for the next most favorite channel. Set During user Setop. Used when traversing this table in 'favorites' order. Very 1st entry will =
02H. Show List Handle Table Handle for this channel's Show List HandleTable.
Handle
Dup Chan Handle Handle for table of Duplicate Channels associated widi this base channel. Table XXTV Channel Duplicates Table
The Channel Duplicates Table (Figure 30) contains information on each channel in the Region diat is the duplicate of a base channel. This data is used to adjust die display of Blocks of pay-for-view type channels. All of the channels share a common base Channel Show List, but add a starting time to the offset of die base channel's Show List. The Base Channel ID is not stored in the structure. Instead die structure is referenced as a Handle by the channel entry in the Channel Data Table. If a channel entry has duplicate channels, tiien die Duplicate Channel Handle field has a Handle Number to access the table by. Further details are provided in Table XXV. Field Description
Type/Nbr Blks Pool Entry Type and number of blocks required to hold this
Pool item. The type value indicates diat this is a 2 byte field since the lengdi can become very large due to die number of channels in the Region. Nbr Channels Number of duplicate Channel entries in the user's region
(Including inactive channels). Table XXV Channel Duplicates Entry
There is one Channel Duplicate Entry for each duplicate channel in die Region. Further details are provided in Table XXVI. Field Description
Tune Chan Nbr Tuned Channel Number for the channel that duplicates die Show List of the base channel by some time offset (9 bits).
Time Offset This is the offset in minutes from the starting time of the Base Channel ID. Table XXVI Show List Handle Table
A ' Show List Handle Table' (Figure 31) contains Handles to Show Lists for every day of the week. This table is pointed to by the 'Show List Handle Table' Handle located in die Channel Data Table. Via this table we can access Show Lists representing a weeks worth of scheduling. Further details are provided in Table XXVII.
Field Description
Type/Nbr Blks Pool Type = 40H, Nbr Blks = 1. Since both pieces of information are contained in die 1st Byte, this value will equal 41H. Reference Count Number of times mis Show List is referenced by another object in database. When this structure is initially created, Reference Count will = 1 since Channel Data Table makes reference to it.
Monday — Sunday One Handle for every day of die week. These Handles point to actual Show List Handles Show Lists representing a given day of die week. Initially, and as necessary, when given Handle = 0000, means Show List is needed.
Table XXVII Show List
A Show List (Figure 32) contains 24+ hours of scheduling for a given channel. The only time it will in fact contain more than 24 hours of scheduling is when a program starts in the current day and crosses the 24 hour line while still broadcasting. All Show Lists will always begin at the same time every day. A Dummy Slot will be created to deal with overflow from the previous day if necessary. For a complete set of scheduling, seven separate Show Lists are required for every Program Originator supported by given Subscriber Unit. Access to the Show List is via the Show List Handle Table for a given day of the week. Further details are provided in Table XXVIII. Field Description Type/Nbr Blk Pool Entry Type and Number of Blocks required for the entry. Show List pool type = 02H.
Version The current Version of the Show List, allows us to recognize when a new Version of a Show List has arrived.
Start Time Start Time ( in number of minutes since midnight January 1, 1992 - GMT ) for the First Show in the Show List. Used for determining new schedule days as tiiey come in. Table XXVIII Show Entry A Channel's schedule is given by an ordered sequence of Show Entries.
These Entries give a show's duration, title, and possibly an episode description. The entries are either 4 , 6, or 8 bytes long depending on whetiier the show has a description and/or Group ID.
Finding the entry that corresponds to a given start time requires the Entries to be scanned, in order, from the beginning of the list and adding Duration values. There must be no gaps in the Show List. Further details are provided in Table XXIX.
Field Description Dummy Flag Set if 1st slot Dummy means last show of last Show List over. This much time contained in duration.
DID Flag Description ID Flag. If this bit = 1 , tiien a DID Handle field exists for this entry; i.e., entry is at least 6 bytes long and die show has a description. Duration Length of program minutes - Range: 1 minute - 240 minutes ( 4 hrs ). Shows longer than 4 hours must be broken into multiple parts with each part given a new slot. GRP Flag Group ID Flag. If this bit = 1 then a Group ID field exists for this entry; i.e. entry is at least 6 bytes long and the show is a member of a Record Group. If DID Flag set entry, entry is 8 bytes long.
SID Handle Handle for the Show Title Entry that gives this Show's Title and Theme Category information. DID Handle Handle for die Show Description Entry that gives this show's episode description and some additional Theme Category information. This field is only present if the 'DID Flg' field is set. Group ID Value of the Group ID that is used by the Record Manager to identify shows that are members of a Record Group. Delimiters Prior to 1st show slot there will be an 'EEH' delimiter.
Following last show slot, there will be an 'FFH' delimiter. Table XXIX Show Title
Show Titles (Figure 33) contain the usually compressed text of a Show's Title. There is one entry per unique Show Title.
Show Titles are Pool based items. An entry is created whenever a Show List is received (for a channel the Subscriber Unit is collecting data for) that contains an SID for which the Subscriber Unit does not already have die Show Title. When an entry is created a Handle is allocated to it and die 'Need It' flag is set in the Show Title Handle Table Entry.
The entry size is determined by die length of the title. A single Pool Block is reserved (containing a null title string) when a new SID is received in a Show List. The entry is filled when the appropriate Show Title message is subsequently received and die 'Need It' flag is tiien cleared. At diat time, the entry may be relocated and expanded to multiple Pool Blocks (but its Handle will stay the same). Further details are provided in Table XXX.
Field Description Type/Nbr Blks Pool entry type and number of consecutive Pool blocks required for the entry. Show Title Pool Type = 5?H.
Theme ID Unique number associated witii Theme Category Data for this show. This is an index into the Theme Category Data Table.
Compressed Flag Flag indicating if Show Title text is compressed or not. Sometimes compression actually lengthens the string, so this flag is used to suppress de-compression when compression was not needed. ( 0 = not compressed, 1 = compressed ). CC Flag indicating if show is Closed Captioned. 0 = no, 1 = yes. Stereo Flag Indication if show is broadcast in Stereo. 0 = no, 1 — yes. BW/C Flag indicating if show is broadcast in Black and White or
Color. 0 = Color, 1 = B & W. Reference Count Number of times this Show Title is referenced by a Show
List, Record Queue entry, or other item in the database. When this field is 0 die entry and its corresponding Show Title Handle Table entry, are candidates for deletion.
Show Title Text string for the Show Name. Normally this string is compressed by Huffman encoding; however, if he "Compressed " flag is not set, die text is straight ASCII. Table XXX Database Show Title Hash Table Access Scheme
The database show title hash table access scheme is shown in Figure 34. Show Title Handle Table
Show Title Handle Tables (Figure 35) are Pool based tables used to determine if a show title is needed or if it has already been received. There is one Show Title Handle Table for each possible value that an SID can Hash to; i.e., 256 tables.
A Show Title Handle Table entry is made for every unique SID received in any Show List message for a channel that the SU is collecting data for. The particular table that the entry is made in is determined by the SID's Hash value; that is, die SID's least significant 8 bits.
These tables must be updated as SIDs are eliminated from the database. A Show Handle Table Walker background task is torned on and accesses tiiese tables at regular intervals and checks tiiem for Reference Counts that have gone to 0. The Walker looks for entries that can be deleted. Further details are provided in Table XXXI.
Field Description
Type Pool entry type for Show Title Handle Table = 03H.
Nbr Blks Number of Pool Blocks required for the entry. Nbr Entries Number of table Entries. Used when searching table for matching SID values. This can never be 0 . Table XXXI Show Title Handle Table Entry The Show Title Handle Table contains multiple entries. Each of these Entries contains the following field: Field Description
Need It Flag Flag indicating if the Show Title text string message has been received for this SID. 0 = Show Title received, 1 = not received.
Show Title Hash Table
The Show Title Hash Table (Figure 36) is a fixed size, pre-allocated table containing only Pool indices for each possible SID Hash value. The SID Hash value is an index into this table. The value in the nth entry is an index into the Pool for die Show Title Handle Table containing all SIDs received so far that Hash to n. Further details are provided in Table XXXII. Field Description
Pool Index Pool Index for the first block of the Show Title Handle Table for SID's that hash to this entries offset from the beginning of the table. A value of 0 means no SID's have been found so far (in Show Lists for channels we collect data for) that have Hashed to this entry. SID Unique Show ID number. Only the most significant 12 bits are stored since all entries in this table have the same least significant 8 bits. This 20 bit number is unique for each
Show Title. Handle Index into die Handle Table which, in torn, gives the Pool
Index for the first Pool Block containing the corresponding Show Title Entry. Table XXXII
Show Description
Show Descriptions (Figure 37) contain the (usually) compressed text of a show's episode description. There is one entry per unique show description. Show Descriptions are Pool based items. An entry is created whenever a Show List is received (for a channel the SU is collecting data for) that contains a DID for which the SU does not already have the show description. That is, the 'need it' flag is set in the Show Description Handle Table entry. The entry size is determined by the length of the description. A single Pool block is reserved (containing a null description string) when a new DID is received in a Show List. The entry is filled when the appropriate Show Description message . is subsequently received and the 'need it' flag is cleared. At that time, the entry may be relocated and expanded to multiple Pool blocks (but its handle will stay the same). Further details are provided in Table XXXIII. Field Description
Type/Nbr Blocks Pool entry type and number of consecutive Pool blocks required for the entry. Show Description Pool Type = 6?H Cmp Flg Flag indicating if show description text is compressed or not. Sometimes compression actually lengthens the string, so this flag is used to suppress decompression when compression was not needed. (0 = not compressed, 1 = compressed). CC Flag indicating if die show episode is close captioned. 0=no,
1 =yes. Stereo Flag indicating if die show episode is broadcast in stereo.
0=no, l =yes. BW/C Flag indicating if die show episode is in black & white or color. 0=color, 1 =B&W.
Rating Flg Flag indicating if rating bytes are present. 0 = no, 1 = yes. CCrriittiiccss RRaattiinngg Number of star's accorded die show by die critics. 0=no rating.
MPAA Rating Audience suitability rating. 0=G, 1 =NR, 2=PG,
3=PG13, 4=R, 5=X, 6=NC17.
Traits Bit Mask Bit mask indicating show's attributes such as violence or profanity. See 'Show Description Command' for bit assignments. Bit Attribute
0 profanity
1 nudity 2 violence
3 adult situation
4 adult themes
5 mild violence
6 brief nudity 7 adult language
8 mature themes
9 not used
Reference Count Number of times this show description is referenced by a
Show List, Record Queue entry, or other item in the database. When this field is 0 the entry and its corresponding Show
Description Handle Table entry are candidates for deletion.
Theme ID Unique number associated witii Theme category data for this episode of die show. This is an index into die Theme Category Data Table. Show Description Text string for the show name. Normally this string is compressed by Huffman encoding; however, if the 'compressed' flag is not set, the text is straight ASCII. String is null terminated.
Table XXXIII Database Show Description Access Overview
Figure 38 depicts die database show title hash table access scheme. Show Description Handle Table
Show Description Handle Tables (Figure 39) are Pool based tables used to determine if a Show Description is needed or if it has already been received. There is one Show Description Handle Table for each possible value that an DID can Hash to; i.e., 256 Tables.
A Show Description Handle Table entry is made for every unique DID received in any Show List message for a channel that the SU is collecting data for. The particular table that die entry is made in is determined by the DID's Hash value; diat is, die DID's least significant 8 bits.
These tables must be updated as DIDs are eliminated from the database. A Show Handle Table Walker background task is torned on and accesses these tables whenever 5 DIDs have been deleted; i.e. tiieir Reference Counts have gone to 1. The Walker looks for entries that can be deleted. Further details are available in Table XXXIV.
Field Description
Type Pool entry Type for Show Title Handle Table = 04H Nbr Blocks Number of Pool Blocks required for the entry.
Nbr Entries Number of Table Entries. Used when searching table for matching DID values.
Table XXXIV Show Description Handle Table Entry The Show Description Handle Table contains multiple entries. Each of these entries contains the fields shown in Table XXXV: Field Description
Need It Flag Flag indicating if the Show Description text string message has been received for this DID. 0 = Show Description received, 1 = not received.
DID Unique Description ID Number. Only the most significant 8 bits are stored since all entries in this table have the same least significant 8 bits. This 16 bit number is unique for each Show Description. Handle Index into the Handle Table which, in torn, gives the Pool
Index for the first Pool Block containing the corresponding Show Description entry.
Table XXXV Show Description Hash Table The Show Description Hash Table (Figure 40) is a fixed size, pre-allocated table containing only Pool indices for each possible DID Hash value. The DID Hash value is an index into this table. The value in the nth entry is an index into die Pool for the Show Description Handle Table containing all DIDs received so far that Hash to n. Further details are as follows: Field Description
Pool Index Pool Index for the first block of the Show Description Handle Table for DID's that Hash to this entries' offset from the beginning of the table. A value of 0 means no DID's have been found so far ( in Show Lists for channels we collect data for ) that have Hashed to diis entry. Theme Category Table The Theme Category Table (Figure 41) contains the definition of die Themes downloaded to die Subscriber Unit. The Themes Categories are used to search for shows of a particular type. Each Theme Category contains one or more Theme SubCategories. Each Theme Category in the Theme Category Table has a Theme SubCategory Table associated widi it. Further details are provided in Table XXXVI. Field Description
Type/Nbr Blks Pool entry type and Number of Blocks required to hold this
Pool item. The type value indicates tiiat this is a 2 byte field since the length can become large due to the number of possible Theme Categories. Reference Count Number of times this table is referenced. Initialized so die garbage collector does not delete it. Version Version Number of the Theme Category Table New
Categories and Sub Categories are collected when die Version Number changes. New Theme Counts must be also be determined.
Nbr Theme Categories Number of Theme Category Entries.
Table XXXVI Theme Category Entry
There is one Theme Category Entry for each Theme Category. Further details on die Theme Category Entry are provided in Table XXXVII. Field Description
Theme Category ID The Theme Category's Unique ID assigned by the Head End. Used to Identify Theme SubCategories for this Primary Category. Theme SubCategory The Handle to the Memory Pool Block containing the -
Theme Table Handle SubCategory Table that corresponds to diis Theme Category.
Theme Category The length of die text string in bytes. Used to locate die start Name Length of the next entry.
Theme Category Compressed text name of Theme Category. Huffman Name encoded.
Table XXXVII Theme Subcategory Table
The Theme SubCategory Table (Figure 42) contains information about Theme SubCategories contained in a Theme Category. Each Theme SubCategory Table is referenced by one Theme Category Entry. Each Theme SubCategory Entry contains a name, qualifiers, and Theme Indexes. The Theme Indexes in Show Titles and in Show Descriptions are matched against the Theme Indexes in a Theme SubCategory. Theme Indexes tiiat match identify which shows are a members of a Theme SubCategory. Further details are provided in Table XXXVIII. Field Description
Type/Nbr Blks Pool entry Type and Number of Blocks required to hold diis
Pool item. The Type value indicates diat this is a 2 byte field since the length can become very large due to die number of Theme SubCategories in the Theme Category. Theme Category ID Theme Category ID of owning Theme Category. Reference Count Number of times this object is Referenced.
Nbr Theme Number of Theme SubCategory Entries in the Theme SubCategories Category.
Table XXXVIII Theme SubCategory Entry
There is one Theme SubCategory Entry for each channel in the Region. Further details on the Theme SubCategory Entry are provided in Table XXXIX. Field Description
SubCategory Show Count of shows that reference this SubCategory. A Show Count Title/Description pair should only be counted once.
Entry Length Total remaining Entry Length in Bytes ( Indexes & Text ) Nbr Theme Indexes Number of Theme Indexes that reference this Theme
SubCategory. Theme Index [ ] Theme Indexes, ( 9 bits + Nbr extra Theme Index Bits ) long. This is implementation dependent. The Head End tells the Subscriber Unit how many bits are required for the largest Theme Index. The default is 9 bits. The Subscriber Unit can encode those as 9 bit values, or as 16 bit values. SubCategory Name Compressed Text SubCategory Name.
Table XXXIX
This section describes the messages sent between all processors in a subscriber unit 52. All messages are described even tiiough some subscriber unit implementations may not use or require all of the messages.
Diagrams are given showing the format of the messages followed by a description of each of the fields in die message. Greyed fields represent currently unused fields, but the bits in these fields should be set to 0's in order to maintain compatability with future implementations. All fields are binary, 2's complement numbers unless otherwise noted.
Database Engine - I/O Processor Interfaces
The Database Engine and die I/O Processor communicate via an IM bus running at 1 Mb its per second. The I/O Processor receives Data Transmission
Network data via one or more specified Vertical Blanking Interval line(s) and transmits the acquired raw bytes when requested by die Database Engine Processor. The Database Engine controls the toned channel and specifies die particular VBI line(s) to be used.
The Database Engine also issues graphic display commands to die I/O
Processor such as fill a rectangle with a given color, and save or restore the pixel contents of a given rectangle on the screen. All subscriber unit screens are constructed from these graphic display commands.
The Database Engine issues commands to d e I/O Processor in a packet
(Figure 43) that contains a packet length field followed by one or more commands.
The I/O Processor transfers all packet bytes to a RAM command buffer and, at the completion of die transfer, begins executing the commands in the order they were received in die packet. The I/O Processor sets a statos flag indicating tiiat it is busy until all commands have been executed. Packet size is always the first two bytes received in any command sequence issued to die I/O Processor. Only one command packet can be sent to die I/O Processor at a time. Graphics Commands
The following commands define die primitive graphics operations needed to draw system display screens on a television set connected to or incorporating the subscriber unit 52.
Screen coordinates are based on (0,0) being in the upper left corner of the screen. The TPU 2740 allows X coordinates as high as 503 but the system's maximum X coordinate is 251. This allows the system to keep X coordinates in a single byte and to have two pixels of different colors comprise a 'system pixel'.
Hence (251,207) is the lower right corner of the screen and X coordinates received in commands must be doubled by d e 2740. All colors in the following commands are comprised of two basic TPU 2740 colors in the upper and lower nibbles of the color byte. Using two separate colors in a single system pixel enhances the number of colors that can be shown. Setting a system pixel actually involves setting two successive 2740 pixels along the X axis using the two colors in the color byte. When areas are filled, die colors must be dithered. That is, the colors used for successive 2740 pixels along the X axis must alternate between the two colors given in the appropriate command color byte. Even rows start with color 1 while odd rows (i.e. Y coordinate is an odd number) start with color 2 and alternate between the two colors for successive pixels along the X axis.
The 2740's graphics routines clip output if the X or Y coordinate exceeds the limits of the screen. That is, graphics do not wrap if the coordinates of an operation go outside (0,0) to (251 ,207).
Commands with illegal parameter values are ignored. An illegal "cmd type' field causes all subsequent commands in die packet to be ignored; tiiat is, the IOP is . finished witii a packet if it ever detects an illegal command type.
Graphics commands take precedence over VBI processing. Set Graphics Defaults
The Set Graphics Defaults command (Figure 44) causes the I/O Processor (IOP) to reset all its graphics variables to their initialization values. This command is used when die Database Engine has come up from a power on reset state. The IOP initializes these values to: • shadow widtii = shadow height = 3
• shadow color = BLACK
• small font delta X = 6
• small font delta Y = 10
• large font delta X = 8 • large font delta Y = 15
• highlight = WHITE
• underlinel = GREY
• underline2 = BLACK
Further details are provided in Table XXXX. Field Description cmd type Command ID number = 1 identifying this as a Set Graphics
Defaults command, shadow width Number of pixels along the X axis for vertical shadows.
Used by Draw Rectangle command. shadow height Number of pixels along the Y axis for horizontal shadows.
Used by Draw Rectangle command, shadow colorl,2 Default colors to be used for shadows. small font delta X Number of pixels spacing along X axis for small font characters. Used by Write ASCII String command. small font delta Y Number of pixels spacing along the Y axis allowed for text lines written in small font characters. This value is added to the Y coordinate for the current text line when a carriage return character is encountered in a text string by the Write ASCII String command. large font delta X Number of pixels spacing along X axis for large font characters. Used by Write ASCII String command. large font delta Y Number of pixels spacing along the Y axis allowed for text lines written in large font characters. This value is added to the Y coordinate for the current text line when a carriage retorn character is encountered in a text string by the Write ASCII String command. highlightl ,2 Color ID numbers for the top embossing lines and left side lines. underline 11,12 Color ID numbers for the inner embossing underline and inner right side line. underline 21,22 Color ID numbers for the lowest embossing underline and outside right verticle line. Table XXXX
Erase Screen
The Erase Screen command (Figure 45) causes the I/O Processor to blank the screen and set all display buffer pixels to the specified "transparent" color. Further details are provided in Table XXXXI.
Field Description cmd type Command ID number = 2 identifying this as an Erase Screen command. xpar color Color ID number to be used for transparent pixels. Only the lower nibble is used in defining die transparent color. Table XXXXI
Draw Rectangle Draws a rectangle of specified ditiiered colors. Rectangle can be filled, outlined, shadowed, and/or embossed in a single operation based on die corresponding flag bits set in the command. Each of tiiese operations can be done independently of die other operations. For example, an empty rectangle can be drawn by setting only the 'outline' flag bit.
For solid color, filled rectangles, both 'fill colorl' and 'fill color2' should be the same value. Rectangles should be filled, then embossed, outlined and shadowed . in that order. Further details are provided in Figure 46 and Table XXXXII.
Field Description cmd type Command ID number = 3 identifying this as a Draw
Rectangle command. upper left X X coordinate for the upper left corner of the rectangle. upper left Y Y coordinate for the upper left corner of the rectangle. widtii Rectangle size in pixels along the X axis. height Rectangle size in pixels along the Y axis. fill colorl ,2 Color ID numbers for the ditiiered colors used to fill die rectangle. Only used if 'fill' bit is set. outline color 1,2 Color ID numbers for the ditiiered colors to be used for the outline around the rectangle. Not used if 'outline' flag = 0. fill Flag indicating if rectangle should be filled witii ditiiered colors. 0 = no, 1 = yes. outline Flag indicating if rectangle should be outlined. 0 = no outline, 1 = outline rectangle with 'outline' color. shadow Flag indicating if rectangle should have a shadow. If the shadow bit is set for drawing a pop-up then save and restore rectangle operations must account for the size of die shadow.
Shadow size and color are set by the Set Graphics Defaults command. 0 = no shadow, 1 = draw shadow. emboss Flag indicating if rectangle should be embossed to give a 3D effect. Embossing colors used are determined from the 'fill color 1' and 'fill color 2' fields. 0 = no embossing, 1 = do embossing.
Table XXXXII Example rectangles are shown in Figures 47A-47E. Save Rectangle
Causes die pixel contents of a specified rectangle on the screen to be saved in a temporary buffer for later restoration via a Restore Rectangle command. Further details are provided in Figure 48 and Table XXXXIII. Field Description cmd type Command ID number = 4 identifying this as a Save
Rectangle command, upper left X X coordinate for the upper left corner of the rectangle, upper left Y Y coordinate for the upper left corner of the rectangle, width Rectangle size in pixels along the X axis, height Rectangle size in pixels along the Y axis, pop-up ID ID number assigned by die command initiator (value is equivalent to nesting level). This field is only used for debugging.
Table XXXXIII Restore Rectangle
Restores a rectangle to the screen that was previously saved with a Save Rectangle command. Rectangle to be restored is recognized by its 'pop-up ID' field. Restoration coordinates allow a previously saved rectangle to be brought back at a different place on die screen, such as when moving a cursor or icon of some sort. Further details are provided in Figure 49 and Table XXXXIV.
Field Description cmd type Command ID number = 5 identifying this as a Restore
Rectangle command. upper left X X coordinate for the upper left corner of the rectangle. upper left Y Y coordinate for the upper left corner of the rectangle. save Flag indicating if rectangle's storage area can be released for use by subsequent save operations. If the 'save' flag is set then another 'restore' operation can be performed without doing a corresponding 'save'. 0 = release, 1 = save. pop-up ID ED number previously assigned to a saved rectangle. Not used except for debugging. Table XXXXIV Move Rectangle Vertically
The Move Rectangle Vertically command (Figure 50) causes the pixel contents of a specified rectangle to be copied to anotiier place in display memory, effectively moving the rectangle on the screen. Only vertical moves are handled by this command. Rectangles are scrolled up or down one line at a time until die specified scroll size has been achieved. Further details are provided in Table XXXXV.
Field Description cmd type Command ID number = 6 identifying this as a Move
Rectangle Vertically command, upper left X X coordinate for the upper left corner of the rectangle, upper left Y Y coordinate for the upper left corner of the rectangle, widtii Rectangle size in pixels along the X axis. height Rectangle size in pixels along the Y axis. scroll size Number of pixels to shift the rectangle per move operation.
Negative numbers mean shift the rectangle to a position 'scroll size' pixels higher on the screen. Positive numbers mean shift the rectangle lower on the screen. delay Number of horizontal sync pulses to count before starting the next single line scroll operation. Provides some scroll rate control for the Database Engine. Table XXXXV Write ASCII String Output an ASCII string to the screen. Starting coordinates for the first character of the string correspond to die character's upper left corner. Successive characters are on a horizontal line until an ASCII carriage return character is encountered; subsequent characters are output 'delta Y' (as specified in the Set Graphics Defaults command for each font) pixels lower on the screen and restarting at the original X coordinate. Illegal characters cause a "?" to be output in their place. Characters can be output in one of two fonts. Only upper case characters are supported in die large font. Further details are provided in Figure 51 and Table XXXXVI.
Field Description cmd type Command ID number — 7 identifying this as a Write ASCII
String command, font Identifies which of two fonts should be used for each character in the string. 0= small font, 1 = large font, start X X coordinate for the upper left corner of the first character in the line, start Y Y coordinate for the upper left corner of the first character in the line, text color 1,2 Color ID numbers for the pixels mat form characters. (Only the lower nibble is used - characters are not dithered.) ASCII string String of ASCII characters to be output. Output stops when a
NULL is found.
Table XXXXVI Draw Channel Icon
Draws a channel icon at specified coordinates. Coordinates for the icon represent the upper left corner of a rectangle that would exactly contain die icon if it held a 1 or 2 character channel name These coordinates must be adjusted if the 'ASCII channel name' field is longer than 2 characters In this case, the IOP must decrement the X coordinate sent in the command by 3 * (channel name lengtiι-1). An empty channel icon is drawn if the channel name string has no characters in it (i.e., an empty icon of 1-2 character size if byte 5 = 0). Further details are provided in Figure 52 and Table XXXXVII.
Field Description cmd type Command ID number = 8 identifying this as a Draw
Channel Icon command. upper left X X coordinate for upper left corner of the icon. upper left Y Y coordinate for upper left corner of the icon. fill colorl ,2 Color ID numbers for the fill colors inside die channel icon. text colorl ,2 Color ID numbers for the text in the channel icon and for the outline of die icon. ASCII chan name 0 to 4 characters to be used for labeling inside die channel icon. May be a name such as "SHOW", "G3-24", "RESET", "CNN" or a channel number such as "7" or "135".
Field has a NULL terminator; i.e. byte = 0 after last character of the name. If this string is of length 0 (i.e. first . byte of this field = 0) tiien an empty icon is drawn. Table XXXXVII Examples of channel icons are shown in Figures 53A-53C. • Disable Transparent Color
The Disable Transparent Color command (Figure 54) specifies that no color code number represents transparent pixels. This command is used to indicate when no color should be transparent and should be sent each time a full screen display is drawn. Further details are as follows: Field Description cmd type Command ID number = 9 identifying this as a Disable
Transparent Color command. Network Data Acquisition and Control Interface System data is received via the PBS network, MTV, Showtime or other transmission source on one or more Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI) lines. The I/O Processor acquires data from each line (if there are multiple lines) and stores it into separate input buffers. Data is stored in the IOP's input buffers even if the framing code is bad for a given field. In this case, two bytes of 03s are stored. The data is only transferred to die Database Engine Processor if the command packet contains at least one command tiiat requires a response.
When responding to a Database Engine request, the I/O Processor transfers as many bytes as it can that is less than or equal to die number of requested data bytes. If an input buffer becomes full, the I/O Processor begins dumping the data until the buffer is emptied or a reset is issued. A full buffer causes the 'ovfl' flag to be set in the next response it sends to die Database Engine.
The I/O Processor can handle up to 2 VBI lines of system data or one line of system data and closed caption data from line 21. Data is always acquired from both fields for each system data VBI line. Closed caption data is also acquired from both fields.
The I/O Processor responds witiiin 10 milliseconds to any command tiiat requires a response. Stop VBI
The Stop VBI command (Figure 55) causes the I/O Processor to initialize its internal variables related to VBI processing. All VBI buffer counters are cleared and. any acquired data is lost. VBI data acquisition is stopped until a Set VBI Control Parameters or a Flush VBI Buffer command is received. Further details are as follows:
Field Description cmd type Command ID number = 16 identifying this as a Stop VBI command. Set VBI Control Parameters The Set VBI Control Parameters command (Figure 56) allows the Database Engine to specifiy parameters that control the acquisition of VBI data. This command (or a Flush VBI Buffer command) must be issued after a Stop VBI command in order to enable VBI data acquisition.
Parameters must be sent for all VBI lines (maximum of two lines). Each new Set VBI Control Parameters command replaces all previous parameters.
Parameters must be ordered by line number with the lowest VBI line first. Further details are provided in Table XXXXVIII. Field Description cmd type Command ID number = 17 identifying this as a Set VBI Control Parameters command. nbr lines Number of VBI lines to use for acquiring system data.
VBI line 1 Primary VBI line number whose data is to be acquired, fram code 1 Framing code to be used for VBI line 1. rate 1 Data rate for VBI line 1. 0 = Telecaption rate (2 bytes per line), 1 = full rate (33 data bytes per line).
VBI line 2 Additional VBI line numbers (if any) whose data is to be acquired. Not present if only one VBI line to be processed. Maximum of 2 VBI lines. rate 2 Data rate for VBI line 2. Not present if 'nbr lines' field =
1. 0 = Telecaption rate (2 bytes per line), 1 = full rate (33 data bytes per line), fram code 2 Framing code to be used for VBI line x. Not present if 'nbr lines' = 1.
Table XXXXVIII Read VBI Statos
The Read VBI Statos command (Figure 57) causes the I/O Processor to retorn statos information on the specified VBI line buffer. Further details are provided in Table XXXXEX.
Field Description cmd type Command ID number = 18 identifying this as a Read VBI
Statos command. VBI line VBI line number whose statos is being requested. =0 means retorn statos for all active VBI lines.
Statos returned is formated as shown in Figure 58 and further described in Table L: Field Description
VBI line VBI line number whose status is being retorned. 'VBI line'
= 0 means a statos request was made for a VBI line that d e IOP is not collecting data for; i.e., an illegal VBI line number was received in the command that generated this response. (Lines for which data is collected are set with a Set VBI Control Parameters command.) nbr unread bytes Number of data bytes in buffer for 'VBI line' that have not yet been read by the Database Engine. A value of 255 for this field indicates tiiat the IOP has at least 255 bytes available, ovfl Flag indicating VBI buffer has overflowed since last read request (i.e., I/O Processor had to drop some VBI data since the buffer was full of unread bytes). 0 = no overflow, 1 = overflow occurred, rate Data rate for this VBI line. 0 = Telecaption rate, 1 = full rate. Table L Read VBI Buffer
The Read VBI Buffer command (Figure 59) causes the I/O Processor to retorn a specified number of data bytes from the buffer for the specified VBI line. Data is retorned in first in, first out order. The number of data bytes actually returned will be less than or equal to the requested number of bytes. Further details are provided in Table LI. Field Description cmd type Command ID number = 19 identifying diis as a Read VBI Buffer command. read again Flag indicating that the last Read VBI Buffer command should be repeated using die same parameters in effect at that time (i.e. repeat the last Read VBI Buffer command). If this bit is set then the 'VBI line' and 'nbr bytes' fields will not be present in the command. 0 = read using parameters specified in this command, 1 = read using last specified parameters. VBI line VBI line number whose data is being requested, nbr bytes Maximum number of data bytes to be retorned. If more bytes are requested than exist in tiie buffer then the number in the buffer will be retorned. If die buffer is empty then a single byte VBI Data Response is retorned (i.e., only byte 0 in Figure 60) indicating that no data is available. Data returned has the format of Figure 60. Further details are provided in Table LII. Field Description err flg Flag indicating if an error occurred since die last VBI access command. Database Engine should do a Read VBI Statos to get error information. 0 = no error occurred, 1 = had error since last VBI access. The error flag is not cleared until a Read VBI Statos command is done.
VBI line VBI line number whose statos is being retorned. data byte Successive data bytes from the buffers for the given VBI line.
Bytes are retorned in first in, first out (FIFO) order. Number of bytes returned will be less tiian or equal to the number of requested data bytes. No data bytes are returned if the buffer is empty.
Table LII Flush VBI Buffer
The Flush VBI Buffer command causes the I/O Processor to either transfer all existing data in a given VBI buffer or to reset VBI processing for a given VBI line without stopping data acquisition. VBI processing is re-enabled with the parameters sent in the last Set VBI Parameters command. This command re-enables VBI processing that had been suspended due to a Stop VBI command.
If data is transferred tiien it is retorned in the same response format as for a Read VBI Buffer command. Further details are provided in Table LIII. Field Description cmd type Command ID number = 20 identifying this as a Flush VBI Buffer command. clr flg Flag indicating whether remaining data should be transferred or not. 0 = don't transfer remaining data - just reset both buffers, 1 = transfer any existing data (up to 255 bytes) and tiien reset both buffers. VBI line VBI line number that is being flushed. 'VBI line' = 0 means flush all VBI buffers. This field is ignored if non-zero and in concatenated VBI data transfer mode.
Reception Groups A Reception Group (or RG) is a named entity which has an associated
Channel Lineup. There are three broad categories of Reception Groups: Broadcast,
Cable and Satellite. Examples of these are shown in Table LIV:
Type of RG Name Description
Broadcast: "SF BAY" all channels receivable via VHF or UHF antennas in the San Francisco Bay Area
Cable: "TCI, Fremont, all channels receivable by subscribers to the
CA" TCI Fremont cable system
Satellite: "TVRO North all channels receivable in North America via America" Home Satellite antenna Table LIV Some RGs, and certainly Cable RGs, will have information associated witii tiiem which is of interest, and may be helpful in marketing and other operations. Some examples of such information are: Name of Contact Telephone Number FAX Number ADI DMA
Each StarSight Subscriber Unit is considered to be a "member", so to speak, of one and only one RG. When it is first put into operation, the SU must be informed as to which RG it is in, so that it will display die Lineup which is true for that RG. Lineup Explanation
A Lineup is die actual list of channels that are received in a particular RG. In fact at any given time, there is a one-to-one mapping of RGs and active Lineups: for every RG there is one and only one active Lineup, and for every active Lineup there is one and only one RG. It is possible tiiat two RGs could sometimes have identical lists of channels received; it is equally possible diat one list could be changed while die otiier does not. For this reason, each Lineup is RG-specific. A Lineup can usually be thought of as a description of information that could be obtained by viewing a physical geographic map (a map that shows coverage of TV stations and cable systems, that is); it contains information about which channels are available in the physical area that die Lineup covers. The purpose of a Lineup is to define what channels in a given RG need to be supported widi data.
Because of the well defined physical area of cable TV and broadcast TV, the viewable channels that a TV viewer located in tiiat area would be able to receive are well known. These channels make up a Lineup, which is required so as to know what listings data to transmit for a given RG.
It is possible for multiple LINEUP maps to cover the same area or overlap. An example of this might be two neighbors with one receiving TV via a home antenna and the other getting his from cable. In this case the cable subscriber would be in a different RG than his non-cabled neighbor since he would be receiving more / different channels from his cable. In the above case the StarSight data destined for both RG's is delivered from one PBS station and each SU listens for the data defined in its SU Lineup. In die case of broadcast TV a given RG could contain from one to dozens of channels and could include weak stations tiiat are found in the fringe areas. In the case of a cable system the Lineup is very well defined and is die same for all subscribers in tiiat cable system. The Lineup for satellite viewers is fairly constant for all viewers throughout the USA with the possibility of some differences between the east coast and the west coast but is more likely to be just one group covering all of the continental USA. File Layout Specifications Station List
The Station List is made up of records witii each record identifying and describing die essential characteristics of one broadcast station or satellite feed.
To deal witii unedited stations or repeater stations, a field is used to specify where, if anywhere, the station's schedule information is obtained. If the station is not currently edited, die value in this field is set to zero; if the schedule information is being provided using a different Station ID (in other words, this station is a repeater), then this field will contain the ID of the other station; if the station is handled normally (schedule is edited and data is provided under this ID), diis field is left empty.
The Station List is required to contain an entry corresponding to every station or feed for which the vendor supplies data to StarSight, regardless of whetiier that feed is present in any Lineup supplied by die vendor to StarSight. This is because
StarSight sometimes identifies a need for data for a station, due to a show or test. In a case like this StarSight might internally generate a lineup containing this station, and just ask the vendor to supply die schedule information.
In general, the vendor should be supplying data to StarSight for all regularly scheduled stations and feeds in the USA, as well as certain designated local-origination feeds; die Station List must contain an entry identifying each one of tiiese, an entry for each alias for any of these, and an entry for every feed which appears in any lineup supplied by die vendor to StarSight. Other fields give die station Call Letters or satellite feed's name, the usual abbreviation for the name, effective date and expiration date (for dealing witii Call Letter changes). Lineup List The Lineup List is made up of two types of records: RG Records
Each RG record explains the details about one RG, such as contact names, location, type of service, daylight saving time observed etc. Lineup Records Each Lineup record describes one of the channels received by die RG. The union of all the currently-effective records describing channels in a given RG comprises the Lineup for that RG. There may also be records which are not currently effective, either because the date they become effective is in the future, or because the date on which they ceased to be effective is in the past. Each record contains sufficient information to unambiguously identify die RG and channel it applies to, and (along with knowledge of die current date) to determine whetiier or not it is currently effective. It also contains information which allows the construction of composite channels.
The Lineup List can be updated incrementally by transmitting a Lineup List Update, consisting of only the Lineups for RGs that have been modified since die last time the full Lineup List was transmitted. Note that any time a given RG's Lineup is updated, it must be updated in full; that is: a Lineup List Update may update only some of the RGs, but any RG which has its updated must be updated by transmitting all the lineup information for that RG. Probable usage would be for the full Lineup List to be transmitted weekly, and a Lineup List Update, transmitted daily. File Naming Conventions
Filenames for the Station and Lineup lists shall be assigned as follows: Base name of each file shall consist of six characters signifying year, month and day; basename shall be separated from a suffix by a period, and die suffix shall denote which type of file, according to Table LV below: Basename. Suffix Type of File Examples yymmdd.STD Station List Daily file 940130.STD yymmdd.LUW Lineup Weekly file 940519.LUW yymmdd.LUD Lineup List Update 941121.LUD yymmdd.TRD TVRO Lineup File 931225.TRD
Table LV File content
These files will contain records made up of ASCII text in the range of 20 to 7E hex inclusive. The only exception to this is the end of record terminator 0A hex, . an ASCII Line Feed. File Transfer The Station and Lineup files are pipe-delimited-format (PDF) ASCII files comprised of newline-terminated records. These files are to be transferred to StarSight electronically. Composite Channels
The issue of composite channels is handled tiirough the Lineup. If a single tunable channel routinely airs programming from more than one programming source, it is then known as a composite channel. (Example: A cable channel #41 might show VH1 for part of the day and HBO for another part of the day, etc.)
The Lineup will deal widi diis by assigning each of die feeds tiiat go into die composite to die same "tone" channel. The start and stop times can then be used to determine what data to compile for that composite.
Composite channels are seldom seen on broadcast TV or on Satellite TV but are quite normal for a cable provider. Station List
Each record in the Station List file is comprised of the fields defined in Table LVI. Each field is delimited from the next with an ASCII "pipe" (7C hex) character. Fields witii a specified default size of 0 may be left empty if no data is available; fields with a nonzero minimum size are mandatory. Note: to inform StarSight that an entry of the Station List is being deleted, a Station List record is transmitted containing data in the the "Station ID" and "Last Modified Date/Time" fields, with all other fields empty. This signals StarSight to stop doing the internal processing associated with this Station. Station List Record Format Field # Field Name Field Size Description
MIN MAX Station ID 12 12 The 12 digit I.D. number of this Station or feed.
Station Type 0=Full Power
Broadcast
1 =Low Pwr TV Station
2= Satellite Feed
3 = Locally-originated
4= other
5= unknown
Call Letters or Feed 0 Call Letters or usual Name name (must fit in 8 characters!): e.g.,HBO-WEST
Usual Abbreviation of 1 (applies mostly to Name satellite feeds: must fit in at most 4 characters!) e.g. HBO
Explanation of Name 0 120 Fully-descriptive name of the feed (generally applies to satellite feeds).
Native Channel 13 Leave empty for locally-originated
Stations; broadcast channel when received by antenna; for Satellite cable feeds:
Sat Type, Satellite,
Transponder, Channel 7. Affiliation 20 Network affiliation, if any.
Schedule Data Source 0 12 if left empty: schedule data is provided using die ID supplied in field
1
0 = > no data provided for this station any other = = ID of schedule data source
Last Modified Date/ 10 10 yymmddhhmm
Time
10. Effective Date/Time 10 10 yymmddhhmm 11. Expiration Date/Time 0 10 yymmddhhmm 12. Comments 0 300
END of 0A hex and/or 0D hex Line Feed and/or Carriage Retorn RECORD
Table LVI A detailed description of die station list record format is provided in Table
LVII. Field # Name 1. Station ID (12 numeric)
Unique ID number assigned by vendor. This ID is used to identify die station or feed wherever this is required.
2. Station Type (empty, or 1 byte, numeric)
0=Full Power Broadcast
1 =Low Pwr TV Station
2= Satellite Feed
3 = Locally -originated
4= other
5= unknown
Call Letters or Feed Name (up to 8 alphanumeric) StarSight requires that no more than 8 characters be used to identify die Station or Feed.
4. Usual Abbreviation of Name (1 to 4 alphanumeric)
Note: 4 characters, maximum! If there is a well-known abbreviation, supply it here. Most cable subs don't tiiink about East- and West- coast feeds, so HBO- WEST would generally be abbreviated as just HBO for cable subs.
5. Explanation of Name (up to 120 bytes)
Give e fully-expanded name, if different from above. For example, if Field 3 contains "YOUTH" and Field 4 contains "YTV", Field 5 might contain "Youth Television".
6. Native Channel (up to 13 bytes, alphanumeric)
For broadcast and LPTV stations, this field would contain just a number. For satellite feeds, supply a comma-separated list tiiat describes: Type of Satellite (C or Ku), which satellite (usually a letter and a number, like G5), which transponder (a number), and if necessary which channel within a transponder (required when, for example, 10 compressed channels are available on a transponder). This field should contain data if the "Station Type" field contains 0, 1, or 2; it may be empty if "Station Type" is 3, 4, or 5.
Super Stations such as WTBS, WGN and WWOR deserve special consideration. In their home markets, these stations are just normal broadcast stations with normal broadcast Native channel numbers; but when received from satellite, the Native channel number must refer to a satellite and transponder. This is to be handled by using two separate Station IDs to refer to the two distinct usages of tiiese stations. If the schedule information is the same for both, this can be indicated by having one record give the other "Station ID" in the "Schedule Data Source" field. 7. Affiliation (up to 20 characters)
Which network(s), or IND, or empty if unknown 8. Schedule Data Source (up to 12 numeric) if left empty: schedule data is provided using the ID given in field 1 0 = > no data provided for this station any other = = ID of schedule data source 9. Last Modified Date/Time (10 numeric)
The last time any field was modified. 10. Effective Date/Time (10 numeric)
GMT Date/Time this record became or will become effective. Used to specify Station information which is either current, or is not yet true, but will become true at a known futore date and time, such as a change of name or Call Letters. This field specifies die date and time die information did or will become effective. -
11. Expiration Date/Time (up to 10 numeric)
GMT Date/Time this record did or will expire. Similar to the preceding field, this field specifies a futore date and time when mis piece of Station information (e.g., Call Letters) will cease to be in effect.
12. Comments (up to 300 bytes)
Whatever might be useful in assuring the channel or feed is unambiguously identified.
Table LVII
An example of a station list record is given in Table LVTII.
Field # Field Name Sample Data
1. Station ID 140032965
2. Station Type 2
3. Call Letters or Feed Name CARTOON
4. Usual Abbreviation of Name TCN
5. Explanation of Name The Cartoon Network
6. Native Channel Ku,Gl,8
7. Affiliation
8. Schedule Data Source
9. Last Modified Date/Time 9309170930
10. Effective Date/Time 9309170930
11. Expiration Date/Time 12. Comments eh-Th-eh, eh-Th-eh, eh-Th-That's All, Folks! END of RECORD (END of RECORD)
Table LVII A record containing the data described above is as follows:
140032965 j 21 CARTOON j TCN | The Cartoon
Network JKu,Gl,8 | j 19309170930193091709301 j eh-Th-eh, eh-Th-eh, eh-Th-That's . All, Folks! I (END of RECORD) The Lineup List The Lineup database will contain one record for each currently -effective channel in each RG, and may also contain a futore lineup for each RG. A "channel" is any seperately -scheduled feed. Composite channels are described using a separate record for each part of the composite.
Certain conventions must be observed, in order to minimize StarSight's processing burden:
1. Each field is delimited from the next with an ASCII "pipe" (7C hex) character. Fields witii a specified default size of 0 may be left empty if no data is available; fields witii a nonzero minimum size are mandatory. 2. To inform StarSight that an RG is being deleted, a normal-looking
RG record is transmitted, except tiiat it contains a 0 in the "Lineup Record Count" field, as well as a specific Date/Time for expiration, in the "Expiration Date/Time" field; all otiier fields should be formatted as per this specification. This signals StarSight to stop doing die internal processing associated witii this RG, as of the specified Date/Time. Note: due to die delay inherent in processing this type information, it is not a good idea to reuse this RG number to identify a new RG. To assure no problems of this natore, RG numbers should not be reused at all. 3. A lineup must always be described in its entirety, with an RG record immediately followed by all die Lineup records associated witii this RG. 4. When there is both a current and a futore lineup defined for an RG, the current information is transmitted first, with an RG record having the earlier of the two effective dates, followed by all die current lineup records; then another RG record having an effective date in the futore followed by all die lineup records for the futore lineup.
5. If any Lineup data is provided for a given RG, the entire Lineup (including all currently-effective and all scheduled-to-become-effective data) for that RG must be provided.
6. All die records which deal witii a given RG must be contiguous in the file; e.g., it is not allowed to have records that deal with RG 100, then RG 101, then again with RG 100, in the same file.
7. Lineup information is to be sorted in ascending order on die following key values: a. RG number b. Effective Date c. Source d. Tune Channel .
8. It is possible to explicitly schedule an "Expiration Date/Time" for the information in a given lineup, by providing mis information in die optional field of diis name in die RG record.
9. Any change to any record of a Lineup must be reflected by updating the "Lineup Info Last Date/Time Modified" field in the RG record for that lineup.
10. Note that there is not a field in the Lineup record for a "Last Date/Time Modified": this is handled by updating the "Lineup Info
Last Date/Time Modified" field in the RG record; an update of the "Lineup Info Last Date/Time Modified" field implies that the entire Lineup for that RG has been updated and verified.
11. Note tiiat there is not a field in the Lineup record for "Effective Date/Time": this is handled by updating the "Effective Date/Time" field in the RG record; the value of the "Effective Date/Time" field implies that the entire list of Lineup records that follow this RG record will become effective (or did become effective) on that Date and Time. RG record format is shown in Table LVIII. Field # Field Name Field Size Description
MIN MAX
1. Record Type 1 1 "R" =normal RG "S" = Satellite.
Lineup Record Count 1 4 Decimal # of Lineup records to follow.
RG number 8 8 (The 8 digit I.D. number of this RG)
4. RG group type 1 1 0= broadcast 1,2, 3, 4= cable
5=satellite(TVRO)
5. RG name / 0 120 Unique name of this
Satellite Name Reception Group (if cable, name of headend)
Cable System name / 0 120 (if cable, name of
Satellite Abbreviation system)
MSO name / Sat 0 120 (if cable, name of
Operator MSO)
8. Contact name(s) 0 120
9. Contact tel number 0 20
10. Street Address 0 120
11. City 0 120
12. State 0 2
13. ZIP 0 10
14. DMA Name / Sat 0 120 (DMA)
Orbit Pos
15. DMA Rank 0 3 (DMA Rank) 16. ADI Name 0 120
17. ADI Rank 0 3 18. Communities Served 0 300 19. Comments 0 300 20. RG General Info 10 10 yymmddhhmm
Last Modified Date/Time
21. RG Lineup Info 10 10 yymmddhhmm
Last Modified Date/Time
22. Effective Date/Time 10 10 GMT Date/Time this record became or will become effective.
23. Expiration Date/Time 0 10 GMT Date/Time this record will or did expire.
END of RECORD 0A hex and/or 0D hex Line Feed and/or Carriage Retorn
Table LVIII RG Field explanation Field/.
1. Record Type (1 byte)
This field must always contain one of the uppercase ASCII characters "R" or "S", to specify that this record is an RG record. If Record Type is "S", then die record is being used to describe a particular Satellite, and die meanings of certain fields are redefined (see details below). Botii record types have the same number of fields, but several fields will always be empty when Record Type = "S".
2. Lineup Record Count (1 - 4 bytes)
The decimal number of Lineup records tiiat follow this record; tiiat is: the number of following records used to completely define die Lineup of diis RG.
3. RG number (8 bytes)
This number is the unique 8 decimal digit ID of diis RG. RG numbers must not be re-assigned: once an RG number has been assigned, it may eventually pass out of usage (say, because a company goes out of business); but even in this case, its RG Number should not be reused. 4. RG group type (1 byte)
The Lineup type defines what type of service this RG is targeted for: 0=Broadcast TV, this is a conventional TV channel RG. 1 = Standard cable system , this is a conventional cable frequency plan. 2= IRC cable system (IRC is a modified cable frequency plan.)
3=HRC cable system, (HRC is another modified cable frequency plan). 4= Cable System, Frequency Plan Unknown 5= Satellite
5. RG Name (if Record Type="R") (up to 120 bytes) Satellite Name (if Record Type="S")
Use a verbose description of up to 120 characters to describe the RG or Satellite as unambiguously as possible. If a cable RG, use the MSO Name field if appropriate; RG Name should uniquely identify an entity that can have its own lineup. For example, each headend of a cable system can have its own lineup, so each headend should have a name which is somehow unique, even if it is only a unique number, or a unique combination of die Cable System Name with a number.
6. Cable System Name (if Record Type = "R") (up to 120 bytes) Satellite Abbreviation (if Record Type = "S") If cable, this may be a system operated by a Multiple System Operator
(MSO). If so, give the name commonly used in die community to identify this cable system. If satellite, give the usual letter/number combination used to refer to this satellite, such as G3 for Galaxy 3.
7. MSO Name (if Record Type = "R") (up to 120 bytes) Satellite Operator (if Record Type = "S")
If cable, this may be a system operated by a Multiple System Operator (MSO). If so, name the MSO. If satellite, name the operator of the satellite.
8. RG local contact (0 to 120 bytes)
Name of a local contact person at the cable company. 9. Contact Telephone Number (up to 20 bytes)
Number of a local contact person at the cable company. 10. Street Address (up to 120 bytes)
Street address of a local contact person at the cable company. 11. City (up to 120 bytes)
Name of the city where contact is located.
12. State (0 to 2 bytes, alpha)
This is the US Postal Service's 2-character abbreviation for the state. 13. ZIP (0 to 10 bytes)
The ZIP code is formatted as 5-bytes, dash, 4-bytes. Quite often only the first 5 bytes are available.
14. DMA Name (if Record Type = "R") (up to 120 bytes) Orbit Position (if Record Type = "S") What name does Nielsen use to refer to the DMA within which this RG lies?
15. DMA Rank (always empty when Record Type = "S") (3 bytes, numeric) What is the Nielsen DMA Rank for the DMA witiiin which this RG lies?
16. ADI Name (always empty when Record Type = "S") (up to 120 bytes) What name does Arbitron use to refer to die ADI witiiin which diis RG lies?
17. ADI Rank (always empty when Record Type = "S") (3 bytes, numeric)
What is the Arbitron ADI Rank for the ADI within which this RG lies?
18. Communities Served (empty when Record Type = "S") (up to 300 bytes)
Comma-separated list of towns, cities, communities, neighborhoods, districts or boroughs served by diis RG. The list should be as succinct and correct as possible, but should err, if at all, on the side of including too many, rather than too few, names. 19. Comments (up to 300 bytes)
Any special information that might help to distinguish this RG from others nearby, or anything else the person doing data entry feels is important for StarSight to be aware of, especially as it relates to trying to identify which RG a new subscriber is in. 20. RG General Info Last Modified Date/Time (10 bytes, numeric) GMT Date and Time this record was last modified: format yymmddhhmm;For example: 9307110514. 21. RG Lineup Info Last Modified Date/Time (10 bytes, numeric) GMT Date and Time any Lineup information associated witii this RG was last modified: format yymmddhhmm; For example: 9307110514. Note: the value "0000000000" is reserved, and has die special meaning: "No Lineup available for this RG". 22. Effective Date/Time (10 numeric)
GMT Date/Time the following lineup became or will become effective. Used to specify lineup information which is either current, or is not yet effective, - but will become effective at a known futore date and time. This field specifies the date and time the information did or will become effective.
23. Expiration Date/Time (empty, or 10 numeric)
GMT Date/Time this record did or will expire. Similar to the preceding field, this field specifies a future date and time when this piece of lineup information will cease to be in effect. The Date/Time specified is assumed to be non-inclusive of the final minute, meaning that the lineup expires at the beginning of this minute, not the end. An example of an RG record is provided in Table LIX:
Field# Field Name Sample Data
1. Record Type R
2. Lineup Record Count 20
3. RG number 12345
4. RG group type 1
5. RG name 12345
6. Cable System name Megacable of Fremont.
7. MSO name Megacable Conglomerates, Inc.
8. Contact name(s) Bob Engineer
9. Contact tel number (510) 555-1212
10. Street Address 2020 Main Street
11. City Fremont
12. State CA
13. ZIP 94538
14. DMA Name San Francisco Bay Area
15. DMA Rank 5 16. ADI Name San Francisco Bay Area
17. ADI Rank 5
18. Communities Served Fremont, Union City, Sunol
19. Comments Sunol is closer to Dublin, but is on this cable system.
20. RG General Info 9307060841
Last Modified Date/Time
21. RG Lineup 9307060841
Last Modified Date/Time
22. Effective Date/Time 9307060841 23. Expiration Date/Time
END of RECORD \x0A hex
Table LIX
A sample record containing the data specified above is as follows:
R j 20 j 12345 ] 1 j 12345 j Megacable of Fremont. | Megacable Conglomerates, Inc. I Bob Engineer j (510) 555-1212 j 2020 Main
Street j Fremont ] CA j 94538 j San Francisco Bay Area j 5 j San Francisco Bay Area J5 J Fremont, Union City, Sunol j Sunol is closer to Dublin, but is on this cable system. 19307060841 j 9307060841 j 9307060841 j jENDOF RECORD
The lineup record format is shown below in Table LX.
Field # Field Name Field Size Description
MIN MAX
1. Record Type 1 1 "L" for normal lineups; "T" for Satellite TVRO lineups
2. RG number 8 8 (The 8 digit I.D. number of this RG file)
3. Tuneable channel 1 3 (channel /. or letter)
4. Source 0 1 If multiple signal sources are used, which is selected for this channel? If there is only 1 signal source, this field should be left empty. Channel ID # 12 12 Must be a valid Station ID number from the Station List file
6. Channel Type 1 1 0=not identified 1 = Basic, 2= Extended Basic, 3= Premium, 4= PPV
7. Days 0 7 These numbers are single bytes with die 'following meaning:
1 = Sunday
2 = Monday
3 = Tuesday
4 = Wednesday
5 = Thursday
6 = Friday
7 = Saturday
For non-composite channels, this field should be left empty.
8. Start Time 4 4 GMT Hour/Minute
9. Stop Time 4 4 GMT Hour/Minute
12. End of Record 0 0A. Hex and/ ASCII Linefeed and/or or 0D Hex Carriage Retorn Character Table LX
A detailed description of the lineup record is as follows:
Record Type (1 byte)
"R" = normal Lineup Record; "T" = Satellite TVRO Lineup Record.
RG Number (8 numeric)
This is the same number used to identify the Reception Group in the RG record.
Tunable channel (1 to 3 bytes)
This is the channel you would tone to in order to receive this programming.
It is the cable channel number or letter for the cable system (when Record Type="L"), or the transponder number for TVRO (Record Type= "T"). If two or more records have die same tone channel then this is a composite channel.
4. Source (empty if Record Type = "T") Some cable systems have the capability to select among two or more separate cables; specify which cable (A. B, ..) to use, if this is such a system. Leave empty if this is a single-source system.
5. Channel ID (12 bytes)
This is the unique number used to identify die schedule information for this channel. It refers to one of the stations defined in die -Station List, using its unique Station ID.
6. Channel Type (1 numeric)
What kind of channel is this (applies to cable and TVRO lineups): a. = Don't know 1 = Basic
2 = Extended Basic
3 = Premium
4 = PPV b. .. can be assigned meanings at vendor's request 7. Days (0 to 7 bytes)
These are the days in which data from this feed is used. For non composite channels the days would be 1234567. For the non-composite case, since this is by far the most common case, leaving the field empty shall be defined to be equivalent to specifying all 7 days. Any combination of up to 7 days can be specified in this field.
These numbers are single bytes with the following meaning:
1 = Sunday 2 = Monday
3= Tuesday 4 = Wednesday
5= Thursday 6 = Friday 7= Saturday
Thus a "Days" field of 257 specifies the days Monday, Thursday and
Saturday. 8. Start Time (4 bytes) This is the starting time (GMT) at which data from this channel should be used. For a non-composite channel the start time will always be 0000 hours GMT.
9. Stop Time (4 bytes) This is the stop time (GMT) for data from this station. For a non-composite channel the stop time will always be 0000 hours GMT. The Date/Time specified is assumed to be non-inclusive of the final minute, meaning that die lineup expires at the beginning of this minute, not the end.
10. End of Record ASCII Linefeed (0A Hex) and or Carriage Retorn (0D hex).
Example: Lineup involving Current and Future data for a two-cable system:
The fictitious lineup below illustrates a system that uses only two channels on each of two cables, for which there exist both a current and a futore lineup. The data are sorted as described above; diat is die currently-effective information for source A is given first (sorted in ascending order by tuned channel number), followed by die currently -effective information for source B, then tiie future information for source A, and finally die futore information for source B. The record in boldface is die only record tiiat is actually different between the two lineups; channel 2 on Cable B is being reassigned. Note, however, that die futore lineup is given in its entirety. R j 4 j 00000010141 TUCSON CABLEVISION j TUCSON
CABLEVISION | INTERMEDIA PARTNERS j CATHY j (602)629-8470 j 1440E
15TH
ST I TUCSON j AZ j 85719-64951 j | j j 931000000019310000000 j 9308010400 j 9401150
L 00000010 A11003952111 j1234567J0J01 j L 00000010 Aj10042895111123456710J0[ L 00000010 Bj503409j111234567]0101 L 00000010 B}935348911112345671010j R 4100000010 4 j TUCSON CABLEVISION | TUCSON CABLEVISION j INTERMEDIA PARTNERS j CATHY j (602)629-8470 j 1440 E
15TH STjTUCSONjAZj85719-6495j | | j j931000000019310000000j94011504001 | Lj0000001012jA110039521 j111234567j0101 Lj00000010j31Aj1004289511 j123456710j0j L I 00000010 ' I I 2 _. I I B _- I I 0 U415J0U97804.J5 I i 11 I i 1 _2_.3J4-.5_-6 SJ7 I I | 0U I | 0U I |
L 100000010131 B 1935348911 1 123456710101 Example: Deleting an RG
The example below illustrates how to delete the RG which was described in die preceding example, effective January 15, 1994 at 0400 GMT: R 1010000001014 j TUCSON CABLEVISION j TUCSON CABLEVISION | INTERMEDIA PARTNERS | CATHY j (602)629-8470 j 1440 E 15TH ST j TUCSON j AZ j 85719-6495 1 1 j I j 93100000001931000000019401150400194011504001 Note that this is just a normal-looking RG record, with the Expiration Date/Time filled in. Unlike die usual case, tiiere are no following Lineup Records, as indicated by the 0 in the "Lineup Record Count" field.
Glossary Of Terms The following terms are commonly used in die following description. Otiier terms not listed in diis glossary should be familiar to personnel in the listings' data industry and to personnel involved in similarly connected businesses.
CAC Community Access Channel
Channel Discrete frequency band allocated to a TV station Composite Channel Two or more PO's time sharing the programming on a single channel.
DP Data Provider, (provider of program listings' data)
Data Provider Supplier of TV program listings' data.
FIELD A sub part of a record, (records are made up of multiple fields)
GMT Greenwich Mean Time (Universal Mean Time).
HRC Cable system frequency transmission standard.
StarSight StarSight Telecast Incorporated
IRC Cable system frequency transmission standard. Local The broadcast TV station that resides within 35 miles of the cable provider.
MAP Reference to the physical area of a reception group (RG) MPAA Motion Picture Artists Association (suitability guidelines for viewers). MSO Multiple System Operator (operates more than one cable system) PO Program Originator (TV station,TV cable provider,Satellite video provider). Prime Time A segment of evening time considered as Prime Viewing
Time. Program Originator (see PO) PST Pacific Standard Time (West Coast Time).
Record A defined string of ASCII characters within a file.
RG Reception Group, The available TV channels in a well-defined geographical area.
Runtime The length in minutes of a show or movie. SSeerrvviiccee PPrroovviiddeerr The cable system head end, or Broadcast TV station that carries the StarSight program data.
Show list A file containing records in Pipe Delimited Format which contain schedule listing information as described herein.
Start Time The local time that the show begins. (hour - minute) SU Abbreviation for Subscriber Unit. Used to decode StarSight data.
SyndEx Syndicate Exclusivity TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol Specified Zone A predetermined distance or area from a broadcast station. Overview of this description
The following description defines in detail the requirements of a Data Provider in relation to delivering television listings' data to StarSight Telecast. It defines in detail the format of the Show list (pipe-delimited file). The format of each record witiiin these files are also defined. Also outlined are the details of die electronic delivery of tiiese files to
StarSight, and the requirements and details of special files that are required due to nation wide program oddities, such as SyndEx. The formats of the Show list records that are used in building die StarSight electronic database are highly integrated into our database program and these formats must not be altered or changed in any way witiiout the written consent of StarSight Telecast. Use of the Vendor-Defined Fields (see below) is allowed, provided die syntax and meanings of the fields used are documented in advance. File Transfer Specifications. File Transfer Media and Speed.
The Show list files will be transferred electronically to StarSight Telecast's UNIX file system through a router connected to die DP's Etiiernet and a digital leased line, using die standard TCP/IP program, FTP. The operating speed of the leased line will be sufficient to transfer all data files in a reasonable length of time. File Transfer Protocol and Compression.
The data will be transferred into StarSight Telecast's UNIX file system using TCP/IP file transfer protocol or other file transfer protocol standard mutoally agreed upon. The files may require compression due to the bulk of data being transferred using a mutoally agreed upon data compression algorithm compatible with our UNIX file system.
File Transfer details
The files will be transferred to StarSight on a daily basis 7 days a week with the file transfer completed by 0800 hours PST. The daily file transfer will be into the home directory corresponding to die login name used to perform the file transfer.
The "Main" file download to StarSight will always be for the date 12 days into die futore. Thus if today is die lOtii, today's data download would be for start times beginning at 0000 hours GMT on the 22nd. (see GMT specification below in this description)
Since the data files are sent on a daily basis some mechanism must be in place to allow for the updating of a program listing that has already been transferred. This is accomplished via die "Update" file. An Update file contains records of all changes tiiat have been made since die last Update file was produced, which modify any of the data for any date which is still "active". An "active" date is defined as the dates beginning witii today's date, and spanning die 11 days following (that is, all dates from today to the date covered by today's "Main" file, but not including that date. A class of service to be implemented will require "Flash Updates"; this class of service would provide a "Flash Update" file witiiin 5 minutes after entry of any change. Such files would "trickle" across die leased line to StarSight throughout the day. Show list file Introduction.
StarSight Telecast operates a data network that delivers specially formatted data to StarSight subscribers located diroughout the USA. This data is used to build an "on screen program guide" called StarSight that enables its subscribers to interactively view television program listings on their TV screen. The information for this network is derived from the StarSight database tiiat is built by a computer program running on our UNIX computer. To build this database a data provider is required to supply StarSight with program listing files called Show list files. GMT.
A Show list file is a set of chronologically ordered records of television program listings. StarSight needs Show list files witii the first record having its start time at 0000 hours GMT or for the first show starting after 0000 hours GMT. Thus the first record in each Show list file will be for the first show at or after Midnight GMT and die last record in a Show list file would be for the last show starting before 2400 hours GMT. In other words a given Main file will contain only records for all POs for one day with one day starting at 0000 GMT and ending at 2400 GMT. Conversely a Main file must contain all of the shows for all POs for that day. Daylight saving time.
Since the "Start Time" field of any Show list record is always given in terms of GMT, the data provider is cautioned that daylight saving time must be accounted for twice a year, once in the spring when daylight saving is invoked and once in die fall when returning to standard time. This time modification must take place for all program data and all PO's unless die PO resides in a non daylight saving time state or county. Daylight saving time will cause the DP to compile or transfer records into the PO file that are corrected for the 1 hour forward adjustment in spring and the 1 hour backward adjustment in fall. Please note that once showtimes have been adjusted to GMT, the Show list records should always be contiguous witii no gaps or overlaps even on Daylight
Saving transition dates.
SyndEx and Network Exclusivity Due to FCC regulations a TV cable provider is required to block out programming (at the request of the local station) that directly conflicts in both time and content widi die programming of a local broadcast TV station. This may cause the cable provider to substitute programming on that channel for the time in conflict.
StarSight must be informed of a SyndEx blockout no later than 24 hours prior to the blockout, in order to display die correct schedule for the blocked-out time slot.
Sports Blackout
Due to FCC regulations a sporting event can be blacked out from local TV coverage if a given percentage of tickets are not sold witiiin 24 hours of tiiat event.
StarSight requires knowledge of die blackout. Composite Channels
Some cable providers will divide a cable channel into multiple programming segments inserting programming from two or more program originators on one channel, at different times. The DP is required to provide StarSight with information that explains clearly what service is on such a channel at any given time. This information will be provided in die PO list for the channel in which the composite programming occurs.
The multiple PO information for composite channels is handled in die "RG
List Format Specification" explained above.
Community Access Channels The FCC requires each cable provider to support at least one Community
Access Channel (CAC) for public use. Private citizens can request program time on diis channel for their public views, public information or approved public programming.
StarSight requires a Show list file with the program information for each CAC, with the CAC Show list file name bound to die cable system name.
Low Power Stations LPTV
Low power (mostly privately owned) broadcast TV Stations exist in many areas of the United States. Some of these low power stations will require program listing support by the DP. These will be handled on a station by station basis with a Show list file for each LPTV.
The precise format in which the data for SyndEx, Network Exclusivity, Sports Blackout, Composite Channel, Community Access Channel and Low Power Stations is to be provided, is to be determined. Show list File Definition
Show list files are made up of multiple records containing television program . listings. The Show list records have a fixed number of fields. Most fields are of a fixed size with a few fields of variable size. This gives a Show list record a minimum and a maximum byte size. (See the Show list record.field definition for the exact MIN/MAX size.)
Except for the end of record terminator, 0A hex (line feed) The Show list files will contain only ASCII characters and only within the range of 20 hex to 7E hex inclusive. This precludes any control codes, new line codes or end of record codes being part of any Show list file. Show list File Names.
There are three sorts of files discussed in this description. They all have die same record format, but tiiey are used somewhat differently. They are referred to as the "Main" file, the "Update" file, and the "Flash" files for a given date. The Main file contains only the data for one particular date. It amounts to the initial load of all data for that date. The Update file contains information that revises Show list data that was provided on earlier days. It contains data which may encompass several different days, just depending on what new information has been entered. The Flash file contains update information that has just been entered. The Main filename shall consist of die letters "MAIN" followed by four digits that represent the date, then [optionally] ,a period and the suffix "DAT". For example "MAIN0812.DAT" is a valid Main filename, and so is "MAIN0812".
The Update filename shall consist of the letters "UPDT" followed by four digits tiiat represent the date, tiien [optionally] ,a period and die suffix "DAT". For example, UPDT0812.DAT is a valid Update filename, as is "UPDT0812".
Flash filenames shall consist of the letters "FLSH" followed by four digits that represent the time of day, then [optionally] ,a period and the suffix "DAT". For example, FLSH0642.DAT is a valid Update filename, as is "FLSH0642". Since interfaces to different types of computer systems are a given, the file naming convention has been chosen so as to work with virtually any computer operating system in existence. The alpha letters within filenames may be in either all uppercase or all lowercase; mixed case is not allowed. Each PO's data will have its own portion of the file, identified by identifying the PO in the first field of each record concerned witii tiiat PO. The identification number (not to exceed 12 bytes) will consist of ASCII digits 0 through 9 only, and . will be identical to the Station ID number assigned for this PO in the Station List file, which is defined in a separate document. Show list File Lengdi.
Each file will contain Show list records as defined elsewhere in this document. The file will contain as many of these records as required to fill one 24 - hour day.
Each record in a given file has a program length as defined in die "runtime" field and a "starttime" as defined in the starttime field of the Show list record. These
Start Times and runtimes will cause the content of a file to be contiguous for the 24 hour day, leaving no gaps in the time sequence.
Contiguous Files.
All "Main" file records will have contiguous Start Times and run length from day to day and week to week, etc., without any time gaps.
The Show list record format is shown in Table LXI.
Field No. FIELD NAME MAX MIN DESCRIPTION (bytes)
1. Station ID number 12 (1) Unique ID number for this PO
2. Start Date 8 (8) YYYYMMDD
3. Start Time 4 (4) Program start time: hour, minutes
4. Runtime 4 (4) Program runtime minutes 0005 to 9999
5. Close Caption 1 (1) Close caption indicator. Y, N
6. Stereo 1 (1) Program audio broadcast type.
Y, N Color 1 (1) Program video broadcast type.
C, B
8. Type 3 (3) Program Type (see table 1 , table 2)
9. Movie Number 10 (0) Up to ten decimal digits 10. Group ID 5 (5) unique series program link, 0 to 65536
11. Title 50 (0) Program title. 12. Program Descr. #1 300 (0) Program description. 13. Program Descr. #2 200 (0) Program- description . 14. Program Descr. #3 100 (0) Program description. 15. Program Descr. #4 50 (0) Program description. 16. Critique 1 (1) Movie critics rating 0,1,2,3,4 17. Episode 50 (0) Program episode description. 18. Year 4 or (0) Year the movie was produced. 19. Director 25 (0) Name of the movie director 20. Last Name of Star 1 25 (0) Last name of star in the movie. 21. First Name of Star 1 25 (0) First name of star in the movie. 22. Last Name of Star 2 25 (0) Last name of star in the movie. 23. First Name of Star 2 25 (0) First name of star in the movie. 24. Last Name of Star 3 25 (0) Last name of star in the movie. 25. First Name of Star 3 25 (0) First name of star in the movie. 26. Action (1) T, F. 27. Adventure (1) T, F. 28. Biography, Biographical 1 (1) T, F. 29. Classic, Classical (1) T, F. 30. Comedy (1) T, F. 31. Dance (1) T, F. 32. Docudrama (1) T, F. 33. Documentary (1) T, F. 34. Drama, Dramatic (1) T, F. 35. Fantasy (1) T, F. 36. Historical (1) T, F. 37. Horror 1 (1 ) T, F.
39. Martial Arts 1 (1. ) T, F.
40. Musical - (i: ) T, F.
41. Mystery i (i: ) T, F.
42. Opera i a: ) T, F.
43. Romance, Romantic (1) T, F.
44. Satire, Satirical i a; ) T, F.
45. Science I (i] T, F.
46. Science Fiction I (1) T, F.
47. Suspense I (i T, F. -
48. Thriller I CD T, F.
49. Western * (i) T, F.
50. Situation Comedy ] 1 (1) T, F.
51. G - (i) T, F.
52. NC17 ] * (i) T, F.
53. NR ] (1) T, F.
54. PG 1 (1) T, F.
55. PG 13 ] (1) T, F.
56. R 1 (1) T, F.
57. AO ] * (1) T, F.
58. PROFANITY 1 (1) T, F.
59. NUDITY 1 (1) T, F.
60. VIOLENCE 1 (1) T, F.
61. ADULT SITUATION 1 (1) T, F.
62. ADULT THEME 1 (1) T, F.
63. ADULT LANGUAGE 1 (1) T, F.
64. PPV EVENT 1 (1) T, F.
Figure imgf000140_0001
Vendor-Defined Field
2rnlldU
Vendor-Defined Field
63 -r-n nth
Vendor-defined Field END OF RECORD 1 (1) LINEFEED
('\xOA hex') Table LXI END OF RECORD markers and end of file markers will be a single LINEFEED (OA hex) and or CARRIAGE RETURN (OD hex)
Show types for general programming are shown in Table LXII:
Show Type Code Description
CHL Children's Shows
COM Comedies
DOC Documentaries
MAG Magazine
MIN Mini-Series
MOV Movies
REL Religious
GAM Game
SGN Sign Off
MUS Musicals
SER Series
SPC Specials
SRL Soaps & Serials
TLK Talk
NEW News
EXR Exercise
MIS Miscellaneous
NAT Natore
HOW How-to
MED Medical
NET Network Series
SYN Syndicated Series
BUS Business
PUB Public Affairs
LAP Local Access Programming
PDP Paid Programming EDU Education
UNK Unknown
Table LXII NOTE:
Show type designators are always of fixed 3 character length. More designators may be added as required.
Show types for sports programming are shown in Table LXIII:
SHOW DESCRIPTION SHOW I DESCRIPTION
TYPE TYPE •
CODE CODE
LSB Baseball - Live SPB Baseball
LSK Basketball -Live SPK Basketball
LSW Bowling - Live SPW Bowling
LSX Boxing - Live SPX Boxing
LBC Bicycling - Live SBC Bicycling
LSN Fishing - Live SPN Fishing
LSF Football - Live SPF Football
LSG Golf - Live SPG Golf
LSY Gymnastics - Live SPY Gymnastics
LSH Hockey - Live SPH Hockey
LSE Horse Events - Live SPE Horse Events
LSL Lacrosse - Live SPL Lacrosse
LSA Motor Sports - Live SPA Motor Sports
LSS Soccer - Live SPS Soccer
LSQ Snow Skiing - Live SPQ Snow Skiing
LST Tennis - Live SPT Tennis
LSJ Track/Field - Live SPJ Track/Field
LSP Sports Live SPO Sports
LS@ Water Sports - Live SP@ Water Sports
LSZ Wrestling - Live SPZ Wrestling
LSO Volley Ball - Live SSO Volley Ball
SP1 Sporting Shows Table LXIII NOTE:
Show type designators are always of fixed 3 character length. More designators may be added as required. Detailed Show list field class explanation.
The Show list record fields are divided into four classes. They are data fields tiiat contain the program information, the delimiter fields diat separate the data fields, die record terminators that terminate and separate the records and die end of file terminator. Explanation of the field classes.
Note that all of the fields in the following specification have a minimum and a maximum size described as bytes. Most fields are of a fixed length and must not vary from that specified length. Other fields have a variable minimum and a maximum lengdi while a few are defined as a minimum or maximum. Even if a fixed lengdi field contains no meaningful data, it must be padded out to its minimum length with die appropriate character. The maximum field lengdi must also be adhered to and no field is ever allowed to exceed its maximum lengdi. Data Field Text
The text contained in any field will contain no control codes and all fields will contain only the ASCII character set within die range of the hexadecimal values 20 to 7E inclusive. Delimiter
This one byte character is the pipe ' j ' ( PIPE ASCII 7C hex ). It separates the different fields of a Show list record, it is unique within a Show list record and will not be used anywhere else in the Show list record except as a delimiter. There are equal numbers of delimiters and data fields. The Show list records have the pattern of FIELD, DELIMITER , ., . , FIELD, DELIMITER, END OF RECORD. A delimiter follows the last data field of any record. End Of Record All records are terminated with an end of record terminator that follows the last delimiter of the last data field in a Show list record. This terminator is the ASCII code for Line Feed (0A hex), or Carriage Return (0D hex), or both together in either order. End Of File
The end of file terminator is defined to be the text string "ZZZZZEOF". The final data record of a Show list file must be followed by an End of File terminator, to signal mat all data has been transmitted. Detailed Data Field Explanation. Field if
1. Station ID
(1 to 12 bytes) The Station ID is the unique number (assigned by die data provider: see the Station List record format) used to refer to this program originator (TV station, cable channel or satellite provider). It is never greater than 10 decimal digits. No otiier characters are allowed.
2. Start Date
(8 bytes) 8 byte number describing die GMT date when die program will air. (year, month, day) This date must be the same for all records in a given file. Bytes 1 through 4 define die current year, for example: 1991.
Bytes 3 and 4 define die month, with January numbered as 01 , December as 12.
Bytes 5 and 6 display the day of die month from 01 to 31.
3. Start Time (4 bytes) 4 byte number is the program air time GMT and is entered as military time.
Bytes 1 and 2 are the hour in GMT time that the program will air. (Example 6am = 06, noon = 12,
6pm = 18, midnight = 00)
Bytes 3 and 4 are the minute diat the program will air. (Example one MIN past the hour =01, 1 minute before the hour =59) 4. Runtime
(4 bytes) Program length in minutes. The minimum show run time length is 0005 minutes and the maximum length is 9999 minutes. (The StarSight data base program breaks shows with runtimes greater than 240 minutes into multiple shows of 240 minute lengths.) Runtime data is shown in Table LXIII.
Field Name Field# Sample Data
Station ID 1 5963215
Start Date 2 991231
Start Time 3 0900
Run Time 4 0060 Table LXIII
Sample Fragment of the above Show list record fields.
5963215 | ] i J991231 | 0900 | 0060 |
Field #
5. Closed Caption
(1 byte) If the show is closed captioned this field will be a "Y" (yes). If not it will be "N" (no).
6. Stereo
(1 byte) If the show is in stereo this field will be a "Y" (yes). If not it will be "N" (no).
7. Color (1 byte) If the show is in color this field will be a "C" (color). If not it will be "B" (black & white).
8. Type
(3 bytes) mnemonic, indicating the program type indicating movie, sports, news, talk show, etc. (See Tables LXI and LXII)
9. Movie Number
(0 to 10 decimal digits) This unique number is provided by the data provider as a unique number for a show and is different for the title of every show or movie ever made. Once used this number remains locked for futore reference to that title. Examples of these fields are given in Table LXTV.
Field Name Field/. Sample Data
Closed Caption 5 Y
Stereo 6 N Color 7 C
Type 8 MOV
Movie Number 9 1234567890
Table LXIV A sample fragment of the above Show list record fields is as follows: Y|N j C j MOV 1 12345678901 Field # 10. Group ID
(5 bytes) This 5 byte number will be from 00000 for no program link, to 65535 for up to 65,535 unique program links. This number allows for unique groupings of two or more special programs or shows that may need to be linked together for recording purposes. The linking or grouping of these programs would be required for the series recording of programs that do not have die same title name as in ROOTS 1 and ROOTS 2. This field will be 00000 if there is no program link and a unique decimal number up to 65,535 if there is a link. This unique number is kept until the linked programming is completed and any show with a reference to that number has passed out of die database. After that time, this number can be recycled and used over again. No provision is made to lock a Group ID number to any show on a permanent basis. The upper bound of 65,535 is necessary since this number is converted to a 2 byte binary number by StarSight and sent to die SU in this manner.
This number may be used to cross channel boundaries and link togetiier as a group two or more shows on two or more different channels, provided tiiat diere is no conflict in record times. 11. Title
(0 to 50 bytes) This field contains the title or name of the program, names of sports team, talk show, etc.
Examples of these fields are given in Table LXV. Field Name Fields Sample Data Group ID 10 0000
Title 11 Man flys.
Table LXV A sample fragment of the above Show list record fields is as follows: 0000 j Man Flys j The following four program description fields are to have different descriptions when available. Multiple descriptions will not show as multiple copies of the same description. A description must go into the smallest field tiiat it will fit completely into. If 4 different program descriptions exist, insert the descriptions into the appropriate length field in descending order. Fields 12 - 19: Descriptions, Critique, Episode Title, Production Year, and Director. .
12. Program Description 1 (0 to 300 bytes) This is a longest description of the of the program, show, sporting event, etc. 13. Program Description 2 (0 to 200 bytes) This is a shortened description of the of die program, show, sporting event, etc.
14. Program Description 3(0 to 100 bytes) This is a shortened description of the of the program, show, sporting event, etc.
15. Program Description 4 (0 to 50 bytes) This is the shortest available description of the of die program, show, sporting event, etc.
16. Critique (1 byte) Critics rating of the movie. This is '0' if there is no rating or a 1,2,3 or 4 depending upon the quality of the movie, 4 being the best. 17. Episode (0 to 50 bytes) This provides for the episode description of a series show. 18. Year (0 or 4 bytes) This is the year that the movie or show was produced. (1956, etc.)
19. Director (0 to 25 bytes) The name of the movie director. Examples of these fields are given in Table LXVI.
Field Name Fie Sample Data D Deessccrriippttiioonn 11 1 122 Man sprouts wings, flys south for the winter and saves die population of a foreign country
Description 2 13 Man sprouts wings, flys south for the winter and saves a country
Description 3 14 Man sprouts wings and saves a country D Deessccrriippttiioonn 44 1 155 Man flys and saves country
Critique 16 4
Episode 17 Flying man
Year 18 1999 Director 19 John Filmmaker
A sample fragment of the above Show list record fields is as follows: Man sprouts wings, flys south for the winter and saves the population of a foreign country ] Man sprouts wings, flys south for the winter and saves a country j Man sprouts wings and saves a country ] Man flys and saves country 14 j Flying man ] 1999 ] John Filmmaker j Fields 20- 25: Names of Stars
20. Star 1 Last Name (0 to 25 bytes) The last name of the 1st actor.
21. Star 1 First Name (0 to 25 bytes) The first (middle) name of the 1st actor.
22. Star 2 Last Name (0 to 25 bytes) The last name of the 2nd actor.
23. Star 2 First Name (0 to 25 bytes) The first (middle) name of 2nd actor.
24. Star 3 Last Name (0 to 25 bytes) The last name of the 3rd actor. 25. Star 3 First Name (0 to 25 bytes) The first (middle) name of 3rd actor. Examples of these fields are given in Table LXVII. Field Name Field# Sample Data
Star 1 20 Falls
Star 1 21 Joe Star 2 22 Floats
Star 2 23 Mary
Star 3 24 Soars
Star 3 25 Sam
Table LXVII A sample fragment of the above Show list record fields is as follows:
Falls j Joe j Floats j Mary j Soars | Sam j Genre Byte Fields: Fields 26 - 49
The Genre Byte Fields are divided into 3 categories. The first is the THEME category and it provides for the general description of die show type. StarSight uses this theme information to divide the programs into discrete categories when theme searches are done. The second category is the MPAA rating and is used to inform the viewer of the movie industries rating of appropriate age of the viewer for this show. This rating is usually only valid for movies. The third category further explains the MPAA rating.
The following 24 data fields are the explanation of the program theme type. A maximum of 5 of these 24 fields are set as 'T' for any 1 program. Some are mutoally exclusive and will not be set to 'T' in unison at any time. Field #
26. Action
27. Adventure
28. Biography 29. Classic
30. Comedy
31. Dance
32. Docudrama
33. Documentary 34. Drama
35. Fantasy
36. Historical
37. Horror
38. Martial Arts 39. Musical
40. Mystery
41. Opera
42. Romance
43. Satire 44. Science
45. Science Fiction
46. Suspense
47. Thriller
48. Western 49. Situation Comedy
An example of a record fragment involving the fields above is given in Table LXVIII: Field Name Field# Sample Data
Action 26 T
Adventure 27 T
Biography 28 F
Classic 29 F
Comedy 30 T
Dance 31 F
Docudrama 32 F
Documentary 33 F
Drama 34 F
Fantasy 35 T
Historical 36 F
Horror 37 F
Martial Arts 38 F
Musical 39 F
Mystery 40 F
Opera 41 F
Romance 42 F
Satire 43 T
Science 44 F
Science Fiction 45 T
Suspense 46 T
Thriller 47 F
Western 48 F
Situation Comedy 49 F
Table LXVIII A sample fragment of the above Show list record fields is as follows:. T|T|F|F|T|F|F|F|F|T|F|F|F|F|F|F|F|T|F|T|T|F|F|F| MPAA rating: fields 50 - 56 Field .
50. G (1 byte) General audience
51. NC17 (1 byte) No children under 17.
52. NR (1 byte) Not rated. 53. PG (1 byte) Parental guidance.
54. PG13 (1 byte) Parental guidance under 13 years.
55. R (1 byte) Restricted.
56. AO (1 byte) Adult Only. Most severe rating. Examples of these fields are given in Table LXIX.
Field Name Field# Sample Data
G 50 T
NC17 51 F
NR 52 F PG 53 F
PG13 54 F
R 55 F
AO 56 F
Table LXIX A sample fragment of fields 50 - 56 is as follows:
TjF | F| F| F|F|F| MPAA explanation: Fields 57 - 62. Field #
57. Profanity (1 byte) 58. Nudity (1 byte)
59. Violence (1 byte)
60. Adult Situations (1 byte)
61. Adult Themes (1 byte)
62. Adult Language (1 byte)
63. PPV Event: Field 63.
(1 byte) set to 'T' to indicate this show is a Pay-per-View Event, 'F' if not, empty if not known.
Examples of these fields are given in Table LXX . Field Name Field# Sample Data
Profanity 57 T
Nudity 58 F
Violence 59 T Adult Situations 60 F
Adult Themes 61 T
Adult Language 62 T
PPV Event 63 T
Table LXX
A record fragment for fields 57-63 is as follows:
T|F|T|F|T|T|T|
Fields 64 and Above: Vendor-Defined Fields
All fields following die 'PPV Event' field are optional (except the mandatory End of Record terminator). No minimum or maximum number- of these fields is prescribed, and no particular limit is enforced as to the number of characters in any one of these fields.
Vendor may use this portion of the record to provide additonal data related to die show which die prescribed format might make difficult or impossible to convey. Each Vendor-defined field should be used to describe one data element.
Field content is free-format, with the previously-stated constraint that all data must be transferred as printable ASCII text, with no Vertical Bar(hex 7C), Carriage
Return (hex OD), or Linefeed (hex OA) occurring as data, since these characters have the special meanings of "Field Delimiter" (Vertical Bar) and "End-of-Record" (Carriage Retorn and/or Linefeed), respectively.
The intention is to allow the vendor as free a hand as possible in describing die show. Additional information about show type, genre, category, subcategory, etc. can be placed in these fields, and also otiier types of information which may not be currently anticipated. If these fields are used, vendor must separately provide StarSight with a document which defines as fully as possible how tiiese fields are used by the vendor.
The example that follows is not intended to prescribe a set format; it is just illustrating one possible way the Vendor Defined Fields could supplement the other information in the record. In this example, we will assume the vendor has additional categorization available for sports shows, over and above what is prescribed in die normal format. The vendor must document the fields separately from the data itself: let's say Vendor XYZ has provided StarSight with a document containing the following information: Field Name Content or Meaning
SPNAME Name of sport
SPENV "Indoor" or "Outdoor"
SP$ "Professional" , "Amateur", or "Pro-Am" SPLIVE If present, game is being carried live.
SPTEAM If present, this is a team sport
NOTES ON SYNTAX IN VENDOR-DEFINED FIELDS SUPPLIED BY
VENDOR XYZ: "Field Name" is an unbroken ASCII string (no spaces or tabs allowed) from die list above. The presence of the field name in some cases implies a "TRUE" statos; in other cases a value over and above the field's name is also specified. If a value is being specified, the field name is followed by a single space or tab, and everything else in the field comprises its value.
Given this information, Vendor XYZ could now transmit StarSight a record witii Vendor-Defined fields tiiat look like the example below: First Vendor Defined Field 64 SPNAME Field Hockey
Second Vendor Defined Field 65 SP$ Professional
Third Vendor Defined Field 66 SPENV Outdoor
Fourth Vendor Defined Field 67 SPTEAM
Fifth Vendor Defined Field 68 SPLIVE Note that even tiiough SPENV, for example, is specified in field #66 in this record, it could be specified in any Vendor-Defined field, or not mentioned at all.
The same observation applies to all the Vendor-Specified fields. This is true because of the method used in this example of giving the name of the field as data.
If the vendor chose to stick to a more rigid convention, in which every field is always present whether there is data for that field or not, the name or usage of each field could be entirely position-dependent, and could be documented separately, thus eliminating the need to transmit field names with the data; either method is acceptable, and if die Vendor has another method they prefer, this would probably be acceptable too, so long as it stays within the rules stated earlier. A sample fragment of the above Show list record fields is as follows:
SPNAME Field Hockey | SP$ Professional j SPENV
Outdoor j SPTEAM j SPLIVE |
End Of Record (LINEFEED hex OA) and/or (CARRIAGE RETURN hex OD) Marks the end of a record. Flexibility of definition is to allow for the transfer of text between different types of computer systems. End Of File Record
Following die final data record in a file, die Vendor must append a special End-of-File record, which is defined to be a record that begins with the text string "ZZZZZEOF", followed (possibly with intervening Vendor-Defined fields) by End of Record. StarSight's software will encounter this text string when it is expecting to • read a Call Sign value; the value read will be tested against this reserved value, and if they match, StarSight's software will halt reading of the file. More importantly, this text string will also be used to test for completion of a file transfer. If a new file appears in the data input directory, the input software will examine the final record of die file for this symbol; if the symbol is not found, tiien the data transfer has either aborted in midstream, or has not yet completed; in either case, it would not yet be appropriate to begin loading die data. Note tiiat the definition of this record is tiiat it begins with ZZZZZEOF and ends widi End of Record; die remainder of die record may defined by die Vendor, within the usual constraints for Vendor-Defined fields. Supplemental information that would be useful here might include a count of die number of records in die file, the date/time of production, a list of stations with which problems occurred, or any other summary information the vendor considers relevant. SPECIAL NOTE(s):
The format of the Show list records that are used in building the StarSight electronic database are highly integrated into our database program and these formats must not be altered or changed in any way witiiout the written consent of StarSight Telecast. Use of the Vendor-Defined Fields is allowed, provided die syntax and meanings of the fields used are clearly documented in advance of use. Since the PO names used within the Show list file are referenced by the StarSight database application, the PO names must be unique and remain constant. The changing of any PO name without proper coordination with StarSight will cause a mismatch of data in d e StarSight database.
It should now be readily apparent to those skilled in the art that a novel television schedule information transmission system amd method capable of achieving the stated objects of the invention has been provided. The system and method can be implemented widi low cost microprocessors and memory in subscriber data processing systems. In the system and metiiod, television program schedule data is transmitted and stored in a manner that allows a low cost microprocessor suitable for use in a mass produced consumer product to carry out subset searching of the television program schedule data. Television program schedule information is transmitted to and acquired by die subscriber data processing systems in an efficient manner in the system and method. Fast schedule updates to accommodate schedule changes can be provided witii a low bandwidtii transmission system and method. The system and method is able to distinguish between currently broadcast schedule information and older schedule information included witii a broadcast tiiat was recorded. The system and method gives schedule update information priority treatment. The schedule information transmission is selectively encrypted in the system and metiiod. A single system time is employed in schedule information transmission portions of the system and method and compensation for local time is carried out in die subscriber units. In the system and method, the subscriber units are able to identify schedule information provided in different locations of a television broadcast signal. Portions of schedule information already acquired by a subscriber unit and which duplicate portions of new schedule information are retained in die system and metiiod, so diat such schedule information portions need not be acquired again by the subscriber unit. Data compression is employed in a unique way to make most efficient use of available memory in the system and method.
It should further be apparent to those skilled in die art that various changes in form and details of die invention as shown and described may be made. It is intended that such changes be included within the spirit and scope of the claims appended hereto.

Claims

WHAT IS CLAIMED IS:
1. A television schedule information transmission system, which comprises a central data processing system, means connected to said central data processing system for providing schedule information data for a predetermined territory to said central data processing system, said central data processing system including means for formatting the schedule information data for the predetermined territory into a predetermined schedule information transmission format, means coupled to said central data processing system for transmitting the schedule information data for the predetermined territory in the predetermined schedule information transmission formats, a plurality of regional data processing systems, each located in a region of the predetermined territory, said plurality of regional data processing systems each including means for receiving the schedule information data for the predetermined territory, means for selecting the schedule information data for the region in which each of said plurality of regional data processing systems is located and means for transmitting the schedule information data for die region, and a plurality of subscriber data processing systems in each of the regions, each of said plurality of subscriber data processing systems including means for receiving at least a portion of the schedule information data for the region, means for storing the schedule information data received by the subscriber data processing system, means for assembling portions of the schedule information data received by die subscriber data processing system for display to a user of the subscriber data processing system and a display connected to said means for assembling portions of the schedule information data to display the portions of the schedule information data.
2. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 1 in which said system additionally includes at least one intermediate data processing system between at least one of said plurality of regional data processing systems and a portion of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems in a region in which said at least one of said plurality of regional data processing systems is located, said intermediate data processing system including means for receiving the schedule information data for the region, means for selecting schedule information data for the portion of the plurality of subsriber data processing systems in the region from the schedule information data for the region and means for transmitting the schedule information data for the portion of the plurality of of subscriber data processing systems in the region, said means for transmitting being coupled to die portion of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems.
3. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 2 in which said at least one intermediate data processing system is a cable operator data processing system.
4. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 1 in which the schedule information data is transmitted in the form of commands, die commands including instructions for the plurality of subscriber data processing systems in each region and television schedule information used by the commands to assemble portions of the television schedule information to display die portions of the schedule information data.
5. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 4 in which the schedule information commands for the predetermined territory include region commands each identifying channels which are available in one of the regions in the territory and a region identification, each of said regional data processing systems having a region identification for comparing with the region identification of each region command to recognize region commands intended for diat regional data processing system.
6. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 1 in which said plurality of subscriber data processing systems in each of the regions includes a means for determining if certain of the television schedule information in the commands has already been acquired by die subscriber data processing system, and in which the certain of the television schedule information is acquired if it has not already been acquired.
7. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 6 in which the certain of the television schedule information includes show titles.
8. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 7 in which the show titles include character strings that have previously been acquired.
9. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 6 in which the certain of the television schedule information includes missing data for futore time periods.
10. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 1 in which each of said plurality of subscriber data processing systems in each of me regions includes a memory for storing database items comprising the television schedule information, each of the database items having a handle as an index into a handle table identifying memory locations corresponding to the handle.
11. In a television schedule information transmission system including a central data processing system for a predetermined territory having means for transmitting television schedule data for the predetermined territory and subscriber data processing systems in the predetermined territory, the improvement which comprises a plurality of regional data processing systems, each located in a region of the predetermined territory, said plurality of regional data processing systems each including means for receiving the schedule information data for the predetermined territory, means for selecting the schedule information data for the region in which each of said plurality of regional data processing systems is located and means for transmitting the schedule information data for the region to a plurality of said subscriber data processing systems in each of the regions.
12. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 11 in which each of said plurality of subscriber data processing systems includes means for receiving at least a portion of the schedule information data for the region, means for storing the schedule information data received by the subscriber data processing system, means for assembling portions of the schedule information data received by the subscriber data processing system for display to a user of the the subscriber data processing system and a display connected to said means for assembling portions of the schedule information data to display die portions of die schedule information data.
13. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 11 in which said system additionally includes at least one intermediate data processing system between at least one of said plurality of regional data processing systems and a portion of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems in a region in which . said at least one of said plurality of regional data processing systems is located, said intermediate data processing system including means for receiving the schedule information data for the region, means for selecting schedule information data for the portion of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the region from the schedule information data for the region and means for transmitting the schedule information data for the portion of the plurality of of subscriber data processing systems in the region, said means for transmitting being coupled to die portion of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems.
14. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 13 in which said at least one intermediate data processing system is a cable operator data processing system.
15. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 11 in which the schedule information data is transmitted in die form of commands, me commands including instructions for the plurality of subscriber data processing systems in each region and television schedule information used by die commands to assemble portions of the television schedule information to display die portions of the schedule information data.
16. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 15 in which the schedule information commands for the predetermined territory include region commands each identifying channels which are available in one of the regions in the territory and a region identification, each of said regional data processing systems having a region identification for comparing with the region identification of each region command to recognize region commands intended for that regional data processing system.
17. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 11 in which said plurality of subscriber data processing systems in each of the regions includes a means for determining if certain of the television schedule information in the commands has already been acquired by the subscriber data processing system, and in which die certain of the television schedule information is acquired if it has not already been acquired.
18. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 17 in which the certain of the television schedule information includes show titles.
19. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 18 in which the show titles include character strings that have previously been acquired.
20. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 17 in which the certain of the television schedule information includes missing data for future time periods.
21. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 11 in which each of said plurality of subscriber data processing systems in each of the regions includes a memory for storing database items comprising die television schedule information, each of the database items having a handle as an index into a handle table identifying memory locations corresponding to the handle.
22. The television schedule transmission system of claim 11 in which said means for transmitting the schedule information data for the region in each of said plurality of regional data processing systems has an ability to transmit the schedule information data for the region in different places of a television broadcast signal and each of said subscriber data processing systems includes a means for locating the schedule information data in die television broadcast signal.
23. The television schedule transmission system of claim 22 in which the different places in the television broadcast signal comprise different lines of a vertical blanking interval.
24. In a television schedule information transmission system, the method which comprises transmitting schedule information data for a predetermined territory to a plurality of regional data processing systems each located in a region of the territory, selecting the schedule information data for each region widi its regional data processing system, transmitting the schedule information data for each region with its regional data processing system to a plurality of subscriber data processing systems in each region, assembling portions of the schedule information data received by each subscriber data processing system for display to a user of each subscriber data processing system, and displaying the portions of the schedule information data to die user.
25. The method of claim 24 additionally comprising the steps of transmitting the schedule information for at least one the regions to at least one intermediate data processing system between at least one of the plurality of regional data processing systems and a portion of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems in a region in which the at least one of die plurality of regional data processing systems is located, and transmitting the schedule information data for the portion of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the region from the intermediate data processing system to the portion of die plurality of subscriber data processing systems.
26. The method of claim 25 in which the schedule information data is transmitted in die form of commands, die commands including instructions for the plurality of subscriber data processing systems in each region and television schedule information used by die commands to assemble portions of the television schedule information to display the portions of the schedule information data.
27. The method of claim 26 in which me schedule information commands for the predetermined territory include region commands each identifying channels which are available in one of the regions in the territory and a region identification, each of die regional data processing systems comparing a stored region identification with die region identification of each region command to recognize region commands intended for that regional data processing system.
28. The method of claim 24 in which each of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems determines if certain of the television schedule information in the • commands has already been acquired by die subscriber data processing system, and acquires the certain of the television schedule information if it has not already been acquired.
29. The method of claim 24 in which at least some of the plurality of regional data processing systems transmit the schedule information data in different places of a television broadcast signal and each of die plurality of subscriber data processing systems locates the schedule information data in the television broadcast signal.
30. The method of claim 29 in which the different places in the television broadcast signal comprise different lines of a vertical blanking interval.
31. In a television schedule information transmission system including a central data processing system for a predetermined territory having means for transmitting television schedule data for the predetermined territory and a plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the predetermined territory, the improvement which comprises means in said central data processing system for transmitting die television schedule data as commands, die commands including instructions for said plurality of subscriber data processing systems in said system and television schedule information used by die commands in said plurality of subscriber data processing systems to assemble and display a television schedule.
32. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 31 in which each of said plurality of subscriber data processing systems includes a means for determining if certain of the television schedule information in the commands has already been acquired by the subscriber data processing system, and in which die certain of the television schedule information is acquired if it has not already been acquired.
33. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 32 in which die certain of the television schedule information includes show titles.
34. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 33 in which the show titles include character strings that have previously been acquired.
35. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 32 in which the certain of the television schedule information includes missing data for futore time periods.
36. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 31 in which said system additionally includes a plurality of regional data processing systems, each located in a region of the predetermined territory, said plurality of regional data processing systems each including means for receiving the schedule information data for the predetermined territory, means for selecting the schedule information data for the region in which each of said plurality of regional data processing systems is located and means for transmitting the schedule information data for the region to a portion of said plurality of said subscriber data processing systems in each of the regions.
37. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 36 in which said system additionally includes at least one intermediate data processing system between at least one of said plurality of regional data processing systems and some of the portion of said plurality of subscriber data processing systems in a region in which said at least one of said plurality of regional data processing systems is located, said intermediate data processing system including means for receiving the schedule information data for the region, means for selecting schedule information data for the some of the portion of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the region from the schedule information data for the region and means for transmitting the schedule information data for the some of the portion of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the region, said means for transmitting being coupled to the some of the portion of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems.
38. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 37 in which said at least one intermediate data processing system is a cable operator data processing system.
39. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 31 in which each of said plurality of subscriber data processing systems in each of the regions includes a memory for storing database items comprising the television schedule information, each of the database items having a handle as an index into a handle table identifying memory locations corresponding to d e handle.
40. In a television schedule information transmission system, the method which comprises transmitting commands from a central data processing system to a plurality of subscriber data processing systems, the commands including instructions for the plurality of subscriber data processing systems in said system and television schedule information used by the commands in the plurality of subscriber data processing systems to assemble and display a television schedule, assembling the television schedule from the television schedule information in each of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems, and displaying the television schedule to a user of each of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems.
41. The method of claim 40 in which each of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems determines if certain of the television schedule information in the commands has already been acquired by the subscriber data processing system, and acquires the certain of the television schedule information if it has not already been acquired.
42. The method of claim 40 additionally comprising the steps of transmitting schedule information data for a predetermined territory to a plurality of regional data processing systems each located in a region of the territory, selecting the schedule information data for each region with its regional data processing system, and transmitting the schedule information data for each region with its regional data processing system to a plurality of subscriber data processing systems in each region.
43. The method of claim 42 additionally comprising the steps of transmitting the schedule information for at least one the regions to at least one intermediate data processing system between at least one of the plurality of regional data processing systems and a portion of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems in a region in which the at least one of the plurality of regional data processing systems is located, and transmitting the schedule information data for the portion of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the region from the intermediate data processing system to the portion of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems.
44. The method of claim 42 in which die schedule information commands for the predetermined territory include region commands each identifying channels which are available in one of the regions in the territory and a region identification, each of die regional data processing systems comparing a stored region identification with the region identification of each region command to recognize region commands intended for that regional data processing system.
45. In a television schedule information transmission system including a central data processing system for a predetermined territory having means for transmitting television schedule data for the predetermined territory and a plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the predetermined territory, the improvement which comprises means in said central data processing system for transmitting a predetermined character string comprising a portion of the schedule information to said plurality of subscriber data processing systems, means in each of said plurality of subscriber data processing systems for determining whetiier the predetermined character string has been acquired by tiiat subscriber data processing system, and means in each of said plurality of subscriber data processing systems for storing the predetermined character string in that subscriber data processing system if it has not already been acquired.
46. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 45 in which the certain of the television schedule information includes show titles.
47. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 45 in which the certain of the television schedule information includes missing data for future time periods.
48. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 45 in which each of said plurality of subscriber data processing systems includes a memory for storing database items comprising the television schedule information, each of the database items having a handle as an index into a handle table identifying memory locations corresponding to die handle.
49. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 45 in which said system additionally includes a plurality of regional data processing systems, each located in a region of the predetermined territory, said plurality of regional data processing systems each including means for receiving the schedule information data for the predetermined territory, means for selecting the schedule information data for the region in which each of said plurality of regional data processing systems is located and means for transmitting the schedule information data for the region to a portion of said plurality of said subscriber data processing systems in each of the regions.
50. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 49 in which said system additionally includes at least one intermediate data processing system between at least one of said plurality of regional data processing systems and some of the portion of said plurality of subscriber data processing systems in a region in which said at least one of said plurality of regional data processing systems is located, said intermediate data processing system including means for receiving the schedule information data for the region, means for selecting schedule information data for the some of the portion of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the region from the schedule information data for the region and means for transmitting the schedule information data for the some of the portion of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the region, said means for transmitting being coupled to die some of the portion of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems.
51. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 50 in which said at least one intermediate data processing system is a cable operator data processing system.
52. In a television schedule information transmission system, the method which comprises transmitting a predetermined character string comprising a portion of the schedule information to a plurality of subscriber data processing systems in said system, determining in each of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems whether the predetermined character string has been acquired by that subscriber data processing system, and storing the predetermined character string in mat subscriber data processing system if it has not already been acquired.
53. The method of claim 52 additionally comprising the steps of transmitting schedule information data for a predetermined territory to a plurality of regional data processing systems each located in a region of the territory, selecting the schedule information data for each region with its regional data processing system, and transmitting the schedule information data for each region with its regional data processing system to a plurality of subscriber data processing systems in each region.
54. The method of claim 53 additionally comprising the steps of transmitting the schedule information for at least one the regions to at least one intermediate data processing system between at least one of the plurality of regional data processing systems and a portion of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems in a region in which the at least one of the plurality of regional data processing systems is located, and transmitting the schedule information data for the portion of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the region from the intermediate data processing system to the portion of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems.
55. The metiiod of claim 53 in which the schedule information commands for the predetermined territory include region commands each identifying channels which are available in one of the regions in the territory and a region identification, each of die regional data processing systems comparing a stored region identification with the region identification of each region command to recognize region commands intended for that regional data processing system. *
56. In a television schedule information transmission system including a direct broadcast satellite, a central data processing system having means for transmitting television schedule data for the direct broadcast satellite to the direct broadcast satellite, and subscriber data processing systems having means for receiving the television schedule data for the direct broadcast satellite from the direct broadcast satellite, the improvement which comprises a plurality of regional data processing systems, each located in a region of a predetermined territory, said plurality of regional data processing systems each including means for receiving the schedule information data for the predetermined territory, means for selecting the schedule information data for the region in which each of said plurality of regional data processing systems is located and means for transmitting the schedule information data for the region to a plurality of said subscriber data processing systems in each of the regions.
57. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 56 in which each of said plurality of subscriber data processing systems includes means for receiving at least a portion of the schedule information data for the region from the one of said plurality of regional data processing systems for the region, means for storing the schedule information data received by the subscriber data processing system from said direct broadcast satellite and the one of said plurality of regional data processing systems, means for assembling portions of the stored schedule information data received by die subscriber data processing system for display to a user of the the subscriber data processing system and a display connected to said means for assembling portions of the schedule information data to display the assembled portions of the schedule information data.
58. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 56 in which said system additionally includes at least one intermediate data processing system between at least one of said plurality of regional data processing systems and a portion of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems in a region in which - said at least one of said plurality of regional data processing systems is located, said intermediate data processing system including means for receiving the schedule information data for the region, means for selecting schedule information data for the portion of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the region from the schedule information data for the region and means for transmitting the schedule information data for the portion of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the region, said means for transmitting being coupled to die portion of the plurality of subscriber data processing systems.
59. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 58 in which said at least one intermediate data processing system is a cable operator data processing system.
60. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 56 in which the schedule information data is transmitted in die form of commands, die commands including instructions for the plurality of subscriber data processing systems in each region and television schedule information used by die commands to assemble portions of the television schedule information to display the portions of the schedule information data.
61. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 60 in which the schedule information commands for the predetermined territory include region commands each identifying channels which are available in one of the regions in the territory and a region identification, each of said regional data processing systems having a region identification for comparing with die region identification of each region command to recognize region commands intended for that regional data processing system.
62. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 56 in which said plurality of subscriber data processing systems in each of the regions includes a means for determining if certain of the television schedule information in the commands has already been acquired by the subscriber data processing system, and in which die certain of the television schedule information is acquired if it has not already been acquired.
63. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 62 in which the certain of the television schedule information includes show titles.
64. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 63 in which the show titles include character strings that have previously been acquired.
65. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 62 in which die certain of the television schedule information includes missing data for futore time periods.
66. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 56 in which each of said plurality of subscriber data processing systems in each of the regions includes a memory for storing database items comprising the television schedule information, each of the database items having a handle as an index into a handle table identifying memory locations corresponding to the handle.
67. In a television schedule information transmission system, the method which comprises transmitting television schedule data for a direct broadcast satellite to die direct broadcast satellite, receiving die television schedule data for the direct broadcast satellite from the direct broadcast satellite at a subscriber data processing system, receiving schedule information data for a predetermined territory in a regional data processing system located in a region of the predetermined territory, selecting the schedule information data for the region in which the regional data processing system is located and transmitting the schedule information data for the region to the subscriber data processing system.
68. The method of claim 67 additionally comprising the steps of receiving at least a portion of the schedule information data for the region from the regional data processing system for the region at the subscriber data processing system, storing the schedule information data received by the subscriber data processing system from the direct broadcast satellite and the regional data processing system, assembling portions of the stored schedule information data received by the subscriber data processing system for display to a user of the the subscriber data processing system and displaying die assembled portions of the schedule information data.
69. The method of claim 68 in which the schedule information data received by die subscriber data processing system from the direct broadcast satellite and die regional data processing system is stored as database items comprising the television schedule information, each of the database items having a handle as an index into a handle table identifying memory locations corresponding to the handle.
70. The method of claim 67 additionally comprising the steps of receiving a portion of the schedule information for the region at an intermediate data processing system between the regional data processing system and die subscriber data processing system, selecting schedule information data for the subscriber data processing system from die schedule information data for the region and transmitting the schedule information data for the subscriber data processing system to the subscriber data processing system.
71. The method of claim 67 in which the schedule information data is transmitted in the form of commands, d e commands including instructions for the subscriber data processing system and television schedule information used by the commands to assemble portions of the television schedule information to display die portions of the schedule information data.
72. The method of claim 71 in which the schedule information commands include a region command identifying channels which are available in the region and a region identification, die regional data processing system having a region identification for comparing with die region identification of the region command to recognize the region command intended for the regional data processing system.
73. The method of claim 71 additionally comprising the steps of determining • if certain of the television schedule information in the commands has already been acquired by die subscriber data processing system, and acquiring the certain of the television schedule information if it has not already been acquired.
74. In a television schedule information transmission system including a central data processing system having means for transmitting television schedule data, and a subscriber data processing system having means for receiving at least some of the television schedule data transmitted by said central data processing system, the improvement which comprises said subscriber data processing system including a memory for storing database items comprising the television schedule information, each of the database items having a handle as an index into a handle table identifying memory locations corresponding to die handle.
75. In a television schedule information transmission system, the method which comprises transmitting television schedule data, receiving at least some of the television schedule data at a subscriber data processing system as database items comprising the television schedule information, each of the database items having a handle, and using die handle as an index into a handle table identifying memory locations corresponding to die handle.
76. In a television schedule information transmission system including a central data processing system for a predetermined territory having means for transmitting television schedule data for the predetermined territory and a plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the predetermined territory, each of said plurality of subscriber data processing systems including a receiver for television schedule data, a memory for storing television schedule data, said memory being coupled to said receiver, the improvement which comprises said means for transmitting television schedule data being configured to transmit the television schedule data (specify what is special about how the data is transmitted tiiat facilitates subset searching), each of said plurality of subscriber units including a memory controller between said receiver and said memory, said memory controller being configured to store television schedule data (specify what is special about die way die information is stored that facilitates subset searching).
77. In a television schedule information transmission system including a central data processing system for a predetermined territory having means for transmitting television schedule data for the predetermined territory including updates of television schedule data previously transmitted and a plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the predetermined territory, each of said plurality of subscriber data processing systems including a receiver for television schedule data, a memory for storing television schedule data, said memory being coupled to said receiver, the improvement which comprises means in said central data processing system for assigning a transmission priority for the updates of television schedule data previously transmitted relative to other television schedule data.
78. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 77 in which said means for assigning a transmission priority for the updates includes means for assigning relative transmission priority among the updates.
79. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 78 in which the means for assigning relative transmission priority among the updates assigns die relative transmission priority among the updates using update file names.
80. In a television schedule information transmission system, the method which comprises establishing a relative priority for transmission of the television schedule information between updates of originally transmitted television schedule information and originally transmitted schedule information, transmitting the television schedule information in accordance witii the relative priority and receiving at least some of the transmitted television schedule information at a subscriber data processing system.
81. The method of claim 80 additionally comprising the steps of assigning relative priority for transmission among die updates of originally transmitted television schedule information, and transmitting me updates of originally transmitted television schedule information in accordance witii the relative priority of the updates.
82. The method of claim 80 in which the relative priorities between updates and originally transmitted television schedule information are established by using file names.
83. In a television schedule information transmission system including a central data processing system for a predetermined territory having means for transmitting television schedule data for the predetermined territory and a plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the predetermined territory, each of said plurality of subscriber data processing systems including a receiver for television schedule data, a memory for storing television schedule data, said memory being coupled to said receiver, the improvement which comprises means in said central data processing system for identifying die transmitted television schedule data by time relative to other transmitted television schedule data and means in said subscriber data processing system for determining if television schedule data received by said subscriber data processing system has a time identification later than a time identification of television schedule data stored in said memory.
84. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 83 in which said system includes a recording device coupled to said subscriber data processing system, the television schedule data being broadcast in a television broadcast signal, said recording device including the television schedule data in a recording of die television broadcast signal.
85. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 83 in which said means for identifying die transmitted television schedule data by time relative to other transmitted television schedule data identifies die transmitted television schedule data by time through a time tag transmitted witii die television schedule data.
86. In a television schedule information transmission system, the method which comprises transmitting television schedule data witii an identification of the transmitted television schedule data by time relative to other transmitted television schedule data, receiving the transmitted television schedule date with a subscriber data processing system, storing the television schedule data in a memory of the subscriber data processing system, subsequently supplying television schedule data including an identification by time relative to other television schedule data, comparing the identification by time of the subsequently supplied television schedule data with the identification by time of the television schedule data stored in the memory, replacing the stored television schedule data witii the subsequently supplied television schedule data if die identification by time of the subsequently supplied television schedule data is later than the identification by time of the stored television schedule data, and maintaining the stored television schedule data in die memory if the identification by time of the stored television schedule data is later than die identifcation by time of the subsequently supplied television schedule data.
87. The method of claim 86 in which the subsequently supplied television schedule data is supplied by transmission.
88. The method of claim 86 in which the television schedule data is supplied by a recording device.
89. In a television schedule information transmission system including a central data processing system for a predetermined territory having means for transmitting television schedule data for the predetermined territory and a plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the predetermined territory, each of said plurality of subscriber data processing systems including a receiver for television schedule data, a memory for storing television schedule data, said memory being coupled to said receiver, the improvement which comprises means in said central data processing system for encrypting a selected portion of the television schedule data required by said subscriber data processing system to assemble a television schedule for display and means in said subscriber data processing system for decrypting the selected portion of the television schedule data.
90. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 89 in which said means for encrypting is configured to encrypt a show list portion of the television schedule data.
91. In a television schedule information transmission system, the metiiod which comprises selectively encrypting a portion of television schedule data necessary to assemble a television schedule for display, transmitting the television schedule data including die encrypted portion, receiving the television schedule data in a subscriber data processing system, decrypting the encrypted portion of the television schedule data, and using the television schedule data, including die portion, to assemble a television schedule for display.
92. The metiiod of claim 91 in which die encrypted portion of the television schedule data comprises a show list.
93. In a television schedule information transmission system including a central data processing system for a predetermined territory having means for transmitting television schedule data for the predetermined territory and a plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the predetermined territory, each of said plurality of subscriber data processing systems including a receiver for television schedule data, a memory for storing television schedule data, said memory being coupled to said receiver, the improvement which comprises a real time clock in said central data processing system for establishing a single system time for said transmission system, said means for transmitting television schedule data including means for transmitting the single system time, said receiver including means for receiving the single system time, said memory having a stored value for calculating local real time from the single system time.
94. The television schedule information transmission system of claim 93 in which said means for transmitting television schedule data further includes means for transmitting the value for calculating local real time from the single system time to said subscriber data processing system.
95. In a television schedule information transmission system, the method which comprises establishing a single system time related to real time, transmitting die single system time to a subscriber data processing system, transmitting television schedule data expressed in the single system time to the subscriber data processing system, providing a value to the subscriber data processing system for calculating local real time from the single system time, and calculating local times for a television schedule from the schedule data expressed in die single system time using die value.
96. The method of claim 95 in which the value is provided to die subscriber data processing system by transmission in the television schedule information transmission system.
97. In a television schedule information transmission system including a central data processing system for a predetermined territory having means for transmitting television schedule data for the predetermined territory and a plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the predetermined territory, each of said plurality of subscriber data processing systems including a receiver for television schedule data, a memory for storing television schedule data, said memory being coupled to said receiver, the improvement which comprises said means for transmitting television schedule data being configured to transmit the television schedule data as a show list for each day in die television schedule, said subscriber data processing system being configured to maintain show lists for a rolling window comprising a plurality of days extending from present time into futore time.
98. The television schedule transmission system of claim 97 in which the show list contains a list of show titles, show descriptions, show start times and show durations for a channel.
99. The television schedule transmission system of claim 98 in which said subscriber data processing system is configured to maintain a count of a number of times that character strings in the show lists are used in die rolling window of die television schedule and to use d e count to retain character strings from the show lists for use in additional show lists.
100. In a television schedule information transmission system, the method which comprises transmitting television schedule data as a show list for each day in die television schedule and maintaining show lists for a rolling window comprising a plurality of days extending from present time into futore time.
101. The method of claim 100 in which die show list contains a list of show titles, show descriptions, show start times and show durations for a channel.
102. The method of claim 100 additionally comprising die steps of maintaining a count of a number of times that character strings in the show lists are used in die rolling window of die television schedule and to use the count to retain character strings from the show lists for use in additional show lists.
103. In a television schedule information transmission system including a central data processing system for a predetermined territory having means for transmitting television schedule data for the predetermined territory and a plurality of subscriber data processing systems in the predetermined territory, each of said plurality of subscriber data processing systems including a receiver for television schedule data, a memory for storing television schedule data, said memory being coupled to said receiver, the improvement which comprises said subscriber data processing systems being configured to store the television schedule data in compressed form in said memory, a read only memory in said data processing system for storing fixed text for said system, the fixed text being stored in said read only memory in compressed form.
104. The television schedule transmission system of claim 103 in which the television schedule data and the fixed text are stored in Huffman encoded form.
105. In a television schedule information system, the method which comprises storing television schedule data in compressed form in a memory of the system and storing fixed text for the system in a read only memory in compressed form.
106. The method of claim 105 in which the television schedule data and the fixed text are stored in Huffman encoded form.
PCT/US1995/005169 1994-05-04 1995-04-24 Television schedule information transmission and utilization system and process WO1995031069A1 (en)

Priority Applications (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
KR1019960706307A KR100485279B1 (en) 1994-05-04 1995-04-24 Television Schedule Information Transmission and Use System and Method
AU26355/95A AU694521B2 (en) 1994-05-04 1995-04-24 Television schedule information transmission and utilization system and process
EP95921225A EP0761061A4 (en) 1994-05-04 1995-04-24 Television schedule information transmission and utilization system and process
JP7529004A JPH10503628A (en) 1994-05-13 1995-04-24 System and method for transmitting and using television schedule information
CA002189454A CA2189454C (en) 1994-05-04 1995-04-24 Television schedule information transmission and utilization system and process

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US22922594A 1994-05-04 1994-05-04
US08/239,225 1994-05-04
US08/243,598 US5619274A (en) 1990-09-10 1994-05-13 Television schedule information transmission and utilization system and process
US08/243,598 1994-05-13

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO1995031069A1 true WO1995031069A1 (en) 1995-11-16

Family

ID=26923084

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US1995/005169 WO1995031069A1 (en) 1994-05-04 1995-04-24 Television schedule information transmission and utilization system and process

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO1995031069A1 (en)

Cited By (79)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP0705036A2 (en) * 1994-09-29 1996-04-03 Sony Corporation Program information broadcasting system, program information display method, and receiving device
US5666645A (en) * 1995-04-26 1997-09-09 News America Publications, Inc. Data management and distribution system and method for an electronic television program guide
WO1997034419A1 (en) * 1996-03-11 1997-09-18 Thomson Consumer Electronics, Inc. System and method for inserting interactive program content within a television signal originating at a remote network
EP0823798A1 (en) * 1996-08-09 1998-02-11 THOMSON multimedia Receiver in a cyclic packet data transmission system
FR2752351A1 (en) * 1996-08-09 1998-02-13 Thomson Multimedia Sa METHOD FOR INDEXING DATA IN A DIGITAL TELEVISION TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
US5793438A (en) * 1995-11-13 1998-08-11 Hyundai Electronics America Electronic program guide with enhanced presentation
US5801747A (en) * 1996-11-15 1998-09-01 Hyundai Electronics America Method and apparatus for creating a television viewer profile
US5870084A (en) * 1996-11-12 1999-02-09 Thomson Consumer Electronics, Inc. System and method for efficiently storing and quickly retrieving glyphs for large character set languages in a set top box
EP0912054A2 (en) * 1997-10-24 1999-04-28 General Instrument Corporation Multi-regional interactive program guide for television
US5931908A (en) * 1996-12-23 1999-08-03 The Walt Disney Corporation Visual object present within live programming as an actionable event for user selection of alternate programming wherein the actionable event is selected by human operator at a head end for distributed data and programming
US5937331A (en) * 1996-07-01 1999-08-10 Kalluri; Rama Protocol and system for transmitting triggers from a remote network and for controlling interactive program content at a broadcast station
US5966637A (en) * 1996-11-12 1999-10-12 Thomson Consumer Electronics, Inc. System and method for receiving and rendering multi-lingual text on a set top box
EP0836321A3 (en) * 1996-10-14 1999-12-08 Sony Corporation Apparatus and methods for information providing, display controlling, and transmission media
WO2000002380A2 (en) * 1998-07-07 2000-01-13 United Video Properties, Inc. Interactive television program guide system with local advertisements
US6049333A (en) * 1996-09-03 2000-04-11 Time Warner Entertainment Company, L.P. System and method for providing an event database in a telecasting system
AU720866B2 (en) * 1996-03-15 2000-06-15 Rovi Guides, Inc. Combination of VCR index and EPG
US6141002A (en) * 1996-11-12 2000-10-31 Opentv, Inc. System and method for downloading and rendering glyphs in a set top box
WO2001047238A2 (en) 1999-12-21 2001-06-28 Tivo, Inc. Distributed, interactive television program guide; system and method
US6256785B1 (en) 1996-12-23 2001-07-03 Corporate Media Patners Method and system for providing interactive look-and-feel in a digital broadcast via an X-Y protocol
US6311329B1 (en) 1996-10-14 2001-10-30 Sony Corporation Information providing apparatus and method, display controlling apparatus and method, information providing system, as well as transmission medium
EP1343314A2 (en) * 2002-03-08 2003-09-10 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Video-recording apparatus
EP1398964A2 (en) * 2002-09-03 2004-03-17 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Content-recording apparatus and method, content-reproducing apparatus and method, and recording medium
WO2007022160A2 (en) * 2005-08-15 2007-02-22 Microsoft Corporation Acquisition of syndication feed items via an information workflow application
US7500259B2 (en) 2002-06-13 2009-03-03 Funai Electric Co., Ltd. Video signal receiver with daylight savings time transition support
USRE44323E1 (en) 1996-01-19 2013-06-25 Beneficial Innovations, Inc. Method and system for playing games on a network
USRE44566E1 (en) 1996-01-19 2013-10-29 Beneficial Innovations, Inc. Advertising system for the internet and local area networks
EP2538690A3 (en) * 1999-06-11 2013-11-20 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Catalog management system for video on demand system
EP2472752A3 (en) * 2010-12-28 2014-01-01 LOEWE OPTA GmbH Television reception device
JP2014075814A (en) * 1996-01-11 2014-04-24 Index Systems Inc Method and apparatus for transmitting and downloading setup information
US8843960B2 (en) 1998-09-17 2014-09-23 United Video Properties, Inc. Electronic program guide with digital storage
US8850499B2 (en) 2000-10-11 2014-09-30 United Video Properties, Inc. Systems and methods for caching data in media-on-demand systems
US8850477B2 (en) 1995-10-02 2014-09-30 Starsight Telecast, Inc. Systems and methods for linking television viewers with advertisers and broadcasters
US8863170B2 (en) 2000-03-31 2014-10-14 United Video Properties, Inc. System and method for metadata-linked advertisements
US8869204B2 (en) 1996-05-03 2014-10-21 Starsight Telecast, Inc. Method and system for displaying advertisements in an electronic program guide
EP2257053B1 (en) * 1996-06-14 2014-11-26 Starsight Telecast, Inc. Television schedule system and method of operation
US8904441B2 (en) 2003-11-06 2014-12-02 United Video Properties, Inc. Systems and methods for providing program suggestions in an interactive television program guide
US8918807B2 (en) 1997-07-21 2014-12-23 Gemstar Development Corporation System and method for modifying advertisement responsive to EPG information
US8931008B2 (en) 1999-06-29 2015-01-06 United Video Properties, Inc. Promotional philosophy for a video-on-demand-related interactive display within an interactive television application
US8949901B2 (en) 2011-06-29 2015-02-03 Rovi Guides, Inc. Methods and systems for customizing viewing environment preferences in a viewing environment control application
US8973069B2 (en) 2000-10-11 2015-03-03 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for relocating media
US9014546B2 (en) 2009-09-23 2015-04-21 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for automatically detecting users within detection regions of media devices
US9015750B2 (en) 1998-05-15 2015-04-21 Rovi Guides, Inc. Interactive television program guide system for determining user values for demographic categories
US9021538B2 (en) 1998-07-14 2015-04-28 Rovi Guides, Inc. Client-server based interactive guide with server recording
US9049073B2 (en) 2011-06-28 2015-06-02 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for initializing allocations of transport streams based on historical data
US9071872B2 (en) 2003-01-30 2015-06-30 Rovi Guides, Inc. Interactive television systems with digital video recording and adjustable reminders
US9075861B2 (en) 2006-03-06 2015-07-07 Veveo, Inc. Methods and systems for segmenting relative user preferences into fine-grain and coarse-grain collections
US9113107B2 (en) 2005-11-08 2015-08-18 Rovi Guides, Inc. Interactive advertising and program promotion in an interactive television system
US9113122B2 (en) 1997-04-21 2015-08-18 Rovi Guides, Inc. Method and apparatus for time-shifting video and text in a text-enhanced television program
US9113207B2 (en) 1995-10-02 2015-08-18 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for contextually linking television program information
US9125169B2 (en) 2011-12-23 2015-09-01 Rovi Guides, Inc. Methods and systems for performing actions based on location-based rules
US9137491B2 (en) 2000-02-01 2015-09-15 Rovi Guides, Inc. Methods and systems for forced advertising
US9143736B2 (en) 2005-09-30 2015-09-22 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for managing local storage of on-demand content
US9147198B2 (en) 2013-01-10 2015-09-29 Rovi Technologies Corporation Systems and methods for providing an interface for data driven media placement
US9161087B2 (en) 2000-09-29 2015-10-13 Rovi Technologies Corporation User controlled multi-device media-on-demand system
US9166714B2 (en) 2009-09-11 2015-10-20 Veveo, Inc. Method of and system for presenting enriched video viewing analytics
US9172987B2 (en) 1998-07-07 2015-10-27 Rovi Guides, Inc. Methods and systems for updating functionality of a set-top box using markup language
US9171580B2 (en) 2005-09-30 2015-10-27 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for recording and playing back programs having desirable recording attributes
US9177081B2 (en) 2005-08-26 2015-11-03 Veveo, Inc. Method and system for processing ambiguous, multi-term search queries
US9191716B2 (en) 2000-04-10 2015-11-17 Rovi Guides, Inc. Interactive media guide with media guidance interface
US9215504B2 (en) 2006-10-06 2015-12-15 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for acquiring, categorizing and delivering media in interactive media guidance applications
US9288521B2 (en) 2014-05-28 2016-03-15 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for updating media asset data based on pause point in the media asset
US9307278B2 (en) 2000-03-31 2016-04-05 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for reducing cut-offs in program recording
US9311405B2 (en) 1998-11-30 2016-04-12 Rovi Guides, Inc. Search engine for video and graphics
US9319735B2 (en) 1995-06-07 2016-04-19 Rovi Guides, Inc. Electronic television program guide schedule system and method with data feed access
US9326016B2 (en) 2007-07-11 2016-04-26 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for mirroring and transcoding media content
US9326025B2 (en) 2007-03-09 2016-04-26 Rovi Technologies Corporation Media content search results ranked by popularity
US9402102B2 (en) 1995-10-02 2016-07-26 Rovi Guides, Inc. System and method for using television schedule information
US9426509B2 (en) 1998-08-21 2016-08-23 Rovi Guides, Inc. Client-server electronic program guide
US9530150B2 (en) 1996-01-19 2016-12-27 Adcension, Llc Compensation model for network services
US9591251B2 (en) 1997-10-06 2017-03-07 Rovi Guides, Inc. Interactive television program guide system with operator showcase
US9674563B2 (en) 2013-11-04 2017-06-06 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for recommending content
US9681105B2 (en) 2005-12-29 2017-06-13 Rovi Guides, Inc. Interactive media guidance system having multiple devices
US9736524B2 (en) 2011-01-06 2017-08-15 Veveo, Inc. Methods of and systems for content search based on environment sampling
US9749693B2 (en) 2006-03-24 2017-08-29 Rovi Guides, Inc. Interactive media guidance application with intelligent navigation and display features
US9848276B2 (en) 2013-03-11 2017-12-19 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for auto-configuring a user equipment device with content consumption material
US9848161B2 (en) 2003-04-21 2017-12-19 Rovi Guides, Inc. Video recorder having user extended and automatically extended time slots
US9948962B2 (en) 2014-11-13 2018-04-17 Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc Apparatus and methods for efficient delivery of electronic program guide data
US9973817B1 (en) 2005-04-08 2018-05-15 Rovi Guides, Inc. System and method for providing a list of video-on-demand programs
US10063934B2 (en) 2008-11-25 2018-08-28 Rovi Technologies Corporation Reducing unicast session duration with restart TV

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4706121A (en) * 1985-07-12 1987-11-10 Patrick Young TV schedule system and process
JPS6418380A (en) * 1987-07-14 1989-01-23 Nippon Denki Home Electronics Teletext receiver
US5182640A (en) * 1989-04-27 1993-01-26 Sony Corporation Program transmission system and method
US5200823A (en) * 1991-03-29 1993-04-06 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Virtual channels for a multiplexed analog component (mac) television system
US5220420A (en) * 1990-09-28 1993-06-15 Inteletext Systems, Inc. Interactive home information system for distributing compressed television programming
US5283639A (en) * 1989-10-23 1994-02-01 Esch Arthur G Multiple media delivery network method and apparatus

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4706121A (en) * 1985-07-12 1987-11-10 Patrick Young TV schedule system and process
US4706121B1 (en) * 1985-07-12 1993-12-14 Insight Telecast, Inc. Tv schedule system and process
JPS6418380A (en) * 1987-07-14 1989-01-23 Nippon Denki Home Electronics Teletext receiver
US5182640A (en) * 1989-04-27 1993-01-26 Sony Corporation Program transmission system and method
US5283639A (en) * 1989-10-23 1994-02-01 Esch Arthur G Multiple media delivery network method and apparatus
US5220420A (en) * 1990-09-28 1993-06-15 Inteletext Systems, Inc. Interactive home information system for distributing compressed television programming
US5200823A (en) * 1991-03-29 1993-04-06 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Virtual channels for a multiplexed analog component (mac) television system

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See also references of EP0761061A4 *

Cited By (132)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP0705036A3 (en) * 1994-09-29 1998-08-19 Sony Corporation Program information broadcasting system, program information display method, and receiving device
EP0705036A2 (en) * 1994-09-29 1996-04-03 Sony Corporation Program information broadcasting system, program information display method, and receiving device
US5666645A (en) * 1995-04-26 1997-09-09 News America Publications, Inc. Data management and distribution system and method for an electronic television program guide
US9319735B2 (en) 1995-06-07 2016-04-19 Rovi Guides, Inc. Electronic television program guide schedule system and method with data feed access
US9113207B2 (en) 1995-10-02 2015-08-18 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for contextually linking television program information
US8850477B2 (en) 1995-10-02 2014-09-30 Starsight Telecast, Inc. Systems and methods for linking television viewers with advertisers and broadcasters
US9124932B2 (en) 1995-10-02 2015-09-01 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for contextually linking television program information
US9402102B2 (en) 1995-10-02 2016-07-26 Rovi Guides, Inc. System and method for using television schedule information
US5793438A (en) * 1995-11-13 1998-08-11 Hyundai Electronics America Electronic program guide with enhanced presentation
JP2014075814A (en) * 1996-01-11 2014-04-24 Index Systems Inc Method and apparatus for transmitting and downloading setup information
USRE44323E1 (en) 1996-01-19 2013-06-25 Beneficial Innovations, Inc. Method and system for playing games on a network
US9530150B2 (en) 1996-01-19 2016-12-27 Adcension, Llc Compensation model for network services
USRE44566E1 (en) 1996-01-19 2013-10-29 Beneficial Innovations, Inc. Advertising system for the internet and local area networks
US6006256A (en) * 1996-03-11 1999-12-21 Opentv, Inc. System and method for inserting interactive program content within a television signal originating at a remote network
WO1997034419A1 (en) * 1996-03-11 1997-09-18 Thomson Consumer Electronics, Inc. System and method for inserting interactive program content within a television signal originating at a remote network
AU720866B2 (en) * 1996-03-15 2000-06-15 Rovi Guides, Inc. Combination of VCR index and EPG
US9055341B2 (en) 1996-03-15 2015-06-09 Henry C. Yuen Combination of recorded program index and EPG
US8869204B2 (en) 1996-05-03 2014-10-21 Starsight Telecast, Inc. Method and system for displaying advertisements in an electronic program guide
US9423936B2 (en) 1996-05-03 2016-08-23 Rovi Guides, Inc. Information system
US9027058B2 (en) 1996-05-03 2015-05-05 Rovi Guides, Inc. Information system
EP2257053B1 (en) * 1996-06-14 2014-11-26 Starsight Telecast, Inc. Television schedule system and method of operation
US5937331A (en) * 1996-07-01 1999-08-10 Kalluri; Rama Protocol and system for transmitting triggers from a remote network and for controlling interactive program content at a broadcast station
WO1998009430A3 (en) * 1996-08-09 1998-05-14 Thomson Multimedia Sa Method for indexing data in a digital television transmission system
WO1998009430A2 (en) * 1996-08-09 1998-03-05 Thomson Multimedia Method for indexing data in a digital television transmission system
FR2752351A1 (en) * 1996-08-09 1998-02-13 Thomson Multimedia Sa METHOD FOR INDEXING DATA IN A DIGITAL TELEVISION TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
FR2752350A1 (en) * 1996-08-09 1998-02-13 Thomson Multimedia Sa METHOD FOR EXTRACTING DATA IN A CYCLIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR IMPLEMENTING SAID METHOD
EP0823798A1 (en) * 1996-08-09 1998-02-11 THOMSON multimedia Receiver in a cyclic packet data transmission system
US6049333A (en) * 1996-09-03 2000-04-11 Time Warner Entertainment Company, L.P. System and method for providing an event database in a telecasting system
EP0836321A3 (en) * 1996-10-14 1999-12-08 Sony Corporation Apparatus and methods for information providing, display controlling, and transmission media
US6311329B1 (en) 1996-10-14 2001-10-30 Sony Corporation Information providing apparatus and method, display controlling apparatus and method, information providing system, as well as transmission medium
US8893183B2 (en) 1996-10-14 2014-11-18 Sony Corporation Information providing apparatus and method, display controlling apparatus and method, information providing system, as well as transmission medium
US8104062B2 (en) 1996-10-14 2012-01-24 Sony Corporation Information providing apparatus and method, display controlling apparatus and method, information providing system, as well as transmission medium
US6141002A (en) * 1996-11-12 2000-10-31 Opentv, Inc. System and method for downloading and rendering glyphs in a set top box
US5966637A (en) * 1996-11-12 1999-10-12 Thomson Consumer Electronics, Inc. System and method for receiving and rendering multi-lingual text on a set top box
US5870084A (en) * 1996-11-12 1999-02-09 Thomson Consumer Electronics, Inc. System and method for efficiently storing and quickly retrieving glyphs for large character set languages in a set top box
US5801747A (en) * 1996-11-15 1998-09-01 Hyundai Electronics America Method and apparatus for creating a television viewer profile
US5931908A (en) * 1996-12-23 1999-08-03 The Walt Disney Corporation Visual object present within live programming as an actionable event for user selection of alternate programming wherein the actionable event is selected by human operator at a head end for distributed data and programming
US6256785B1 (en) 1996-12-23 2001-07-03 Corporate Media Patners Method and system for providing interactive look-and-feel in a digital broadcast via an X-Y protocol
US8650607B2 (en) 1996-12-23 2014-02-11 Banbury Technologies Llc Method and system for providing interactive look-and-feel in a digital broadcast via an X-Y protocol
US9113122B2 (en) 1997-04-21 2015-08-18 Rovi Guides, Inc. Method and apparatus for time-shifting video and text in a text-enhanced television program
US9191722B2 (en) 1997-07-21 2015-11-17 Rovi Guides, Inc. System and method for modifying advertisement responsive to EPG information
US9015749B2 (en) 1997-07-21 2015-04-21 Rovi Guides, Inc. System and method for modifying advertisement responsive to EPG information
US8918807B2 (en) 1997-07-21 2014-12-23 Gemstar Development Corporation System and method for modifying advertisement responsive to EPG information
US9591251B2 (en) 1997-10-06 2017-03-07 Rovi Guides, Inc. Interactive television program guide system with operator showcase
EP0912054A3 (en) * 1997-10-24 2000-11-08 General Instrument Corporation Multi-regional interactive program guide for television
AU739433B2 (en) * 1997-10-24 2001-10-11 General Instrument Corporation Multi-regional interactive program guide for television
EP0912054A2 (en) * 1997-10-24 1999-04-28 General Instrument Corporation Multi-regional interactive program guide for television
US9015750B2 (en) 1998-05-15 2015-04-21 Rovi Guides, Inc. Interactive television program guide system for determining user values for demographic categories
US9635406B2 (en) 1998-05-15 2017-04-25 Rovi Guides, Inc. Interactive television program guide system for determining user values for demographic categories
US6799326B2 (en) 1998-07-07 2004-09-28 United Video Properties, Inc. Interactive television program guide system with local advertisements
WO2000002380A2 (en) * 1998-07-07 2000-01-13 United Video Properties, Inc. Interactive television program guide system with local advertisements
WO2000002380A3 (en) * 1998-07-07 2000-03-30 United Video Properties Inc Interactive television program guide system with local advertisements
US9172987B2 (en) 1998-07-07 2015-10-27 Rovi Guides, Inc. Methods and systems for updating functionality of a set-top box using markup language
US9055319B2 (en) 1998-07-14 2015-06-09 Rovi Guides, Inc. Interactive guide with recording
US9226006B2 (en) 1998-07-14 2015-12-29 Rovi Guides, Inc. Client-server based interactive guide with server recording
US10027998B2 (en) 1998-07-14 2018-07-17 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for multi-tuner recording
US10075746B2 (en) 1998-07-14 2018-09-11 Rovi Guides, Inc. Client-server based interactive television guide with server recording
US9154843B2 (en) 1998-07-14 2015-10-06 Rovi Guides, Inc. Client-server based interactive guide with server recording
US9021538B2 (en) 1998-07-14 2015-04-28 Rovi Guides, Inc. Client-server based interactive guide with server recording
US9118948B2 (en) 1998-07-14 2015-08-25 Rovi Guides, Inc. Client-server based interactive guide with server recording
US9055318B2 (en) 1998-07-14 2015-06-09 Rovi Guides, Inc. Client-server based interactive guide with server storage
US9232254B2 (en) 1998-07-14 2016-01-05 Rovi Guides, Inc. Client-server based interactive television guide with server recording
US9426509B2 (en) 1998-08-21 2016-08-23 Rovi Guides, Inc. Client-server electronic program guide
US8898721B2 (en) 1998-09-17 2014-11-25 United Video Properties, Inc. Electronic program guide with digital storage
US9363553B2 (en) 1998-09-17 2016-06-07 Rovi Guides, Inc. Electronic program guide with digital storage
US9100686B2 (en) 1998-09-17 2015-08-04 Rovi Guides, Inc. Electronic program guide with digital storage
US9106947B2 (en) 1998-09-17 2015-08-11 Rovi Guides, Inc. Electronic program guide with digital storage
US9237371B2 (en) 1998-09-17 2016-01-12 Rovi Guides, Inc. Electronic program guide with digital storage
US8843960B2 (en) 1998-09-17 2014-09-23 United Video Properties, Inc. Electronic program guide with digital storage
US9311405B2 (en) 1998-11-30 2016-04-12 Rovi Guides, Inc. Search engine for video and graphics
EP2538690A3 (en) * 1999-06-11 2013-11-20 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Catalog management system for video on demand system
US8931008B2 (en) 1999-06-29 2015-01-06 United Video Properties, Inc. Promotional philosophy for a video-on-demand-related interactive display within an interactive television application
EP1250799B1 (en) * 1999-12-21 2016-07-27 TiVo, Inc. Distributed, interactive television program guide; system and method
WO2001047238A2 (en) 1999-12-21 2001-06-28 Tivo, Inc. Distributed, interactive television program guide; system and method
US9137491B2 (en) 2000-02-01 2015-09-15 Rovi Guides, Inc. Methods and systems for forced advertising
US8863170B2 (en) 2000-03-31 2014-10-14 United Video Properties, Inc. System and method for metadata-linked advertisements
US10015562B2 (en) 2000-03-31 2018-07-03 Rovi Guides, Inc. System and method for metadata-linked advertisements
US9307278B2 (en) 2000-03-31 2016-04-05 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for reducing cut-offs in program recording
US9191716B2 (en) 2000-04-10 2015-11-17 Rovi Guides, Inc. Interactive media guide with media guidance interface
US9307291B2 (en) 2000-09-29 2016-04-05 Rovi Technologies Corporation User controlled multi-device media-on-demand system
US9161087B2 (en) 2000-09-29 2015-10-13 Rovi Technologies Corporation User controlled multi-device media-on-demand system
US9497508B2 (en) 2000-09-29 2016-11-15 Rovi Technologies Corporation User controlled multi-device media-on-demand system
US8850499B2 (en) 2000-10-11 2014-09-30 United Video Properties, Inc. Systems and methods for caching data in media-on-demand systems
US9294799B2 (en) 2000-10-11 2016-03-22 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for providing storage of data on servers in an on-demand media delivery system
US9282362B2 (en) 2000-10-11 2016-03-08 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for caching data in media-on-demand systems
US8973069B2 (en) 2000-10-11 2015-03-03 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for relocating media
US9462317B2 (en) 2000-10-11 2016-10-04 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for providing storage of data on servers in an on-demand media delivery system
US9197916B2 (en) 2000-10-11 2015-11-24 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for communicating and enforcing viewing and recording limits for media-on-demand
EP1343314B1 (en) * 2002-03-08 2015-01-07 Panasonic Corporation Video-recording apparatus
EP1343314A2 (en) * 2002-03-08 2003-09-10 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Video-recording apparatus
US7500259B2 (en) 2002-06-13 2009-03-03 Funai Electric Co., Ltd. Video signal receiver with daylight savings time transition support
EP1398964A2 (en) * 2002-09-03 2004-03-17 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Content-recording apparatus and method, content-reproducing apparatus and method, and recording medium
US9369741B2 (en) 2003-01-30 2016-06-14 Rovi Guides, Inc. Interactive television systems with digital video recording and adjustable reminders
US9071872B2 (en) 2003-01-30 2015-06-30 Rovi Guides, Inc. Interactive television systems with digital video recording and adjustable reminders
US9848161B2 (en) 2003-04-21 2017-12-19 Rovi Guides, Inc. Video recorder having user extended and automatically extended time slots
US9191719B2 (en) 2003-11-06 2015-11-17 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for providing program suggestions in an interactive television program guide
US10986407B2 (en) 2003-11-06 2021-04-20 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for providing program suggestions in an interactive television program guide
US10880607B2 (en) 2003-11-06 2020-12-29 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for providing program suggestions in an interactive television program guide
US8904441B2 (en) 2003-11-06 2014-12-02 United Video Properties, Inc. Systems and methods for providing program suggestions in an interactive television program guide
US9973817B1 (en) 2005-04-08 2018-05-15 Rovi Guides, Inc. System and method for providing a list of video-on-demand programs
WO2007022160A3 (en) * 2005-08-15 2007-04-19 Microsoft Corp Acquisition of syndication feed items via an information workflow application
WO2007022160A2 (en) * 2005-08-15 2007-02-22 Microsoft Corporation Acquisition of syndication feed items via an information workflow application
US9177081B2 (en) 2005-08-26 2015-11-03 Veveo, Inc. Method and system for processing ambiguous, multi-term search queries
US9143736B2 (en) 2005-09-30 2015-09-22 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for managing local storage of on-demand content
US9171580B2 (en) 2005-09-30 2015-10-27 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for recording and playing back programs having desirable recording attributes
US10419810B2 (en) 2005-09-30 2019-09-17 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for managing local storage of on-demand content
US9113107B2 (en) 2005-11-08 2015-08-18 Rovi Guides, Inc. Interactive advertising and program promotion in an interactive television system
US9681105B2 (en) 2005-12-29 2017-06-13 Rovi Guides, Inc. Interactive media guidance system having multiple devices
US9075861B2 (en) 2006-03-06 2015-07-07 Veveo, Inc. Methods and systems for segmenting relative user preferences into fine-grain and coarse-grain collections
US10984037B2 (en) 2006-03-06 2021-04-20 Veveo, Inc. Methods and systems for selecting and presenting content on a first system based on user preferences learned on a second system
US9128987B2 (en) 2006-03-06 2015-09-08 Veveo, Inc. Methods and systems for selecting and presenting content based on a comparison of preference signatures from multiple users
US9092503B2 (en) 2006-03-06 2015-07-28 Veveo, Inc. Methods and systems for selecting and presenting content based on dynamically identifying microgenres associated with the content
US9749693B2 (en) 2006-03-24 2017-08-29 Rovi Guides, Inc. Interactive media guidance application with intelligent navigation and display features
US9215504B2 (en) 2006-10-06 2015-12-15 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for acquiring, categorizing and delivering media in interactive media guidance applications
US10694256B2 (en) 2007-03-09 2020-06-23 Rovi Technologies Corporation Media content search results ranked by popularity
US9326025B2 (en) 2007-03-09 2016-04-26 Rovi Technologies Corporation Media content search results ranked by popularity
US9326016B2 (en) 2007-07-11 2016-04-26 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for mirroring and transcoding media content
US10063934B2 (en) 2008-11-25 2018-08-28 Rovi Technologies Corporation Reducing unicast session duration with restart TV
US9166714B2 (en) 2009-09-11 2015-10-20 Veveo, Inc. Method of and system for presenting enriched video viewing analytics
US9014546B2 (en) 2009-09-23 2015-04-21 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for automatically detecting users within detection regions of media devices
EP2472752A3 (en) * 2010-12-28 2014-01-01 LOEWE OPTA GmbH Television reception device
US9736524B2 (en) 2011-01-06 2017-08-15 Veveo, Inc. Methods of and systems for content search based on environment sampling
US9049073B2 (en) 2011-06-28 2015-06-02 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for initializing allocations of transport streams based on historical data
US8949901B2 (en) 2011-06-29 2015-02-03 Rovi Guides, Inc. Methods and systems for customizing viewing environment preferences in a viewing environment control application
US9125169B2 (en) 2011-12-23 2015-09-01 Rovi Guides, Inc. Methods and systems for performing actions based on location-based rules
US9147198B2 (en) 2013-01-10 2015-09-29 Rovi Technologies Corporation Systems and methods for providing an interface for data driven media placement
US9848276B2 (en) 2013-03-11 2017-12-19 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for auto-configuring a user equipment device with content consumption material
US9674563B2 (en) 2013-11-04 2017-06-06 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for recommending content
US9288521B2 (en) 2014-05-28 2016-03-15 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for updating media asset data based on pause point in the media asset
US9948962B2 (en) 2014-11-13 2018-04-17 Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc Apparatus and methods for efficient delivery of electronic program guide data
US10567814B2 (en) 2014-11-13 2020-02-18 Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc Apparatus and methods for efficient delivery of electronic program guide data
US11212561B2 (en) 2014-11-13 2021-12-28 Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc Apparatus and methods for efficient delivery of electronic program guide data

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US5619274A (en) Television schedule information transmission and utilization system and process
US5790198A (en) Television schedule information transmission and utilization system and process
US7210159B2 (en) System and method for transmitting and utilizing electronic programs guide information
WO1995031069A1 (en) Television schedule information transmission and utilization system and process
US9521462B2 (en) Premium channel promotion system and method
US8955017B2 (en) Channels and services display
US5473609A (en) Method and apparatus for processing a conditional access program guide as for a satellite TV service
US20150156553A1 (en) Schedule system with enhanced recording capability
WO1998026594A1 (en) Television system with scrambling detection capability
CA2189454C (en) Television schedule information transmission and utilization system and process
EP0921681B2 (en) Method and receiver for managing service information in a digital television system
JP2011120310A (en) System and method for transmitting and utilizing television schedule information
MXPA96005827A (en) Method and apparatus for processing a conditional access program guide regarding a satellite television service

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 95193969.6

Country of ref document: CN

AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AM AT AU BB BG BR BY CA CH CN CZ DE DK EE ES FI GB GE HU IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LK LR LT LU LV MD MG MN MW MX NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK TJ TM TT UA UZ VN

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): KE MW SD SZ UG AT BE CH DE DK ES FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN ML MR NE SN TD TG

CFP Corrected version of a pamphlet front page
CR1 Correction of entry in section i

Free format text: PAT.BUL.49/95 UNDER INID(30)"PRIORITY DATA",REPLACE"08/229,225"BY"08/239,225"

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
DFPE Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed before 20040101)
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2189454

Country of ref document: CA

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1019960706307

Country of ref document: KR

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1995921225

Country of ref document: EP

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 1995921225

Country of ref document: EP

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: DE

Ref legal event code: 8642

WWW Wipo information: withdrawn in national office

Ref document number: 1995921225

Country of ref document: EP